The Core Skills You Need To Learn Hypnosis Conversational Hypnosis is an art that takes a certain set of skills

in order to master. These skills are quite attainable when the correct instruction and study of hypnosis has been focused on. Conversational hypnosis is the practice of inducing hypnotic trances through the focused skills learned in language, speech and suggestion. The primary objective is to induce a trance in order to accomplish a motivated outcome or reach a specific purpose; for example ease emotional pain, enhance health, and lead a happier life. The skills most required of you as the hypnotist are to master a signal recognition system, develop a relationship with your subject beyond rapport, learn the foundations of hypnotic language and advanced hypnotic language, develop authority strategies, recognize emotional triggers, destroy resistance as well as become skilled in conversational induction, conversational trance formulas and advanced frame control. All of these skills will help you attain the highest level of success in conversational hypnosis and achieve a better life for your subjects as well as for yourself. Signal recognition systems are the foundation in hypnosis training from which you will start to see when a subject is entering a hypnotic trance. These skills will aide you in opening your senses to the signs given by your subject when becoming hypnotized. Signal recognition will save you time in that you will be able to quickly asses when your subject is in trance instead of using unnecessary time to talk you subject into hypnosis. You will learn to see, hear and feel when people are responding to you hypnotically. This skill will also allow you to see those around you moving in and out of hypnotic trances produced everyday by their environments. The signal recognition system is important to master and continue to study as it is a core fundamental skill you will use throughout your study and practice of hypnosis. Everyday we develop rapport with people, friends, family and strangers. In conversational hypnosis it is important to learn to move on beyond the normal constraints of typical rapport and to develop deeper relationships with your subjects. In hypnosis you and your subject are developing an intimate relationship that allows you as the hypnotist into your subject’s mind, to understand and ultimately control certain thoughts through suggestion and language. In order to accomplish this you must go beyond rapport and embody an intense connection that allows your subject the unconscious freedom to do something simply because it pleases them to please you. This can be considered an abnormal or skewed relationship in that the subject allows you into their world and will follow your lead through the conversations, language and suggestions you give to them. This is a very powerful and unique connection. Conversational hypnosis is just that, there is an art to the language you as the hypnotist need to

master. Part of this skill is found in hypnotic language foundation and advanced hypnotic language. The main idea is that conversational hypnosis is attained through language. You need to learn how to shape the conversation you are having with your subject in a way that makes the words you speak themselves hypnotic, causing your subjects mind to set off into hypnotic state that responds to you in hypnotic ways. This skill should get strong focus from you as you master hypnosis techniques. In the language you use for hypnosis you will also want to develop your authority strategy. Authority strategy is a tactic that is required in order to be a successful hypnotist. It allows you to phrase suggestions in a way that the conscious mind of your subject responds, without this skill you will not be able to attain your goals as a hypnotist. The authority strategy gives your subject the will and wants to carry out your hypnotic suggestions, if you are not the authority within their trance the subject will not listen to your suggestions. This skill is fundamental as it will be a large piece of the puzzle that will aide in your success as a hypnotist and allow you to achieve your goals in hypnotism. Emotional triggers are the way to your subject’s unconscious responses, once you learn to control emotional triggers you will have the power to control the pictures and feelings that govern a subjects mind and ultimately change their life. This skill will give you access to pictures and feelings from within your subjects mind. As you perfect this skill you will be able to be able to alter feelings that lead to a healthier, happier, and more fulfilling life for your subject. This will aide in your objective to create rewarding and wonderful happiness for those who attain your services. In conversational hypnosis there is often resistance and this brings us to the next fundamental skill you will need to acquire. How you as the hypnotist will destroy this resistance, the most popular way being through the telling of stories. Destroying resistance through story telling involves you becoming the story teller to bypass the minds usual filtering systems that tell a person, “this is not right”, or “this can’t be happening”. Once you have mastered story telling that will create a hypnotic trance you will be allowed into your subjects mind to place new ideas, perceptions and thoughts dealing with their lives and how they ultimately live them. Conversational hypnosis will require you to also learn how to deal directly with the unconscious mind; this is done through conversational inductions. This concept is a way to formulate how to induce a trance through conversation, the real core of conversational hypnosis. Conversational induction will provide you with the skill of moving from normal speech into a conversational hypnotic induction with ease. In doing this you will then be dealing directly with the unconscious mind of your subject which is what your job as a hypnotist is ultimately all about. This technique will teach you to mold conversation that sounds completely ordinary to others into something much more intense for you and your subject; this in itself will take a grand amount of understanding and skill.

Conversational trance formulas are paramount in the art of hypnosis. These are formulas that will get you exactly where and what you want from your subject. Getting your subject into a trance come very easily to you but then where do you go from there, this is where conversational trance formulas are required. The formulas consist of the P-CAT formula, which is used for personal change in a subject. This is handy for those rough days, bad times in relationships and even when ending a relationship. The COMILA formula is used mainly for persuading and influencing people. This formula is helpful to people in their professions such as influencing an individual to want to learn, sales, education, management as well as for general inspiration. Next in the list of helpful formulas is the LIFE checklist. This is a checklist developed to help you know you are actually engaged in a hypnotic conversation. The LIFE check list consists of four steps that will help you identify quickly and efficiently that hypnosis is underway. Conversational hypnosis will also require you to master such techniques as “future memories” and “stacking realities”. Future memories are memories you place in your hypnotized subject’s mind that have not taken place yet. The goal is that they will become memories as the subjects unconscious brings them to their conscious mind as events that have already happened. The art in this is to make the future memory so compelling that the unconscious mind will want the memory to have happened and eventually follow your suggestion to make the memory a real instance that has happened in the past. “Stacking realities” and “accidental trance identification” are other techniques that help hypnotists to slip past the resistance and interference within a subjects mind that prevent hypnosis. Advanced frame control will also be paramount to master. This is the art of leading all your hypnotic interactions in the direction you desire. Without this skill you will not be able to control the direction of conversation, hampering your goal of creating a more peaceful, happy, healthy mindset for your subjects. All of these strategies, once mastered, will help you in the ease of your conversational hypnosis. There are many exciting and great skills involved in becoming a successful conversational hypnotist, while this information may seem overwhelming at first it is just a taste of the powerful skills that you will enjoy perfecting as you assume your role as a hypnotist. Once mastered many of these skills will provide you with a life time of learning and development personally and professionally, as well as help you to change lives for the better.

What Hypnosis is NOT! We live in a world today that is full of perceptions, deceptions and misconceptions; it is often hard to tell one from the other when learning about new things.

Hypnosis is no stranger to an incredible amount of misconceptions, which is why it is important to really understand what those misconceptions are before assuming you can or cannot accomplish an objective through hypnosis. To really understand what hypnosis, or anything for that matter, is you must first understand all that it is not. Once you know what hypnosis is not, everything you are left with is what hypnosis is. Hypnosis has been given many false pretenses through the media, movies and just plain rumor. Hypnosis is not the ability to have complete domination over one’s mind, nor is it domination over another human being. Another thing hypnosis is not is the ability to dominate another’s will. In a nutshell there is nothing about hypnosis that will lead you to complete domination of the world or human kind, so if this is your intention you should stop here and embark on a new path. The misconceptions that surround hypnosis can seem almost endless, which can often be the case when you consider any type of work that is associated with power over ones mind, thoughts, ideas and actions. There are all kinds of associations and false ideas that are created when society acknowledges that power accompanies any way of life, this include hypnosis. For example money carries the connotation of power, however unless you are knowledgeable about how to be powerful with money you will fail. The misconceptions about hypnosis must be wiped from the slate if you are serious about becoming an eloquent and masterful hypnotist. The most common misconception in the field of hypnosis is that associated with power. Yes it is true that you will own a sort of power over the mind of your subjects, however this is not to say you will be able to control them completely. Quite the opposite, part of hypnosis that few are aware of is that hypnosis is actually a type of negotiation with the unconscious mind. The unconscious mind is where you store your base of morals and ethics, and while you can as a hypnotist negotiate with the unconscious, you will never be able to change or control one’s morals and ethics. The ethical code stored in the unconscious is unbreakable, these are the ideas, beliefs and moral standards that every person chooses to live their life by. Among the common myths of hypnosis is the idea that one can completely control another, this is a myth simply because a person, whether in hypnotic trance or not, will only do what they want to do. A good example of this is the common entertainment of stage hypnotists. Stage hypnotists will ask for volunteers from their audience, volunteers know on some level

. or acts that a hypnotist may not want to be personally responsible for. However on some level in their minds they are volunteering because they crave the attention that comes from being exhibitionists. As the subject visited each hypnotist and relayed the messages back and forth the hypnotists gave him free treatments as they felt a little shame in the amusing yet harmless game they were playing. healthier and happier lives through the art of language and suggestion. All suggestions and whether they are carried out or not depends on the moral code of the subject and whether or not they truly. The ‘hypnotic messenger’ was created when two hypnotists who were seeing the same subject and exchanged messages through the subject. subconsciously the subject was in agreement or had not conflict with the messages the hypnotists were sending back and forth. All this leaves us with what is left. therefore is not possible. in this the unconscious mind will do all that is necessary and possible to reach that goal and work with the hypnotist for complete success. This process worked because there was no moral rule being broken or violated in the process of message relay. the ‘hypnotic messenger’ is a prime example of this. The subject was receiving free therapy. Conversational hypnosis is a way of healing and helping people to live better. The volunteers know they will be controlled by the hypnotist and they are consciously okay with that because it does not cause conflict with their moral code. ethically believe it is an acceptable behavior. This again is untrue on the level that this will most often conflict with the moral standing and ethics of most people. On the other hand a client that is given the subconscious message to do harm to another will not carry out the suggestion because it will often conflict with their morals. and the hypnotists were not only amusing themselves but learning in the process. Another common myth about the art of hypnosis is that you can create a person so controlled that they will do your evil bidding. The messages were placed in the subconscious while the person was in a hypnotic state. As a hypnotist it is important to focus on the fact that your goal is to help the mind fulfill what is important to that person. find and fulfill it’s purpose. A subject that is asked to commit an act that is forbidden by their religion will not do so even if it is something that may seem harmless to many people. Hypnosis is used to its full potential when all parties are prospering from it. The subject continued to deliver the messages and everyone learned from the situation.that they will be asked while in a hypnotic state to do things that they may not be aware that they are doing. they may even be embarrassing. such as dancing. which is what hypnosis really is.

such as the feel of the car. because as you sharpen your skills as a hypnotist you will always be affecting your subject. and suddenly we are at our destination. The rhythms we are used to. thoughts and suggestions presented by you. can relax us to the point that our subconscious takes over and does the work for use while we. Hypnosis is an altered state of mind. An example of an everyday experience that can often result in a hypnotic trance is driving. excuse the term as many like to call it. The most common thought is that hypnosis is an altered state of mind that brings the subject to a trance like state. and in fact many people spend a large amount of their days in hypnotic trances. The responsiveness in a hypnotic trance is much more sensitive than that of a normal state of being. When combined this is a correct assumption and a rather accurate description. This may sound strange at first but when you really consider all the activities we do everyday we have been conditioned all through out our lives to enter hypnotic trances. it is not magical or strange. However hypnosis entails more than just the trance like state you see depicted in many movies and television shows. Have you ever watched a movie and later realized that the only thing in your mind and field of vision was a 15 inch screen. will become part of your subject’s inner world creating a pallet for you to work with and mold into the desired outcome. The rest of the definition not quite as well known is subject is vulnerable to suggestions in order to change their lives. everything that becomes a part of your clients inner world will eventually become a part of their outer world as they put your hypnotic suggestions into action. Many times we get behind the wheel and know where we started. the hypnotist. it is a deep and complicated relationship held between hypnotist and subject that comes complete with a desired set of goals to achieve. Another thing that hypnosis is is a very natural way of being. This is important to remember. ‘zone out’. as you learn to entrance people you will start to notice those around you who are experiencing hypnotic trances in everyday life. . this is a hypnotic trance. people. When a subject is under hypnosis they are much more responsive as they experience their inner world the subject’s thoughts and ideas become more vivid and actionable through the art of suggestion and language. it is a word that many people seem to have a preconceived definition for. We don’t recall how we got there or any of the events that happened along the drive. obviously you can see the rest of the room.What is Hypnosis? While hypnosis is not a word we hear everyday.

fear. is one of the fundamental and guiding themes when learning hypnosis. suspense. This interaction with the words and information being relayed to your mind alters your state of mind and becomes a hypnotic process in itself. This emotional response is unconscious. however the ‘dark side’ of hypnosis is much more common and mundane than the entertainment industry would lead you to believe. As we have learned hypnosis is a natural and common occurrence in our everyday lives. a suspenseful tale of assassination. and a powerful thing to be able to accomplish for yourself. The Dark Side of Hypnosis We have all enjoyed a good story about the ‘dark side of hypnosis’. but is there truly a ‘dark side’ of hypnosis? In a way there is. ideas and ultimately could change how you live your life. we often get lost in the story and never realize what the ‘real world’ is doing around us. Entering this altered state of mind is a form of self hypnotherapy which is a very powerful place to put yourself. such is the objective of a hypnotist. and dog while focusing on the screen but the concentration and trance that is produced makes it seem as though the only thing that exists in the room is that little screen and the action it is producing. Reading a book. murder. movies and television. You have no choice in your emotions. love gone wrong or revenge. . the changing of your emotions. ideas and life. Runners experience runners high. In fact the entertainment industry is much a part of the ‘dark side’ of hypnosis as any other means in our society. it is simply a conscious response by your unconscious mind as a reaction to the suggestions you are presenting to yourself. For the most part we are constantly flowing in and out of hypnotic trances daily without realization of them. Hypnosis can and usually will result from any repetitive task you enjoy engaging in. These are common entertainments in the world of tall tales we thrive within. sadness and tears. There is almost always the effect that the book you are reading will change either your mood. As you read you experience changing emotions. they alter their mind and experience a trance like state while their body works they feel healthy and alive. The ‘dark side of hypnosis’ is a common theme among books. happiness. you do not get to choose how you feel about a thing.

post as well as other people’s opinions. If you compare this to today’s home life where most televisions are on at almost every hour of the day. disposable diapers instead of cloth and TiVo giving you the ability to never miss a single hypnotic message on TV. Yet happy in the world they have created for themselves without the influence of a television constantly projecting the ‘needs’ of everyday life. dark side to hypnosis. you will often picture a farm family with no more possessions than they need. GPS takes the place of maps. we are using a material object to make ourselves feel better about our status in life. Other times trances and hypnosis is projected upon us very purposefully. their objective and business is to influence you to buy an item. If you take a moment to think back to a time when there was no television. a very different reality takes place. disease. financial instability. when our current vehicle runs fine and may only need a good washing. bad news. war. one you may be persuaded to think you need. government. intelligence and information. Most advertising is created very purposefully. The main culprits of purposeful hypnosis that you may not be aware of are the media. However I am sure you realize by now the news is about catching our interests. rape. the sun rose. maybe a candle burning for light and a fire to cook food by. This is an example of the true. as un-ominous as it may sound. sell or do something you may not normally desire to do. nicer.Many times we are hypnotized quite by accident and these instances are generally harmless and well intentioned. We are being influenced everyday by thousands of messages targeted directly to persuade us to purchase bigger. news is no longer about bringing new happening events into our lives as it is now about driving you to watch the news. Joe had a great day at work and his wife managed to stay sane while watching their four children. I have yet to see a Swifter in a museum or on an episode of Little House on the Prairie. Good news would be much too repetitive and boring day after day. Honestly. there was a terrorist attack and his wife could no longer manage the children so she drown them in the bath tub. murder. better. news. what will bring us in to watch. In being persuaded to buy a new car. advertising. the list is endless. The story you will hear on the news however is Joe went to work. designed to drive you to buy. more convenient items. The news is just as abusive in its power to influence our lives. News by definition is supposed to report recent events. we are not improving the self from within. .

but there were millions and millions of other families that had perfectly normal happy days as well. It was then that a Scottish neurosurgeon by the name of James Braid came up with the term hypnotism. pay attention to the things that are happening around you. The easiest way not to fall victim to the ‘dark side of hypnosis’ or break negative hypnotic messages is to think rationally. Hypnosis Training – Learn the 4 Stage Hypnosis Protocol Hypnosis is a widely acknowledged process that can change the lives of many. sure it is important to know when bad things happen and to educate yourself to prevent them. Analyzing and ridiculing information will stand as a defense against negative messages and protect your mind from all around general pessimism. Joe and his family above definitely had a bad day no doubt about it.00 and dad experienced a rewarding day at work and came home an hour early. Not only is James Braid responsible for coining the term hypnotism he . real and proper Hypnosis training is best started by learning about the past and present of hypnosis itself. The history of hypnosis reaches centuries back. Sally learned to do a cartwheel. How do you compensate and keep a sane and realistic view of life? Take action in your own mind. The news no longer gives us an accurate representation of the world in which we live. critically. mom kept the grocery bill under $300. and originally. healthier and more personally satisfying. What is dangerous is to think that everyday the ‘news’ is all that is happening in our world. Know who you are and do not be a stranger to skepticism. it wasn’t until the 1880’s that hypnosis advanced from the ‘Dark Ages’ and into a more scientific realm. Hypnosis is created when a person is so intensely focused that it creates a freedom within the unconscious mind to act beyond the normal restrictions of what the conscious mind deems possible. Skepticism allows you to make your own decisions about what you take in as your true beliefs in life. by using hypnosis you can change your ways of life to be happier. because they to have been influenced to want more. little Jimmy got an A. Hypnosis is a powerful thing and it is important to realize these dangers in a world that is so prevalent with hidden messages and suggestion. The mundane hypnotic dangers of our world come to us through the unconscious being influenced by our societies influences and suggestions.The danger of this dark side of hypnosis is that it can often create a false impression of the world we live in. better ratings and more achievement awards. choose what you believe.

After further study he found that one could be hypnotized and still be wide awake. and idealism for the focus on a particular idea. As Braid experimented and studied hypnosis he coined the term hypnosis for reasons that the subjects undergoing it looked to be sleepy. Activating unconscious responses is your sign that you have successfully led your subject into a hypnotic state. at this time he attempted to change the term hypnotism to monoidealism. This must be bypassed in order for your subject to respond to you on an unconscious level. Resistance to hypnotic trance is created when the critical factor stands between your subject and their hypnotic state. Braid spent time studying Animal Magnetism and Mesmerism and concluded from those studies that hypnosis could be induced by anyone as long as they followed a certain set of simple rules. The 4 Stage Formula begins with Stage 1. mono. “this is not possible”. After you have bypassed all critical factors stage 3 of the 4 Stages is to Activate an Unconscious Response. The term monoidealism did not take and hence today hypnosis is still known as hypnosis. This term made better sense as the act of hypnosis is created by complete focus on one idea to the extent that it eventually becomes a reality for the subject. Absorbing attention is simply to capture the focus of your subject. Once you have bypassed the critical factor. Critical factor is known in hypnosis as the reasoning of the conscious mind that says. As James Braid has shown us through history there are rules to follow and steps to take to induce a person into a hypnotic state. after you have accomplished this you can move on to the second stage. The second stage of the 4 Stage Formula is to Bypass the Critical also responsible for the study that proved that hypnotism was not a product of magnetic fluids flowing through our bodies. to Absorb Attention.meaning one. . you will be able to present hypnotic suggestions in the form of advice. This requires intense concentration and the ability to draw your subject into you and to keep them following your lead with suggestions and language. which you will learn as we move through different articles. As long as no critical factor is standing in the way the suggestions will resonate with your subject and the advice will come out through the conscious mind and take effect. These steps are known today as the 4 Stage Formula.

the fourth stage is to Lead Unconscious to Desired Outcome. As long as you live outside of a cave. Once you have your subject in a hypnotic state and have accomplished the three previous stages you will lead your subject through their unconscious by way of suggestions to obtain your desired outcome. A fact about rapport is everyone knows how to develop rapport in a traditional sense. Emotional responses are derived from an unconscious level. When learning hypnosis you need to really focus on this skill to create the best rapport possible with your subjects. It is a harmonious relationship including 2 or more people that understand one another’s feelings and ideas. you have no choice in your emotions they are simply a product of your unconscious reacting to and implementing the thinking and understandings you posses. say a breakup or recent loss. This brings us to the fourth and final step in the 4 Stages. you do it daily. They will not listen to you or attempt to follow your suggestions. as well as for your client. a good example of an unconscious response is an emotional response. Rapport will build trust and comfort between you and your clients. You must be able to access and retrieve a response from the unconscious before you can begin working toward any desired outcome. How Rapport Can Help Your Hypnosis Rapport is a very valuable tool in the art of hypnosis. Unconscious response can vary. This step is simple to explain really it is as it sounds. they are immune to your reasoning and need time to emerge from the state they are in before you can induce a hypnotic state of which you are in control of. A fundamental understanding of what makes up a good rapport between two people will help you to create the type of deepened relationships you require as a hypnotist. When you successfully combine all four of the 4 Stage Formula you will be engaging with your subject in a conversational hypnotic interaction. the subject is already in their own hypnotic process. Make sure to note that if you are dealing with a subject that is in a heightened state of emotion. . You as the hypnotist will have no control over a person in hypnotic process of which you are not the authority. Rapport is the close relationship that you will develop with your subjects. Rapport also includes the important skill to be able to communicate those feelings and ideas thoroughly.Any unconscious response is a positive sign for you as a hypnotist. because you are doing your job. This will help you on your way to becoming a great hypnotist.

developing a rapport in hypnosis is anything but traditional. This technique will make the relationship stronger and more trusting. When you are looking for rapport in any situation it is paramount that you remember that other people enjoy being around people like themselves. Then take it away. Traditionally you build rapport with others by finding common interests. These rapports are the basis for the comfort you feel in interacting with these people on a regular basis. being nice. If the person try’s to re-engage you. complimenting another as well as the similar experiences you share. a series of experiences linked together. Fractionating. Many do not understand how rapport works and use traditional rapport building means during inappropriate times.You have a rapport with your co-workers. wide rapport. Each time you give your complete focus the person will develop a deeper trust and comfort with you. This can be . Refining the development of traditional rapport can make this a valuable and powerful skill for your practice in hypnosis. These are all good ways to develop rapport on a normal basis. in fact they should be different as the relationships with each are different. They are what make up our lives. Here you are looking to achieve a deeper relationship much quicker than developing a normal rapport with an acquaintance. The idea of experiencing a similar situation as another really works here. Fractionate rapport helps your subject work to keep the rapport going. Wide rapport is when you offer a subject many different experiences of you in different environments. Knowing how rapport works will help you in nearly every rapport building situation. you have successfully founded the beginnings of a rapport. friends and family. After you have successfully started the rapport in this way the quicker you will be able to dig deeper into the relationship. Those rapports may differ. clients. In this skill you give your attention full to the subject. This creates a safe environment for most individuals to open up within. experiences are important to people. As this creates a connection on a deeper level. Then you start the process over again. Another way to strengthen rapport is through wide rapport. get distracted. To be able to create a safe and comfortable feeling for your subject is fundamental. However. story telling and ‘matching and mirroring are ways to build rapport with in conversational hypnosis. This can cause the relationship to backfire and sometimes fail completely.

Building the rapport with your subject through fractionating. On the other hand if you are successful in matching and mirroring.done literally by going to different locations to see one another. They may even feel that you are making fun of them. wide rapport. Matching and Mirroring is when you mimic the actions. Matching and mirroring studies have shown that when the participants included in the study did not recognize the imitation a strong rapport was created. The key here is to learn to match and mirror unconsciously. You can use story telling to develop a wide rapport with each person you meet. Hypnosis is a very different form of communication. Once a person realizes on a conscious level that you are mirroring them it can cause them to feel annoyed and uncomfortable around you. This is a technique that when done correctly. story telling and matching and mirroring is fundamental. However. Those who discovered they were being mimicked were less persuaded by the entire presentation. outside normal awareness. and your subject is unaware on a conscious level that you are mimicking them it can build a very strong connection with the person quite quickly. body language. it does have limitations and you should have other means for developing rapport as well. If you do this you will be more likely to go undiscovered by the other person you are interacting with. and the rapport was damaged. Story telling is a great way to build rapport with someone. Matching and mirroring is a powerful technique for building rapport and therefore a powerful technique in improving your hypnosis. This needs to happen on an unconscious level for it to work. Through the telling of stories you can create many different realities in which your subject becomes comfortable interacting with you. hand gestures and signals to create an unconscious connection with another person. Remember this technique works only when it is unconsciously perceived. . Another way to improve rapport is to know how to use Matching and Mirroring. This builds trust and allows them to open up their mind to you more quickly. This is not a good way to build rapport and can be damaging. will help your subject feel more comfortable very quickly. It requires different techniques to develop a substantial rapport that the relationship can firmly stand on. It can also be accomplished through story telling.

The basic rule to follow here is to be nice but not at the expense of real communication. ideas and feelings. The air of desperation often causes those around it to feel obligated or under a lot of pressure. In order to develop a deep rapport with people you need to have full communication. As you improve your rapport skills you will be improving your overall skill as a hypnotist. If you do not the rapport will break down and a barrier will start to go up. One example is we are often too busy with politeness to show our true selves. Trying too hard is a mistake that can lead to the “Law of Reversed Effect”. Say what needs to be said. The first most common mistake made is simply trying to be too nice. No one likes to be surrounded with desperate people. even if it is unpleasant. In saying that it is important to be aware of the common mistakes made in building rapport. Both of these feelings can completely shut down communication. This means that everything that needs to be said must be said. The other end of the spectrum is we encounter people who are trying too hard to be nice to us. We often have the same exact conversations with these people and never truly build a lasting rapport with them because there is no real communication happening. This is because you are actually interfering with the unconscious process. Not having full communication can disable you from sharing important thoughts. When we try too hard we send signals of desperation.The 3 Most Common Mistakes Hypnotists Make in Building Rapport Building rapport as a hypnotist is very important. Either way you look at it. The second mistake that is often made when attempting to build rapport is trying too hard. It shows that we are too eager to please or desperate for company. Yes this is closely related to the first mistake. The ability to have great rapport with your subjects is one of the first tools you will encounter needing as a hypnotist. Of course you should be nice to people. Most people have experienced one end or the other of trying to be too nice. the more likely you will fail. a wall is constructed and these people remain casual acquaintances. . The “Law of Reversed Effect” means the harder you try. But there is a point in time in certain relationships when the line must be drawn. Common mistakes made in this area are hard to identify as ‘mistakes’ unless you are aware of what they are.

In fractionation you work on building a little rapport and then leave it alone for a while. ‘Instant rapport technique’ will help with this later in another article. Each time you repeat the process you will be digging deeper and deeper into a comfort zone and building a strong rapport with the person. This technique keep people in their comfort zones. Once an individual has pushed too much their counterpart will back off or become disinterested. ‘Fractionating rapport’ will help you to pace yourself in the amount of intimacy you seek. Maintaining a sense of what needs to happen to create rapport is essential to your success. Soon conversation. Salesmen encounter this often. Being aware of these three common mistakes in building rapport will help you to not only avoid them but to improve you hypnosis skills further. being too nice and wanting something too . especially so to the subconscious. When we want something too much we often become pushy and overwhelming. This will allow the unconscious to send the normal rapport signals to you through your subject. Let the subject come and re-engage you. If you are trying too hard with your subjects implement the ‘instant rapport technique’. stop doing it and use fractionation. The 3 Worst Mistakes Hypnotists Make in Building Rapport When building a rapport with other people there are various mistakes that can be detrimental to the developing relationship. This mistake is again closely related to the first two mistakes. trying too hard and wanting something too much. Three of the most common mistakes made when building rapport are trying too hard. And if you want something too much. stop and remember there is a point at which you must stop being nice to save the rapport. Soon over a small amount of time you will have built many steps to great rapport. If you are being too nice to your subjects. There is a solution for this. all have simple solutions to help you become successful. The third mistake that is common in hypnosis is to want something from someone too much. and you are only stretching that zone a little each time you go through the motions. push and pull will become a natural and familiar habit.When you try too hard you are not falling into a gentle rhythm where rapport is produced you are trying to force a relationship that is not ready yet. Being too nice to people. give and take. Once you recognize what needs to happen you should let your unconscious take over and implement the steps itself.

All of these are easily remedied as are the three worst mistakes you can make when building a rapport with people. When you accomplish this you will accomplish the task of opening up your speaker. “So what you’re saying is…” Active listening is different in that you repeat back what the speaker has said using your own words. The key is being able to recognize the mistake and know the solution. This is simply a set of words that frame the exact phrase you are repeating back. This shows you are interested. Rogers was a great psychologist in the early 1900’s. They may show you that they are annoyed with you or simply lose interest as well. The other solution to this problem is to take the advice of Carl Rogers. Carl Rogers said that you should always have a high regard for the other person.much. If you are bored or showing disinterest people will often respond by turning off. Again creating the idea that you are disinterested in your speaker’s thoughts and ideas. in the same language they used. When refining the skill of building rapport the first of three detrimental mistakes you can make is to show a lack of genuine interest. You are saying with your body and subconscious signals that they will not be criticized . There are two solutions to this first problem. All language has a neurological effect on people and when you change the emotional meaning of a phrase you can accidentally change the entire meaning. These signals range from a change in body language and pupil dilation to your actual focusing signals. if you are trying to build a lasting rapport you must find a way to convince yourself 100% what they are saying is worthy of respect. keeps your mind on track and clarifies what is being discussed. Two people having a conversation where neither is interested will damage rapport to say the least. The dilemma with this is that when you change the words and language you will often change the emotional meaning and tone of the words. Track back is similar to active listening. No matter what you think of them under other circumstances. In track back you repeat the same words back to the speaker. This is shown through signals given off by body language. You can also apply a track back frame in this skill. If you change or lose the meaning of what your speaker is saying it may appear that you weren’t listening at all. When you are focused and genuinely interested in what another person is saying your body responds in ways others pick up on a subconscious level. One is the idea of ‘tracking back’.

When two people are building rapport their relationship can fluctuate. This is important as it does not limit you. This type of rapport will get you deep in that area alone quickly. A deep rapport is when you base your entire interaction with a person on one subject. . If you have the ability to take on whatever status is necessary you will be able to open communication with anyone and start a rapport. The next horrible mistake you can make while trying to build rapport is to play the wrong role within a relationship. This has nothing to do with your annual income it is merely a place within a relationship. They need to be led into a new status. These consist of a high status. The final vital mistake you can make in your rapport building is to neglect a wide rapport and build only a deep rapport. right? The problem with this is that there are people who are unable to take on different status themselves. low status and equal status. For example an instructor usually has the high status in interaction with a student. You can only travel through the different status roles as quickly as your subject will comfortably follow. feelings and thoughts. A wide rapport gives a person many different experiences of you in many different environments. One is to meet in different locations to conduct your interactions. interests and subjects. you are in a safe place. If you are dealing with a person who only likes to be in a high status and you attempt to take away their role for yourself they will not be comfortable. Once you have done this you can slowly change your levels as they follow your lead and adapt to you. This could be enjoyable but time consuming. It is in your better interest to have a wide rapport so people can relate to you on many different levels. In fact this will usually result in them disliking you and distrusting you. interest or environment. Your subject can feel comfortable talking with you in many places about many different ideas. There are three different roles you can take on in every relationship you are creating. Now it seems that status would naturally fall into place within conversation. You must learn to be a flexible communicator. In order to develop rapport your subject needs to feel safe in order to share feelings and ideas with you. and the student has the lower status. Keep in mind the ‘pacing and leading’ principal here.or attacked. There are two ways to create wide rapport. The other is to develop wide rapport through story telling.

It has been present since people have been in existence. Because of this it is paramount that you learn to take your rapport skills out of the range of normal and beyond. In ‘go first’ you as the hypnotist must first enter the environment and experience you want your subject to have. As you continue to talk about different topics your subject will eventually be willing to open up to you about anything. topics. It is a deep connection that must be supported with good rapport. The Role of Hypnotic Rapport in Hypnosis Hypnosis is a deep and complicated process where the hypnotist and subject must have a wide rapport to support. It happens with everyone you come into conversational contact with. Always keep in mind that the better your rapport building skills the better you will be in the act of hypnosis. Anything you feel will unconsciously be projected upon the person you are trying to hypnotize.Story telling offers you an endless amount of places. The reason you need to enter the experience before your hypnotic subject is so they will pick that experience up from your subconscious as they are in trance. but it is very powerful. It is not fully understood and may never be. When you participate in conducting a hypnotic trance your unconscious will be opened to them. Hypnotic rapport is a time tested relationship. Rapport is not a term generated just for use in hypnosis. or ‘go first’ concept is an important one to become highly familiar with. Rapport is powerful in the sense that anytime a person around you experiences a trance they will inevitably take on a deeper connection with you and your unconscious mind. Hypnosis is anything but a casual relationship between two people. Because of this it is important to have the experience you wish them to partake in at the forefront of your mind when starting the rapport. Now that you are aware of the common mistakes and pitfalls of building rapport you can use the simple solutions provided to refine your skills. Because every . Now go forth and build elegant and beautiful rapport with everyone you know. themes and ideas you can open your subject up to. This deepens the trust between the participants and offers a sense of comfort in your company. Going first. And the rapport you develop with your subjects is instrumental in conducting successful conversational hypnosis. The more sense of your complete personality they have the more comfortable they will be in building rapport. There are many different techniques and uses for story telling that you will learn throughout your hypnosis training.

and they come out well. Ideas you never even realized you had come easily and seamlessly carry your listener. This atmosphere within in a person you are trying to connect with will shut down your thoughts and ideas.time a person goes into trance around you they develop an unconscious connection with you. This will happen even before those thoughts and ideas have even had a chance to properly develop and come to your conscious. People who are not sure of themselves or comfortable will unconsciously cut off successful communications before they have had a chance to even try. You never quite get past the small talk questions because you are not comfortable enough to advance into a deeper relationship. On the other hand you probably meet people that you seem to have an instant connection with. We have all met people that we have a difficult time connecting with. if you have the experience at the forefront of your mind they will bring it back with them after the hypnosis is concluded. If you have a good rapport with your subjects and they feel comfortable and trusting around you they will be able to easily open up to you. You want your clients and the people around you to feel as if they have known you for years and can open up to you anywhere. comfortable and trusting in themselves often send out unconscious signals to others that produce the same effect in others. You can aid in this process by making the mental environment even more comfortable by using the ‘go first’ method in hypnosis. You may have the same conversations over and over with little success in a real connection. You are charismatic with these people. In hypnosis you will want to have the effect of the second situation. This is a powerful part of hypnosis. . your ideas are good. It may seem that there is some sort of barrier up between the two of you. In these situations it can seem that the thoughts and ideas are flowing from you endlessly. Split personality? No. This is the way most people work. An example of this is prevalent in our everyday lives. It is important to remember that hypnosis is no casual relationship. This relationship is skewed because on an unconscious level these people are subcommunicating their sense of distrust and non ability to be comfortable around you. As you begin to make hypnotic connections with other people you will be unconsciously exploring their mind as they will be making a connection with your unconscious as well. Those who are confident. It allows each person to explore thoughts and ideas they never knew they had until that precise moment.

Developing and instant rapport with a complete stranger is a skill that will attribute to your success as a hypnotist. However hypnosis is not a normal or casual relationship. Rapport hooks are developed in a way that will keep people coming back to you to build on the relationship. The key here is to avoid forcing information on to them. The rapport here is focused and good. ideas as well as communicate them well with one another. If a person feels that they are working hard to build something they will also continue to work to maintain the past success they have had. Give a casual tone. Good rapport can be established through different methods such as the ‘go first’ method. and coming back to fill in the informational gaps in you are purposefully leaving in your stories. but leave what. . In order to build a strong and wide rapport you will need to practice and perfect certain skills. One way to get a person to keep coming back for that information is to give them small pieces of information that may not be complete. This is established through good rapport. When you put rapport hooks into action. Everyone does this everyday with the different relationships they share with family. Get your subject interested but leave your topics open by adding suspense and unfinished information. The hooks will get your subject to keep asking questions. A deep amount of comfort. why and how open for your subject to dig with. It causes people to work hard and value the relationships they are building. Without rapport your subject will not be open to your hypnotic suggestions and communications. Remember they are going to let you into their mind this is not a place you open to just a perfect stranger. In this relationship you understand and relate to people’s feelings. trust and familiarity must be established before you can reach your goals with a hypnotic subject. Rapport hooks are going to do the work of drawing your subject into you as you get acquainted. Rapport in normal circumstances can often come easily. How to Create Irresistible Curiosity With Rapport Hooks Using Hypnosis Rapport is a key skill that you will need to master to be a successful hypnotist. friends and co-workers. it comes easily and casually. Leave questions in their mind as you tell stories. they will keep the person coming back for more information. Rapport is the harmonious relationship that you share with people. As you are learning hypnosis you will want to focus on advanced strategies for building rapport. Think of how easily you share your life with a spouse or your best friend. Creating and building on ‘rapport hooks’ is a great skill that will get other people to build rapport with you.

Getting casually distracted by looking around or engaging your attention elsewhere will cause the subject to re-engage you. It is true there are . distract yourself. Fractionate rapport happens when you giving rapport then consciously taking it away. This makes the relationship more valued yet again because it is not being forced upon them. In this manner you are elegantly giving them a good story and drawing them in as well. use the name of the country but give no specifics about where you went. faster than normal. They are asking for it and earning it. Let them probe for these answers. an innocent flirtation. They then have to work to get it back. Again this is causing the person to work for your attention. The Importance of An Accurate Signal Recognitions System in Hypnosis There are signs and signals that surround all of us everyday. The more push and pull you involve in your conversations the quicker and deeper your rapport will go. When you use rapport hooks it will also help you with fractionate rapport. when to eat and when we should be sleepy. If the person does re-engage you then you are on board with the beginnings of a foundation for an advanced rapport. While you are talking remember to use a casual tone and present the information in a way that inclines them to ask for more. Tell them the scenery is beautiful but let them ask about the region or sites you saw. if you are telling a story about a place you visited. Asking you questions is subconsciously earning them the right to the information and they begin to feel it is more important. If your subject’s curiosity is peaked they will be inclined to want to know more to the point of asking you. and then take your attention away. When using these advanced rapport building skills you will successfully push your rapport further. These skills will take your relationship to higher levels of comfort and trust quickly so a good and wide enough rapport is set to continue. The more curiosity and interest the person has the more questions they will ask.For example. Once this is founded and put into place you will be able to begin to put your subject into trance and begin the real work of hypnosis. needs and feelings within others they need met and the signals of trance. There are signals that are concrete. You can do this with almost any topic. These signals tell us when it is okay to cross the street. Give your subject your full attention for a while. There are also signals all around us that are not as obvious. You give it. then. Some of those signals come from people and others come from objects.

Keep your view simple and true. things are we are deceiving ourselves. When a woman is pregnant these things change in very small ways. Most people view the world as they want it to be. or want to believe. Milton Erickson was so precise in his recognition of signals that he could tell things about a person that they perhaps had only discovered moments earlier. interests. Once a woman visited him and was very skeptical . our lives and the lives of others in skewed terms. factual. In order to see things as they truly are there are two things you must do for yourself. As humans we are accustomed to seeing what we expect. Erickson believed as many hypnotists do today that the unconscious was completely separate from the conscious.people around you everyday falling in and out of trances. The first is to recognize what is actually out there. We filter out what we don’t want and view the world. There are also changes within the body that affect the pelvis and its structure. When we see things the way in which we believe. But before you can easily spot signals coming from others you must first teach yourself a few things. He specialized in medical hypnosis and family therapy. The hair line moves by fractions. If you can learn to view things as they actually are you will be opening your mind to the truth of the world. Erickson was a leading psychiatrist. Erickson’s ability to read signals was so attuned he could read signals from subjects that other doctors never even realized. He used his keen sense of signal recognition as he closely watched people and noticed things others would never see. The second thing you need to do is to learn to recognize the signals that come when you are successful in a thing. You need to learn to see the world as it is. At the beginning of hypnosis it is vital that you learn to recognize these signals. After you have learned to open your mind and do these two things successfully on a consistent basis you will be able to attune your ‘accurate signal recognition’ even further. Look for the signals that tell you are being successful in whatever it is that you are doing. responses and learning abilities. whether you are viewing the world or your front yard. Plain and simple. Many times people do not realize the signals that are coming from those in trance. Milton Erickson was practiced and precise in his accurate signal recognition. Erickson could tell a woman was expecting a child in the first weeks of pregnancy just by the tilt of her hips and movement of her hairline. so little unless you were keen to the idea you would never notice. born in the early 1900’s. This included that the unconscious mind possessed its own awareness.

Many people would just attribute this small signal as something that happens when one is not comfortable in their body. . She would bump them as she moved her arms and gestured with her hands.about seeing yet another psychiatrist because no other psychiatrist had recognized her dilemma as of yet. and if signal recognition can help you here it can more than likely help you any where. After all it is always good to know when a woman is actually a man. He could tell simply from the signals she was sending out that she was really a man. depending on the size of her chest I am sure. This can be done with accurate signal recognition systems as well as knowing how to asses trance signals. anything from the glazed look of entering a trance. It will also help in showing you when people are responding to your ideas and suggestions in the ways you want them to. Acute visual recognition can show you changes in the smallest detail. Noticing changes in your subjects and the people around you is an important skill to perfect. Her body language was that of a girls who had not yet figured out how to work around new breasts. This will aid you greatly in seeing the signals that someone is entering trance. Signal recognition systems are a key tool in hypnosis. They can tell you volumes about a person once you learn to recognize and read the signals properly. Milton Erickson was noted for his signal recognition and it was fundamental in his success as a hypnotist. whether produced by you or an outside source. Or many may not have even noticed it at all. This is a perfection you as a hypnotist should strive for. Erickson told her immediately that he needed to know how long she had been a woman for. As you learn more about hypnosis and signal recognition systems it is important to focus on and develop them for yourself. Accurate signal recognition systems are important because they are your first clue that a person is responding to you hypnotically. These changes and details are very important. to the smallest detail physical change. that the smallest signals a person gives off can send a large amount of information your way. Milton Erickson had a perfected eye for picking up on the smallest signals that people sent out. He knew. How To Spot When Someone Is In Hypnosis: The Most Obvious Hypnotic Trance Signals Hypnosis is an art where it is vital that you know how to spot when someone is entering a trance. The signals you can pick up on can be quite obvious or very minute. as you need to know now.

However there are subjects whose breathing will speed up as well. As a person goes into a trance they muscles in the face begin to relax and their face will start to appear more symmetrical. Usually the rate of breathing will slow as they are becoming more relaxed under trance. We will get to discuss these here and you will learn how to tune into the different signals your subjects will be showing when they are entering a hypnotic trance. Of course you can monitor their chest to see the rate of breath. The left side of the face will more closely match the right side. It is your jobs as the hypnotist to attune yourself to the different subjects you have and realize what is different for each one. Staring straight on at someone’s chest. If you are monitoring their chest it is a good idea to do this with your peripheral vision. Signal recognition systems are not a specific set of rules to follow. In order to tell if a persons breathing has changed you will undoubtedly have to be studying their body. . If you are asking them to relax into a trance their breathing will more than likely slow. especially a female subject is never a good idea. This is not about seeing one or two distinct signs from your subject. but distinguishing what is different for that person from the norm. The rate of breathing the person is experiencing is often dependant on the focus of your conversation. however this may seem offensive to some people.There are other obvious signals that a person is going into trance. There are ways of doing this without getting slapped or punched. As we look at the different signs of trance it is important to note that not all signals will be the same for every person. The second most obvious sign that a person is entering a hypnotic state is the smoothing out of facial features. Other means of monitoring rate of breath is to watch the rise and fall of a person’s shoulders or rib cage. Both of these move with every breath you take and will be fairly obvious and easy to spot. If you are taking them through an exciting chain of events or they feel imposing danger their rate of breathing may quicken. These are unconscious changes that occur without the conscious control of the person being hypnotized. If you have ever looked a person straight on in the face you will often notice that most people’s faces are not completely symmetrical. The most obvious signal that a person is entering into a highly focused state of trance is the change in their breathing. During hypnosis when a person is very focused and beginning to enter a trance there are certain aspects of their physiology that will inevitably change.

Sometimes a person will show no eye movement at all. The twitching of muscles is caused by the cathartic process that the muscles experience when completely relaxed. As you are watching your subjects face for signs of evening out you may very well be able to pick up on the third most obvious signal at the same time. All these signs are showing you that a person’s attention is completely affixed and they are falling into a trance. The bigger the muscle twitching the easier it is to spot. This is easy to see especially if you are dealing with a person who normally makes a lot of hand gestures or has animated body language. Many subjects will experience facial ticks or shoulder twitches. When a subject is going into hypnosis and their attention is being fully absorbed there are slight changes in their eyes that you will be able to see. more passive. especially if you are prone to looking at a persons face while talking to them. Involuntary muscle twitches can affect any part of the body that has a muscle.This is a fairly easy signal to spot. Number five on the list of obvious signs is almost the opposite of muscle twitches. This is noticeable both as a changing personality trait and that it can ultimately make your job as the hypnotist easier. This is when a person’s attention is absorbed. it is the effect of immobility of the body. They can be seen straight on or be easily spotted through your peripheral vision. It may look as though they are ‘zoning out’ or staring at nothing in particular. Another affect on the eyes of trance is they can become slightly glazed over or sleepy looking. If you are dealing with someone who rarely sits still you will almost immediately notice the lack of mobility of the body. The fourth obvious sign of trance is involuntary muscle twitches. The final obvious signal in the six most obvious is the increase in passive responses given by a person. these are both within your line of vision and pretty noticeable. These are of course easy to spot and can almost be eye catching. As they go into trance and you are looking at their face you will be able to see the muscles relaxing and the face visibly starts to even out. If their movements begin to slow down or actually stop all together you will know they are entering an altered state of mind. Sometimes when a person is going into a hypnotic trance they will stop moving all together. This more agreeable demeanor will be much more willing to follow your lead. As many people enter an altered state of mind the will become less argumentative. The first is the eyes will become fixed on one spot in space. .

The six obvious signals we have gone over here are easy to spot. The most obvious signs include changes in breathing. you are looking for changes from the normal state of the person you are currently dealing with. Keep in mind as you experience new subjects and learn to put new people into trance you will probably discover other obvious signs that are unique to different individuals. There are outside influences that can tamper with the accuracy of your judgment in this signal. a smoothness of facial features. attention absorption. Accurate signal recognition is used to help us to see what is really happening around us and to realize the signals that tell us we are being successful in the things we do. It is important to hone these signals in the field of hypnosis as well. In this article we will go over the less obvious signs that you are putting a person into trance. If you are not attuned to the signals of trance then there is the possibility that you will be doing more work than you need to in order to alter the state of mind of the people around you. involuntary muscle movements. These are the signals that will be more difficult to spot and will require a more focused sense of accurate signal recognition. How To Spot When Someone Is In Hypnosis: The Little Known Hypnotic Trance Signals Recognizing the signals that happen around us everyday is important in itself. Change in pupil dilation is the change in size of the black center of the eye. It is equally important to see things as they really are which will aid in your success of seeing the minor signals that light the way to trance In hypnosis there are very obvious signs that a person is entering an altered state of mind and there are subtle less obvious signs too. . Always remember when you are looking for signals of trance that you are not looking for one specific item. This signal is harder to see for several reasons. As you learn to spot as many signals coming from those around you going into altered states of mind you will become seasoned and be able to conduct your hypnosis quicker and easier than ever. Learning to spot these signals will also aid you in the future when you are learning to borrow trances already in progress. lack of mobility and increased passive responses. The skill of being able to spot when someone is entering a trance is really at the core of signal recognition systems and is easy to practice as people are constantly moving in and out of trances around you all the time. The first trance signal we will discuss is the change in pupil dilation.

No matter which way the heart rate goes. which could be a signal in itself. Another little known trance signal that is difficult to spot is the pace of your subjects pulse. The only reason you would have trouble monitoring this signal would be if you can not see your subject’s eyes or they have closed them. dangerous. for instance sunny days and darker rooms will cause the pupils to change their dilation. The best places to see this is at the side of the neck and across the ankle bone. If you are using a relaxing set of suggestions the person’s heart rate will usually slow down. If . “How can I tell the heart rate of my subject without touching them to feel it?” This is the reason that this trance signal is harder to spot than some others. This signal is easy to spot once you know it exists. The heart rate of the person you are trying to put into trance will usually slow down as they are entering the altered state of mind. There are specific areas on the body where the blood vessels are close to the surface under the skin. Both of these areas generally have a visible heart rate. When a subject’s pupils are reacting to hypnosis or an altered state of mind they will usually become larger. The question in your mind now is going to be. or suspenseful story the heart rate of the subject may increase due to the feelings you are producing with in them. However this may also depend on the story you are telling or the mental pictures you are creating. If you watch these areas closely you can usually see the heart beat of your subject. If you are using an exciting. if it is changing you can begin to believe you have successfully helped your client into the beginnings of hypnosis. Changes in a person’s pupils can also result from changes in light. You typically don’t want to touch a person when they are totally relaxed and trusting you to guide them with conversation alone. Another reason this is a more difficult signal to detect is the amount of observation it requires to see a change in something so small. The only way to monitor their heart rate without physically touching them is to know where to look. some people close their eyes when they are relaxed and others may be avoiding eye contact as they are feeling that they are in a vulnerable state.The first being that the subject’s eyes may not be in your view. This is an unavoidable interference as it is just the nature of the way the eyes react to the lighting around them. The reason it is considered less obvious is simply because many people do not know about it. Trance signal number three in the list of least obvious signs is to see a change in the blink reflex of your subject.

Another aspect of the voice that can change when in trance is the tonality of voice. As many people start to relax the blood vessels in their bodies change as well. Either effect is completely normal and is the result of a physiological change that is also very natural. This allows the blood within to flow more freely through the body and causes slight changes in skin color and tone. Some are harder to see and some are just lesser known than the others. can see your subject’s eyes. In this signal you are again looking for a slowing of the swallowing. Similar to the blink reflex you will also want to watch for a change in the swallowing reflex of your subject. you just need to listen for a difference from normal tones. again look for signals that are different from the normal state of the subject. especially if that person is speaking to them. this is due to the eyelids becoming cataleptic. Some people get darker and some people will grow paler. this simply depends on the person. If there is a change here you can count it as a trance signal that the person is experiencing an altered state of mind. Here you are looking for a rate of faster or slower blinking of the eyes. These signals are less obvious than other signals and signs of trance that we have talked about previously. The eyelids simply become frozen for extended periods of time. Some people who have entered trance will just stop talking altogether. The swallowing reflex is again is easy to recognize once you are aware that it signifies the beginnings of a trance. Often your subject will grow sleepy as they enter trance but many people will not close their eyes as they find it embarrassing to feel as though they have fallen asleep in front of another person. Little known trance signal number five is a change in the skin color or tone of your subject. At any rate they are good identifiers that you have succeeded in altering the state of mind of the people or person you are with. Some subject’s even stop swallowing altogether. This signal can be hard to detect if your subject is not speaking. There is not set standard of whether this goes up or down. Finally the last little known trance signal number six it the change in voice. . you will be able to monitor how their blink reflex has changed from the way they normally blink. you simply watch their throat to see signs of swallowing. In this trance signal you may also notice that the eyelids grow heavy or the eyes close completely. Many people will have slower speech or a slower rate of talking when they are in an altered state of mind. Some people stop blinking altogether.

Now as we continue through this article you will learn how you do this. When you can accurately get and maintain the focus of a person they will often enter a trance for you. It is very important to understand how vital it is for you to master the language and use it as a power foundation with your subjects. It is your responsibility as the hypnotist to lead them on an unforgettable journey into and through their trance. This is one of the first concepts that early hypnotists discovered was responsible for causing trances. Keep your . Remember that the sooner you can conclude that your subject is in trance the sooner you can move on to the next steps in your hypnosis. it should be practiced. The arrival there will fulfill their purpose in changing behaviors to match their goals in life. How to Create a Powerful Foundation of Hypnotic Language to Master Your Hypnosis Training A key tool as hypnotists is the language you will use. In this definition the meaning is that whatever a person is focusing on exclusively becomes real to them.Watch for them closely and keep your sense tuned for these minute changes in your subjects. comfortable. The main objective in hypnosis is to have the ability to help people change their lives and this is accomplished through influence and persuasion to do certain things. In order to use this information in your language arsenal it is important to make direct contact with the imagination and lay your suggestions there. Language and how you use it will create a solid base for putting people into an altered state of mind. You will be influencing them to focus their attention on thoughts and ideas that will help them to arrive at their desired outcome. Altered state of mind is defined as a special state of awareness in which the subject focuses on certain ideas and excludes other ideas from that focus. Using language to zero in on the outcome you are striving for requires you to get people into a good ‘focus of attention’. Without the right language and skill you will struggle with accomplishing these goals. enjoyable. How do you create that powerful foundation of hypnotic language? The first stage in this is to create an unbroken flow of ideas. The words you speak should be fluid. This flow of ideas should run smoothly. This responsibility is all on you as the hypnotist. The ability to use language to create an altered state of mind is key. It is important to remember that within each human the will and imagination are always conflicting. After this has been accomplished you will be the tour guide of their trance. It is equally important to remember that the imagination will always win this battle. and pleasant.

In order to do this the listener must be able to in some way agree with what you are saying. anything that is a verifiable fact. . it is easier to come to agreement if things do not have to be thought out or deciphered.listener wanting to hear more. Make statements that your subject must agree with simply because they are truth. The first principal you must apply is to create verbal agreement with your subject. The deeper in trance the person is the less plausible your statements can be. piggy back suggestions. In the ‘patterns and plausibility’ principal you will start with agreement. it should be an easy experience of transition through new ideas. you can start to work on the third principal. In order to know the amount of work you need to do here it is important to remember the signs of trance. Part of this agreement is in you and your speaking. there needs to be no breaks in the conversation so there is no time to recognize the un-connectedness of the statements. subjects color of hair. After the first two principals have been successful. If you exercise these 4 principals you will begin to master the key tool in conversational hypnosis. After the person in trance has heard several true statements you will want to add a statement that may or may not be true. This again requires smoothness to your language. Once you are past those filters the statement will then start to become true for them. In this way the habit of agreeing to the true statements will sneak past the conscious filters that say it may not be true. They do not have to literally say yes to everything you say but something inside of them has to recognize at some level your statements are true for them. When you accomplish this you are much easier for your listener to follow. Your thoughts must flow easily without hesitation or disagreement. The idea behind piggy backing suggestions is that you can adequately relate ideas or statements that may not necessarily be connected. There are ways to accomplish what I have just explained. The second principal to apply in your hypnotic language is ‘patterns and plausibility’. Once you have determined how deep in trance your subject is you will know how plausible or implausible your statements can be. You can use the weather outside. Another advantage that piggy backing suggestions give is the ability to make comfortable transitions between thoughts and ideas. If you apply this principal correctly there will be no work involved for your listener. This new statement only has to be plausible enough that they will follow along with it because it is easier to agree than to argue the possible disagreements. There should be no words or ideas that cause your listener to want to stop your flow of language. the time of day.

When you use linguistic bridges well the thoughts and ideas you are connecting will run through the listener smoothly. They will make many statements seem more plausible and will add a new rhythm to your speaking. Hypnosis is a performance art so learning the performance part of hypnosis is a given. With the use of the 4 words of power and these other linguistic bridges you will experience a wide range of fluid expression. And. Linguistic bridges are simply conjunctions that permanently connect two sets of information together. There are lists of the linguistic bridges available and it would be an excellent idea to memorize these powerful words to use as tools in your language. which is a deck of illustrated cards containing words on each card. Mastering the 4 words of power will give you the ability to create an endless variety of content and new hypnotic inductions. This is a great way to carry the linguistic bridges you will be using so often with you. One way to do this is to use the 4 Words of Power. Because. These 4 words will give you the ability to piggy back a vast variety of statements and thoughts. Part of performance in learning hypnosis is to understand the elements of hypnotic . The 4 words of power are easy to use as you practice them you will see you can fit them easily between themes and connect statements that may otherwise seem un-conncetable. Which means. There are a variety of other linguistic bridges that work much like the 4 words of power and as you learn them you will see your full capabilities in this area of conversational hypnosis. You can also purchase a Street Hypnosis Deck. The 4 words of power are four conjunctions that act like linguistic bridges. These are key in tying together hypnotic themes and help in cementing those ideas together in a nice package. When you are working in the area of hypnosis it is not only important to know what you are doing but perfecting the ways or the HOW you do it is vital. The way that these words work is to create a smooth way of communicating all the suggestions you want in a way that your subject will respond to hypnotically.And finally the fourth principal of linguistic bridges is applied. So what are those 4 words of Power? As. Improve Your Tonality to Improve Your Performance in Hypnosis Improving in the art of hypnosis is always going to be a great idea. Know how and what to do will create an unbreakable base for you as a hypnotist. The lists available for the linguistic bridges are great for learning to incorporate them into your speaking when you have the list with you.

This study tells us that if you focus only on the choice of words you use you will more than likely be a poor hypnotist. In order to study the performance area of hypnotism you must first understand that hypnosis is something you do with a person. your nonverbal communications. Play with it say ‘no’ in ways that would imply yes or maybe. The conclusion of the study was surprising for many. Take the word ‘no’ for instance. Tonality is the key to unlocking a great deal of information in hypnosis. The use of differing tonality in the language you use as a hypnotist will change the meanings of the statements you are saying to your subjects. However if you focus on the words and the performance of those words you will capture more of the elements to becoming a great hypnotist. There is technically only one meaning for the word itself. The study showed that choice of words is very important but the words themselves really only accounted for 7% of the meaning in the word. One of those elements is tonality. however you can change that meaning if you change your tone as you say the word. situation or come to agree with the story you will be telling. There is a way to say ‘no’ that is stern and serious and a way to say it playfully and so on and so forth. you will not be convincing. It is important to play with the different ways you can say words as the meanings will change as your delivery of the word changes. You must learn how to convey the presentation of your statements and this is where we start. This is the best and most simple way to deliver your statements and words accurately and with fine precision. In ‘going first’ you will immerse yourself in the emotion. was responsible for 38% of the words meaning. Birdwhistell is the study of how the actual meanings of words were broken down between words. meaning one of agreement with your statements. If you are not in the correct state of mind. And astonishing 55% of the meaning derived from statements and words comes from the body language you use. this will help your story in delivering it in a believable way. A helpful study by Mr. ‘Going first’ is a good place to start because it is important to really feel what you are going to say in order to make it true for your subject. or the tonality you use. The first principal of performance is to ‘go first’. tonality and body language. However the way you say the word.language. Now that we know the importance behind the way we say different things we can go over the principals of performance. It is vital that you spend time learning what words to say but equally important to know how to say those words in order to get your point across. Every thought you have will always affect you .

every time your thoughts change it will show the new thought through your movements. BMIR is a shorter way of saying Behavioral Manifestation of an Internal Representation. use the same tone of voice you would if you were actually going through the motions of that particular situation. Rhythm in what you are saying is also accomplished here with very little effort. When you do this the delivery will be accurate representation of the feelings. Imagine yourself in the situation. to review ‘going first’ you must first take the hypnotic theme you are working with and put it into motion within your mind. As we look at tonality you should always remember that only 7% of the meaning derived from your words actually comes from the word itself. The language you use will begin to be filled with the actual meaning and feelings that come from your choice of words and the way you say them. body language. What this means is when you think of something. you don’t scream relax at them while jumping up and down you would draw the word out using a mellow and calming tone of voice. squeeze all of the meaning out of key words you use in your language. ideas and thoughts you are pursuing.emotionally and behaviorally. So this was a vast amount of information for a simple task. In order to accomplish this you will want to match the tone and feel of your voice with the feelings or ideas you are attempting to convey. it just happens naturally as you say the words with the meanings they posses A Special Look at Little Known Tonality Secrets That Will Help You Learn Hypnosis Hypnosis is a great and valuable performance art. In doing this you are letting the tone of your voice do the hard work and you convey a state of mind or feeling. Use your imagination to put yourself into situations where what you want to convey is true. This is where BMIR’s come into play. The second performance principal we are going to cover here is the principal of squeezing the meaning. For instance if you want your subject to relax. breathing and tonality. For instance if you are trying to imply that there is danger in a situation and you are conveying a feeling of carefree happiness your point will be lost to the true emotion you are feeling. Because of this reaction to thought the best way to perform anything is to enter that particular state of mind. This will help you to accurately deliver the thoughts and ideas you want to. . When you learn how to accurately do this and practice it into perfection you will be able to bring your words to life for your listener. In this factor of performance you are going to do just as it sounds. It is important to not only know what you are doing but how to do it.

It is also important to remember as we move on with this subject that you must always begin with the first two principals of performance being ‘go first’ and squeezing the meanings from your words. if I said “Did you drive the car to the store today? The meaning of the entire statement goes from a simple question to an inquiry about who drove the car to the store. Let’s look at one more example of the same statement to really drive the point home here. and vast majority. A good example here is the difference between two different statements whose meanings are generally the same when we look at the words alone. For example. You make that word stand out in your statement. This use of emphasis will show the listener that there is a great deal of importance behind whatever it is you are saying. come from the tonality you use and the body language that accompanies your speaking. “Did you drive the car to the store today?” here the meaning becomes more of a question or surprise that the car was driven to the store today. When you are performing the art of hypnosis you can use emphasis to drive the meaning of each word you use into your listener.The other meanings. This means simply that you can be saying one thing on one level and have a completely different meaning on another level. Here I have written it with a very even tone. Emphasis is when you lean on a word with your voice. While the emphasis you put on words often happens naturally it is also important to do this purposefully. The third performance principal that you will need to know how to perform is the emphasis you put on different words and how that emphasis affects your language. If you took each word of the same statement and put emphasis on them one at a time while reading it you will see that the meaning of the statement will change consistently to some degree. take the simple statement “Did you drive the car to the store today?”. In this we learn that your emphasis and how you say things to others will automatically show them what you find to be important information in the sentence. However. This can be done in writing by underlining or italicizing words. there appears to be no emphasis made on any particular word. . When you emphasize words you begin to open the process called ‘multiple levels of information’. This is something that naturally happens when you speak and change your tonality. Both of these principals when paired with the next two principals of emphasis and rhythm and tone will be monumental in perfecting your performance as a hypnotist. But when we look at the way the words are said the statement becomes much more important. When you do it with your speaking though it has a much more dramatic effect.

Trance rhythm has the same effect as when you listen to music. This principal is using tonality and rhythm together to create smoothness to your language. You can play with rhythms and tones that signify all sorts of feelings. Speaking in rhythm is much like emphasis as it changes the way you are perceived by those around you. When you are putting someone into trance it helps to have a rhythm to your speaking. . Remember that your body must be in tune to the rhythms you are using. A very good example of how rhythm can unconsciously pull you in is in the film. however the rhythm of the couplets draws your ear to hear the elegance behind the language. The fourth performance principal is about rhythm and tone. The different performance principals of hypnosis you should be practicing to sharpen your skills. You will also likely notice an effect it has on yourself as well. it creates an altered state of consciousness where the rhythm of the language pulls you into it. As you practice this principal you will begin to notice the effect it has on others depending on how you lean on the words. In this film the manner of speech was written on poetic couplets. it is important so you don’t get hurt. both as you say things and as others make statements to you. Play with the language you use and building different rhythms into your speech. The ways in which you change the rhythms of your speech will let your subjects know when they should and should not be in trance. quiet.“If you don’t listen to me you could get hurt. excitement. fast. When your body and mind have the rhythm your language will be expressed with much more ease and clarity. It is important to improve your performance as a hypnotist by practicing rhythm and tone. also called a ‘trance rhythm’.” If you say both these statements you will hear the differences in the messages. Develop a Trance Voice: A Unique Look at How Your Tonality Will Help You Learn Hypnosis The performance art of hypnosis is a constant skill you must practice to perfect.” Or “I need you to listen to what I am saying. rhythms as we have learned help to take us away. It is not so much poetry that you would hear it and notice rhyming and beat. relax us and let our minds drift. There are many examples of this in poetry and music. sorrow. It is very subtle yet very powerful. Cyrano de Bergerac. The skills of what to do and how to do it will need to be perfected if you are to become a great hypnotist.

You will be learning to develop different types of trance voices that will signal to your subjects when they should or should not be in trance. And finally. Now that you are acquainted with the four principals of performance you will need to learn how to use tonality to enhance your hypnosis abilities even further. You should never use this voice if you are speaking with . Your hypnotic voice or trance voice should be of a tone that people will enjoy listening to. meaning you first immerse your self into the idea that you wish your subject to become a part of through your language. the principal of rhythm and tone. Squeezing the meaning from your words. These are all ways to enhance your performance as a hypnotist so you are a part of what you are doing with a subject. Emphasis. It is also important to remember to only use your trance voice when you want people to go into trance. When you hear certain songs or types of music it brings in a flood of memories. By becoming the authority figure you will be able to control your subjects trance and produce the outcome that is favorable for you and the subject. which is learning when and what words to lean on in order to accentuate your point. One of the tonality concepts that will help here is to develop a trance voice. thoughts and ideas.The first four performance principals we have talked about are worth perfecting. in which you make the words you use sound and feel like the true nature of their meanings. As your subjects work with you they will begin to unconsciously recognize your trance voice and eventually learn to enter an altered state of mind on its cue. Principals of going first. This dropping into trance when they hear a certain tonality in your voice will happen because their unconscious mind will suggest that it is time to come in to play. These principals not only help lead your subject through a trance they will help you become the authority figure within their trance. Developing a trance voice is not a tool that will immediately switch your subject’s brain off and put them under a sort of instant spell. in which you add a unique style to your conversation that will help your listener to get lost in your voice and language. Music is a prime example of this. This happens because the music has set off a certain trigger in the head that recalls related experiences. What it will do is help you to develop a tonality to your voice that will educate the unconscious mind as to when to go into trance. It should be easy to portray your words smoothly and elegantly when you use this voice.

If you make a statement or question and add raised eyebrows to your facial features you are nonverbally asking for them to add new information to what they have just said. You can also create doubt by repeating the statements of the people around you and adding emphasis to different areas of the repeated statement. or nod in agreement. Using a straight and level tone will make a simple statement. ideas or thoughts. Another way to use the questioning tonality is to use it as a tool to ‘Create Doubt’ in your subjects mind.someone who needs to be concentrating on a specific task such as driving or operating heavy equipment. Implication is always more pointed than actually saying what you would imply. usually at the end of a sentence. The yes set will more likely than not force you’re subject to keep up with you as you speak. you words will take on that of a command. straight and level and downward intonation. And if you incorporate downward intonation. just repeating what they have said . When you repeat with emphasis what someone has just said to you. you are accessing a powerful way in which you can cast doubt or suspicion without actually having to say that is what you are doing. The yes set is a great way to check in on your subject to make sure they are following along with you. The questioning tonality will help you in developing what we call a nonverbal ‘Yes Set’. The hypnotic principal of ‘Imply Don’t Assert’ is another way to use the questioning tonality. When you are using any one of these three different types of tone your meanings will change and your message will change. upward inflection. ‘Keep Em Talking’ is a questioning tonality that uses nonverbal communication along with a question or statement to extract more information from a person. Tonality is a large part of trance voice. You can cast a shadow of doubt on many things and ideas simply by breaking one simple question down into several well emphasized questions. If you are using upward inflection your statements will take on the sound of a question. you are using tonality to ask a question that the person will inherently answer yes to. Because you are adding no new information in this. This is pretty straight forward. Your tone of voice can range between three types. You can also use it to list a series of items. This is a powerful way of getting your point across again without actually having to state the exact words. As you develop your trance voice you will notice that emotional triggers will assist you in setting the stage for your hypnotic voice to the full extent.

any question. Keep these in the back of your mind because as you learn power tactics you will want to start to combine them all to create a powerful way of being a hypnotist. as well as your own. which is our first tactic. You will see that ‘command tone down’ has a powerful implication where action is being asserted. In command tonality you will be most successful if you use downward intonation and use them with a question. It activates the side of the brain that wants to respond to you by fulfilling a request. many years. These tactics will help you to change the lives of those around you for the better. This will get the most bang for your buck. in hypnosis are the strategies that allow you to become the authority in a person’s trance. The next type of tonality that is useful is the command tonality. Questioning and command inflections will greatly improve the level of response you get from people. they are strategies that are key in the influence and persuasion of those around you. They will tend to respond more powerfully to what you are asking if you learn how to use tonality and inflection to phrase your statements. As you learn how to use power tactics you will want to keep in mind the different concepts of hypnotic language foundations. which are very old and very useful. The command tonality is used to cement everything into place. they will automatically be inclined to add more information for you. Power Tactics in Hypnosis: How to Use Status to Influence the Hypnotic Subject Power tactics that are used in hypnosis have been used for many. They enable you to take on the role of high status. This tonality will not make everyone you command do everything you command them to. It will however entice people to do things when you do the right steps. as you do so change the upward and downward intonations in your voice as you state the command. . it gives you an instruction to make the thought or idea a permanent one. When you start to master how to ‘command tone down’ you will see a reaction in people that many want to do what you are telling them to. Experiment with a question. Power tactics. rapport skills and signal recognition skills.along with a nonverbal cue. This is a great tool for conversational hypnosis and one you should practice. It is important to realize that at some point you will want to converge all the information you are learning in to smooth flowing patterns that will enhance your overall ability to be a great hypnotist.

These are the two things that will signal others as to what status you are in. However there will be time you need to start as a low status person. Now of course as a hypnotist you will want to be in a role of high status. this will make you the authority figure. Some people are natural high status people. Others are low status people and are more of a passenger in conversations. They need to feel comfortable with you. The different roles we choose varies depending on the people we are with and the situations we are in. It is important for you as a hypnotist to understand these roles and know when you need to play that of high or low status. equal status and low status are all different roles we play within the relationships we have. The best part of choosing a role to play after you understand them is that it gives you the most flexibility in conversations you have and the people you are working with.The power tactic of ‘High Status’ is a role you will take on with your subject in order to get them to follow your suggestions. It is important to note here that high status has nothing to do with your person. which include your tonality. If you are dealing with a person who distrusts or dislikes those of high status you will take on a low status role until the person trusts and likes you. This is a good sign but it is also important to remember the situations where you need to play low status and change your signals to accommodate that need. High status. There are people who are comfortable being low status and others who are only comfortable in high status. they chime in when necessary but other than that mostly agree with what is being said by others. You will need to determine what type of person you are dealing with to determine which role you will need to initially take on. When you take on the role of low status you will be less assertive. feed them information subconsciously and set up the correct frames to gain their trust. I say initially because you will want to eventually be of high status in your hypnotic relationships. The problem with this is that some people are not flexible in the types of people they feel comfortable dealing with. it is not about wealth or moral judgment. It is simply a place in the set of roles you take on in society everyday. These are your body language and behavior. When you give off signals of a high status people will respond to you more powerfully. This is something . As the authority figure people will want to do what you suggest and follow your advice. they will cause a difference in how you are perceived by the other people around you. When you take on the role of a high status you will need to include two distinct concepts in your authority role. they are comfortable and are good at taking control of the conversation.

As humans we have vulnerable part we are constantly subconsciously aware of. and more than likely interact with high status people all the time. Often they are so comfortable in their environments that they simply feel no danger of an attack. High status people use their space widely. If you goal is to be a high status role in your hypnotic relationships then you need to take on these behaviors. High status individuals exhibit Calm Movements. . Those in high status will leave these areas of the body open or exposed. The fourth and final signal of a high status person is steady eye contact. they simply feel comfortable naturally. words or thoughts. High status people are also not intimidated by occasionally invading others private space. they do not rush through their actions. and even lean back in chairs. One of the most interesting things about human beings is that you can often tell exactly what emotion they are having by looking at their eyes. These people are calm and unhurried. these being the throat. They feel confident enough in their defenses to not be worried. and these are behaviors to avoid. Many low status people will have repetitive movements or ticks. High status people will use large motions. They will give you a pat on the back or unsuspected hug. This is a powerful tactic in order to break down resistance. They are very comfortable with themselves and are confident in the things they do and say. even if the attack is only a verbal one we will attempt to protect ourselves. Another high status signal is the way you use the space around will have to do for as long as it takes until those around you are comfortable dealing with a high status person. People who are in high status role are those who send out signals of relaxed manner. sit in a room. jerky or nervous. The eyes are directly connected to the brain and therefore give away many clues to your thinking. When we feel threatened we will unknowingly protect these areas. Low status individuals take up as little space as possible by crossing their arms and legs and often sitting in corners. abdomen and groin. We may cross our arms or legs. stand in a room. The third signal of a high status person is that they will expose the vulnerable parts of their body. And those around them respond to these people as if they are in control of the situations they are in. Now how do you become a high status person? What mannerisms does a high status person give off? You have encountered them countless times. they will wring their hands or bounce a leg constantly. It is important to avoid being jumpy. Some distinguishing characteristics of high status people are easy to spot. It is also possible to need to change status when dealing with the same person depending on the situation you are in.

You will find they are even more willing to open themselves up to you in many different situations. High status people will be able to fix their eyes on something. This is important for hypnotists as the more authority you have the harder they will work to attain the goals they have set in front of you. These signals include calm movements. Another part of this is to add that the more authority or higher status you are the more pressure the subject feels to live up to the standard they have set in front of you. use of space. Power Tactics in Hypnosis: How to Use Consistency to Boost Your Authority In Conversational Hypnosis it is important to choose the correct status role depending on the people you are dealing with. The easy way to say this is that once someone has stated something publicly to someone in high status they will feel that they need to fulfill that statement by acting according to it. . thing or point in space without a problem. Now that you know how to behave in a way that people will perceive you as high status. place. but it is also important to know when to play a low status role too. you will want to learn how to activate this instantly. After you have attained the trust of your subjects and can attain the role of high status in each relationship you will want to maintain it. This is where the Consistency Principal is put into action. unable to focus on one thing for too long. The idea is to gain complete comfort from your subjects in a low status role before attempting to move into a high status role. This is done by sending out the signals that are subconsciously associated with a high status person. then it is certain that they will have to act in a way to remain consistent with what they have said. darting around. These principals will be the background for the next step to learn which is to use them consistently in order to boost your authority. In order to take on a high status role you must study and embody these traits. exposing the vulnerable parts and steady eye contact. In doing this people who are not intimidated by others of high status will feel more comfortable around you. This also means that once they have made a change they wanted in their life they will work harder to maintain it.Low status individuals will have nervous eyes. The principal of consistency is defined as this: when a person makes a declaration in public of a thing. a person. They will have an unwavering steady gaze that is the signature of their calm state of mind. High status is the role that you will strive for in your hypnotic relationships.

so as not to appear uneducated on the topic. Once you do this successfully to one person in a room full of people they will usually no longer question your knowledge on the subject and trust that you are an expert in the area. Another way that this skill is useful is that when you open yourself to show something to a crowd of people you automatically take on the role of a leader. In this manner they can be used almost anywhere to demonstrate your knowledge on the subject of hypnosis. Make sure you are performing something you can accomplish. the first of which is to Demonstrate Authority. Not only are they a way for you to keep the conversation going they get your subject into the habit of agreeing with what you are saying. The simple need to posses a strong authority over people in conversational hypnosis is a strong one that will ease the time and effort put into hypnosis. These tactics are also used on other people to see the amount of resistance they have to going into an altered state of mind. to go into trances. In fact we are so trusting of this that once a person proves they are an expert in one field we generally will think they know a vast amount of knowledge in many different areas of life. When you are successful in your ability to perform for strangers with social pressure and you can accomplish your objectives people will start to respond to you as an authority figure. and anyone really. The consistency tactic of demonstrating authority will help in the manner that it is a quick and easy way to test suggestibility. When consistency tactic of demonstrating authority is used correctly it will give the hypnotist a great range of authority from the participant. How to Use Agreement Tactics in Hypnosis Agreement tactics are a great tool in conversational hypnosis. As humans it is our nature to trust those who prove they are educated in a field. By creating ways to add impact to your authority you will be able to win people over more quickly and reach the goal of offering your suggestion. These are also widely known as suggestibility tests. . The concepts we have just gone over are very important in conversational hypnosis and are key in the elevation of your authority even in outside environments such as social gatherings. Once you accomplish that and you have the authority the suggestions you implant will be more powerful for your subjects and the people around you. In using this tactic you will be able to test the willingness of your subjects. This will add social pressure on you to perform but it will elevate your status in the room to one of high status very quickly.This brings us the idea of Consistency Tactics. It is important in this skill to find what works for you.

The first agreement tactic we will discuss is Plausibility. Not only does the critical factor turn on the analysis of ideas it also starts to conform them to the ways in which that person views the world. If you were not this segment will help you with that ability. They will see your suggestions only as they feel the world should work and not for the simplicity they need to make changes. these will be discussed more in depth in another article. There are four agreement tactics that will help you to lull the critical factor to sleep and we will do a short introduction of them here. and then you would slowly work into the parts that they may or may not agree with and finally hit them with the big point that you are debating. Take a moment to remember conversations you have had in the past. This will make it easier to bring in new ideas and create new realities where change can occur. Agreement tactics will help you to really get into your subjects head. If they are doing this it may be difficult for them to find agreement in your suggestions and there fore they will not take. If the critical factor is in full swing they will still be able to criticize and analyze the information you are giving to them. . Everything needs to be taken in as plausible and possible so your suggestions will stick. The bottom line on critical factor is that if it is awake and functioning it will prevent change in your subject. Once you have accomplished this you will be able to present information to the person and make everything seem acceptable on the basis of it can be. When you do this you would first lay out the ideas of the topic that you know they agree with. This has happened to most people when trying to convince someone to see something our way. put that part of the mind to sleep. maybe you were in deep conversation with a friend on a point you view differently or debating a topic with a work colleague. There must be something in the words you suggest that they find agreement with on some level in order to put them into action. Agreement is the art of putting the critical factor to sleep. Once people are in the habit of agreeing with you it is much easier to get them to agree to ideas that they may not have completely agreed with if you were to just start with and state that idea. The answer to this is to have the ability to bypass the critical factor with your words.Without agreement the person you are making suggestions to will not bring them in as true ideas that they can use to change their lives. One of the first things an agreement tactic will assist you with is to distinguish the alertness of a person’s critical factor. Now you may or may not have been successful in getting the agreement from them. which is the opposite of your goals as a hypnotist.

In this you need to take the lead and believe your thoughts and ideas first so as to pave the way for the people you are lending the suggestions and ideas to. the more of an altered state of mind the person is in the less plausible your statements must be. This is important. The third agreement tactic is the ‘Yes Set’. Once you are in agreement with the suggestions or stories then your external behaviors will show this agreement. Piggy backing is simply attaching a statement to an idea that is already going on or in. This is vital as it is hard to get a person to believe a set of circumstances if you yourself do not believe them. The second agreement tactic is the Agreement Habit. Once you have made several statements they can agree with your next statement can be one that they would find as true as your first statements. The less entranced they are the more plausible your statements must be.In plausibility the easiest way to get a person to agree with you is if they are already in the flow of agreeing with the things you are saying. In going first you will start to create realities for your subjects to enter into and share with you. If it is a plausible idea they will tend to agree or just go along with it because you have turned off a part of their critical factor. It is important to know that plausibility is based on a sliding scale. If your subject accepts an entire statement because the first part is true then they will on some level accept the rest of the statement that has made it in. yet fit into the frame work of your conversation. This tactic is largely based on the ‘go first’ concept. These ‘yes sets’ are created by stating the obvious. The trick in this tactic is to create contexts that your subject will want to accept. after all you are using conversational hypnosis. If your subject is in a full state of trance then the plausibility of your statements can be zero and they will still be in a full state of agreement with your suggestions. Start with true simple statements that are verifiable facts. You can create acceptable . The fourth and final agreement tactic is the ‘Piggy Back Principal’. It works to your advantage if you can get and hold a good altered state of mind. repeating what they have said and stating truisms. Truisms are ideas that are generally found true and created by the culture you live in. or those you are trying to convey. You can act as if you believe them however your subcommunications will show people that you are not truly in agreement with your own ideas. This is a technique that is used simply to get your subjects in the habit of saying yes. This is done by practicing the concepts we have been reviewing.

The critical factor which tells people whether or not something is believable needs to be turned off in order to induce a good trance and to make suggestions that will hold true when the person is not under hypnosis. This is the second reason you will use agreement tactics. As long as it is a plausible statement they will agree with it because they are already in the habit of agreeing with you. agreement tactics do just that. . The first reason to use agreement tactics is to put the critical factor in your subjects mind to sleep. They get the listener in the habit of agreeing with you and lend you the authority in their altered state of mind. This in turn allows the listener to keep with the general flow of the conversation without interrupting it to disagree. In this article we will look at the plausibility tactic and the agreement habit tactic. “The sun is out today and it will be a great day to start your diet. The agreement tactics. Agreement at this point is easier because you have put critical factor to sleep and there is no analysis of the idea you are presenting. Agreement Tactics in Hypnosis: How to Use Plausibility & the Agreement Habit to Boost the Impact of You Hypnotic Suggestions Agreement tactics in conversational hypnosis are very functional. and there are four of them. We will begin to explore how and why these will add impact to your suggestions when a person is under hypnosis. The four agreement tactics include plausibility. agreement habits and following the subject’s line of thinking. They will help you to open up the side of the mind that likes to agree and make them want to agree with what you are saying.contexts by using compliments. The first agreement tactic of Plausibility is the idea of getting a person to agree with what you are saying repeatedly so eventually you can introduce an idea that may not be considered a truth. At the end of each of these simply attach a suggestion. build an agreement factor in the listener’s mind. You are attaching a suggestion to something that is going to take place regardless. Once the critical factor is turned off you will want your suggestions to seem realistic. ‘yes sets’ and piggy backing suggestions. You will learn to use these for two different reasons. the agreement habit. yes sets.” The first part of the statement is a verifiable fact and the second part is going in simply because the first is true and correct.

The more the critical factor is on the more plausible your statements must be. Part of the Agreement Habit is the Agreement Habit Principal which has everything to do with positive reinforcement. The more it is off the more implausible your statements can be. People like to get responses. When you agree with ideas or statements respond with a verbal ‘yes’. This sets a pattern inside the head to agree. Agreement habit is essentially based on the concept of ‘going first’. . Another reason to respond to positive aspects of thoughts and ideas is the Access State Principal. When you reinforce a positive behavior or thought it will grow just as much as if you give attention to a negative behavior or thought which can be counterproductive for your purposes as a hypnotist. so by only reacting to the positive thoughts you are greatly improving your agreement with the other person. give it no response at all. In the agreement habit you will want to provide a response to the positive things and avoid responding to the negative. Again everyone craves reactions and by altering you mood to receive the reaction that is favorable you will be advancing in the art of hypnosis. In the Agreement Habit tactic you want to be able to set up a pace and have your listener follow along. plausibility can be nonexistent and the subject will still take your statement for truth. When you change your mood to a positive mood you will access more positive thoughts and behaviors. In this principal the idea is that changing moods changes what information within the mind you have access to. whether they are positive or negative. You can utilize your signal recognition skills here to see how much of your listeners critical factor is in place. The act of response to the positive things will foster positive reinforcement and cause your subject to make more positive statements than negative ones. as well as influencing the behaviors you exhibit. causing your listener to agree even when they may not agree with the entire statement. nodding your head or even a smile. Always keep in mind that your listener may seem to be totally awake. If you remember ‘going first’ is when you create a reality that you immerse yourself in first and then lead your listener through it. What you put into something will help it to flourish and grow. agreeing all the way. but this does not mean their critical factor is awake. When a person is in a full state of trance the plausibility of a statement is no longer required. Now this works the same for both positive effects and negative effects.The goal here is to have the critical factor turned off as much as possible. The second agreement tactic that we will be looking at is the Agreement Habit. When you disagree with an idea or statement do absolutely nothing.

which is stated as when a person is in the habit of agreeing with you then the next statement doesn’t have to be one they would find as true as your last statements. You should examine how. You cannot do this fully if they do not believe you agree with the thoughts you are presenting to them yourself. The Secret of Master Hypnotists Revealed: The Yes Set & Piggy Back Principal It is important to realize that agreement tactics are very useful in conversational hypnosis. when and know why to use them. This is important for the Agreement Habit as it is to get someone in the habit of agreeing with you. This is to immerse yourself in an idea before you invite your subject in so the experience is real for them. The Agreement Habit is based on ‘going first’. There is so much that the agreement habit can do that it is hard to keep it all in your head as you read this. ideas. The second Agreement Tactic is the Agreement Habit. The first of the 4 Agreement Tactics is Plausibility. Once you use the agreement tactics to get past the critical factor it will open the doors of suggestion. If the critical factor is not bypassed or put to sleep then the resistance of your subject will be in place and your suggestions will not make it through. Plausibility works on a sliding scale depending on the depth of trance a person is experiencing. and sets a pattern of agreement that your listener can easily follow. In this they are consciously registering the agreement and not the disagreement. Plausibility and agreement habit are powerful tactics that you should perfect in order to become a great hypnotist. The third and fourth Agreement Tactics are brought to us by a master hypnotist Milton Erickson as he used these often in his hypnosis. So to review agreement habit unconsciously presents the information you agree with. this is mainly because they bypass the critical factor and get the person to start to see things your way. These are all extremely powerful ways to induce agreement and keep it going. The ‘Yes Set’ and Piggy Backing of Suggestion were among Erickson’s favored techniques. They assist in the beginnings of bringing out the objectives you have as a hypnotist. You will be able to present information. puts the critical factor out of commission.Agreement habit and positive reinforcement when used correctly will casually leave behind the negative behaviors or things you do not respond to. . thoughts and suggestions to your subject that will seem completely plausible to them in their altered state of mind.

This works because as humans we are always willing to accept praise and agreement. . In a ‘Yes Set’ you will begin with statements that are true so you are activating the part of the brain that enjoys agreeing. Use in your conversation statements that are verifiable facts. This is accomplishing the goal of the ‘yes set’ by activating the agreement part of the brain. The ‘Yes Set’ can be demonstrated in three different ways. This is the idea of attaching suggestions to other statements or ideas that are already going out to your listener. This is exactly as it sounds. The first way to use a ‘yes set’ is to repeat what the person is saying to you. which is the ‘Yes Set’. Truisms are sayings that a culture has conditioned its inhabitants to believe as unmistakably true. If there is no question that what you are saying is a fact then you will again activate the yes neurology in the subject’s brain causing agreement. is very useful in getting agreement from your subject’s. This is done by first getting your listener into agreement with you. And the fact is if you are accepting one part of the statement you must be accepting the whole statement on some unconscious level. and then you add a suggestion to it. Compliment them on the great job they have been doing and then add how they can improve on it. The three different types of ‘Yes Sets’ are used very often in conversational hypnosis. Now that they have unknowingly accepted your suggestion they will at some point bring it into their behaviors. thoughts or actions. following along with their thoughts and repeating back.The third of the Agreement Tactics. The statements are a way that people view the world or a part of the world. These statements will largely be found true by almost all people you speak to. yes sets. The best part about this agreement tactic is the more you do it the stronger and more powerful your suggestion becomes. You can piggy back as many facts and suggestions as you want as long as you keep the meanings clear so as not to confuse your subject. You goal here is to create an environment they are willing to accept. The fourth Agreement Tactic is the Piggy Back Principal. This is partly because they are ideas that you can work into a conversation. they cause agreement and they can be manipulated to fit almost any context you may be working with your subject in. The second way to put a ‘Yes Set’ into action is to state the obvious facts. this can be done through compliments. The third and final way to produce a ‘Yes Set’ is to make truisms. Once you have gotten a person to start to agree with you it is likely that they will continue. This is a very popular and successful way to get suggestions into the minds of your subjects. use what the person has said to you by repeating it back to them so they agree that that is what they said or meant.

Persistence Tactics in Hypnosis: How to Use the Hypnotic Triple & Seeding Ideas Conversational hypnosis is a powerful practice that involves the use of tactics and principals that you will apply in order to influence those around you to live better lives. Compliments in this sample are somewhat of a sugar coating for the suggestion. Persistence eats away at the resistance wall built by people and helps .You can also piggy back suggestions onto yes sets. The four persistence tactics are the Hypnotic Triple. The tactics involved are many and cover a wide range of skills. He brought us the perfected art of these two Agreement Tactics and used them often in his hypnosis practice as you should consider doing in yours. Compliments also tend to extract positive behaviors from us and make us more agreeable and accepting anyway. “When you get out of the car. This is done simply by stating a single or series of verifiable facts and then adding a suggestion on to the end of the last statement. Persistence tactics are four of the tools you will learn to use with the other tactics. The Agreement Tactics of the Yes Set and Piggy Backing Suggestions are very important and useful in conversational hypnosis. rapport skills and signal recognition systems. lock the doors. An example of this would be. Law of Successive Approximations and the Law of Compounding Effect. The law of the mind that those that are the most persistent have the things they are persistent with will be deeply ingrained in them and create the biggest changes. Seeding Hypnotic Ideas. you cannot accept the compliment without also accepting the suggestion. hypnotic language foundations. In this article we will be focusing of the Hypnotic Triple and Seeding Hypnotic Ideas. This utilizes positive reinforcement by first creating a yes set. this should be done in a smooth and elegant manner of speaking. Persistence will help you to create a set of ideas that will become very powerful when set into a person. then adding a compliment and then attaching a suggestion to the end. This way of piggy backing is successful because we all enjoy and accept compliments. In the words Persistence tactics alone we find the definition of those that are the most persistent are those who are most likely to succeed at a thing. They were among the top choices of the master hypnotist Milton Erickson. The third way you can piggy back suggestions is to present feedback to your subject that will have them accept it. This is key as these are two of the persistence tactics that will help to make you most successful. As you start to put all these skills together you will begin to get a better vision of how they will all start to fit together for you in the art of hypnosis.” This works because you will inevitably get out of the car at some point and because the mind accepts this as true you will be more likely to now lock the doors as well.

. Seeding has a sneaky effect. After each idea is dropped to your listener you will nurture it with other details that will help it grow into a full grown idea of their own. In the Hypnotic Triple you will put the information to your listener piece by piece and layer by layer. If your language is not convincing then your suggestion will not get through to your listener. This is the idea that when you present an idea to a person you will want to produce a triple effect. in this the unconscious soaks it in and creates a foundation for that idea. especially when you have a change or idea that is shocking or break it down so they may be open to new ideas. suggestion or idea to brought to them. Seeding is a useful tactic. Constantly use the words or a specific word you want your listener to put into action as a part of your suggestion. Using this causes you to use repetition with your words and language. The second Persistence Tactic that we will discuss is the Seeding of Hypnotic Ideas. beliefs and ways of life. Repetition is one of the best ways to get a person to really absorb and remember an idea. If this is done right then down the road after careful nurture of the thoughts and ideas you are planting your subject will be prepared for you to bring the idea to them in a statement. and in a way that is believable your purpose will get through. In your job as a hypnotist you will have the ability to work persistence tactics into any conversation. the more it is used the more real the idea becomes for the listener. Repetition also produces positive reinforcement and that in turn creates reality. Master hypnotist Milton Erickson was very successful with this tactic in his therapies. the idea is to casually drop the ideas one by one over a period of time. He would plant the idea in the mind and then keep replanting it repeatedly until the person is ready for the full on question. You will want to make your statements smooth and elegant and use language that is believable. The most important part of the Hypnotic Triple is that you are creating a triple or repetitive effect. In this tactic you can present the information to the person a little at a time in a way that is less overwhelming to them by casually mentioning it over time. Seeding is a subtle and powerful way to get your suggestions and ideas in without your listener knowing you have even slipped them past their conscious mind. if it does not get through then there will be no recall of the information. The first of the two tactics we will be focusing on here is the Hypnotic Triple. When this is done smoothly. It will no longer be overwhelming to them because the little pieces you have put in their mind have been in there preparing them unconsciously. it will layer the information within a persons mind to make a powerful repetition of the idea you are striving to get across. this alone will cause a greater power behind your suggestions and influences.

The second Persistence Tactic we have covered is Seeding Ideas. one very consciously and the other quite the opposite. The Hypnotic Triple is a great repetitive use of language that will steer your listener to your suggestion. As you practice these tactics you will see that both have a very powerful effect as they must to have been top choices by Milton Erickson. In this tactic you will place thoughts in the minds of your listeners through casual conversation. we have covered the first two tactics which are the Hypnotic Triple and Seeding Ideas. signal recognition. So in these to Persistence Tactics you are learning to use repetition in both. This is a technique that will gently coax your subject into feeling comfortable with what may begin as an overwhelming suggestion.time after time. Each time you plant an idea you will continue to revisit it and help it to flourish to what will eventually be a full suggestion. Persistence Tactics are some of the tools you will begin to combine with many other various skills and tools that will begin to draw all your learning together to create a cohesive whole to hypnosis. the foundations of hypnotic language and rapport skill you will be building the foundation for conversational hypnosis. These will continue to help you build persistent skills into your conversational hypnosis. . When you learn to combine the four Persistence Tactics with other tactics. If you want someone to buy something you would relentlessly use the idea of buying. These both have to with repetition and are very powerful ways to slip ideas. There are four Persistence Tactics. The Hypnotic Triple is the art of stacking up the same word or idea to place a suggestion. The final two Persistence Tactics are the Laws of Successive Approximations and the Compounding Effect. Persistence Tactics in Hypnosis: Laws of Successive Approximations & Compounding Effect There are many different tactics you will learn to use in your conversational hypnosis. say the word buy and continue to triple up the effect of that one word. This is easier to accept because with Seeding you have created a foundation to set the final thought on that will be strong enough to hold it. thoughts and suggestions into the minds of your listeners.

This is another very powerful tactic in conversational hypnosis and one you will have the ability to use . the way it sounds. an easier transition. A good example of when to use the Law of Successive Approximation is if you wanted to induce a hallucination. step. just a different way to confront the issue of a large change. The Law of Successive Approximation offers you the idea of breaking the big idea down into smaller pieces that will eventually equal a large result. In this situation you would then create a new ‘yes set’ and build on that thought and behavior until the person is ready to move on to the next step. feel of it. It is similar in its purpose to the idea of seeding. By using the Law of Successive Approximation you will be giving them little pieces of the hallucination to picture one at a time. This is very easy as you can create a constant pattern. The more they carry on in this manner the more resistance is broken down and the more likely it is they will continue responding to your suggestions. is not really in front of them. ‘yes set’ then move on to the next step. Over time the Law of Compounding Effect and the suggestions made with it will become a natural way to react to the ideas you place before your listener. The key is to be sure the listener is following your lead before moving on from the ‘yes set’. As you give the listener all these suggestions it will start to become real for them and when it is time to really induce the hallucination they will be more prepared to actually take a larger step and see what it is you have given them bit by bit. This is a very big step for someone to take when they know logically that the hallucination. You are building a habit of agreement. Each time you have your listener put a specific suggestion into action they will in turn become more suggestible. Breaking down the information down makes it easier to swallow. this is also very similar to the ‘yes set’. and go back to agreement. The final Persistence Tactic is the Law of Compounding Effect. As you build the different aspects of the hallucination. lose listener. This compares to the ‘yes set’ in that each time your subject says yes to one thing they are more likely to say yes to the next statement. the smell of it.In the Law of Successive Approximations is used when you want to present a large concept or idea to someone who may seem overwhelming. There is a possibility in this process that you may lose your listener. This is an easy pattern to follow as it will create a constant loop for you to travel on. if this happens and it will eventually you only need to backtrack as far as the last point of agreement. In the Law of Compounding Effect you continue to piggy back suggestions and the person continues to carry out those suggestions as they become more suggestible with each one. This pattern would consist of taking a small step. whatever it may be.

The critical filters decide what is safe to allow inside our minds. True they are a bit sneaky. They are also responsible for creating resistance for hypnotists. healthier and more fulfilling lives. Everyone has what we refer to as a critical filter. . These concepts are based on a set of principals that will allow you to use people’s strengths against them in ways that will help them to improve their lives in the ways they want. Stealth Tactics are the tool hypnotists and you will use to get past the critical factor. It is simply an alternative way to get inside the mind so you can begin your work as a hypnotist.often as it accomplishes two things at once. gives you a great piece of advice and you just outright reject and discard it with no thought. They were created in a way to assist in helping to influence people in a positive way that still bypasses the critical factor inside the mind. as you will see. It not only allows your suggestions to be carried out in thoughts and behaviors it also diminishes resistance. Stealth Tactics are a secretive way of getting past the critical factor that doesn’t resort to bullying. This is the mechanism inside your mind that analyzes and criticizes information coming in from outside sources. The critical filter has come to a point where it is simply not allowing any information in. A good example of this is when a friend. These two Persistence Tactics when combined with the other persistence tactics and concepts we have learned will start to bring your knowledge together to create a smooth flow of suggesting behaviors and seeing those behaviors come to life in your subjects. The suggestions you are giving to audience should be ones that will help them to live happier. The question becomes how to get the very suggestions in to a persons mind when they reject them. There are five Stealth Tactics that we will give a brief explanation of here and then dive further into in future articles. someone you would normally trust. There are other ways to get past the critical factor although they are largely damaging and can cause emotional and mental hardship which should not be your goal in hypnosis. but all intentions with Stealth Tactics are truly good intentions. They look at all the messages being sent to the mind and either reject or accept them. There are times when a person’s critical filter has become overactive and will start to reject even the good and wise suggestions coming from anyone. In fact quite the opposite. Stealth Tactics in Hypnosis: What Are Stealth Tactics Conversational Hypnosis is an art of communicating suggestions to other while they are in a state of trance.

As for a quick introduction.The first Stealth Tactic is the Law of Reversed Effect. This is considered a Stealth Tactic because when you imply something to someone it usually bypasses the critical filter simply because we assume implications are true. Now the beauty here is that while they are busy resisting you over an idea that you are really not concerned with you have the opportunity to give your suggestions to them. This tactic is used everyday in the natural ways we speak and can be a great tool in hypnosis. The importance here is that you have a brief summary of Refocusing Attention. The reason the Law of Reversed Effect works for Conversational Hypnotists is that when put into action it causes a person to fail at something. The second Stealth Tactic is to Redirect Resistance. Presuppositions are the fifth Stealth Tactic we will eventually cover in depth. Many times they will be so busy consciously resisting the one aspect that the important suggestion is never even noticed going in. you cause a person to fail at a requested task. presuppositions are simply linguistic assumptions. That failure will cause the person to step away from their resistance and allow your suggestions in. The fourth Stealth Tactic is Implication. Redirecting Resistance is the art of giving a person something they can resist you over so they feel validated and powerful in their abilities to control their own mind. Refocusing Attention is the third Stealth Tactic and it can be used right along with Redirecting Resistance. This happens mainly because a person that is consciously trying to do something that should be taking place unconsciously. We will cover that aspect in a future article. In the Law of Reversed Effect the concept is that the harder you try to do something the more likely it is you will fail. The effect of the conscious mind interfering with the fluid movements of the unconscious mind is confusion and failure. These are the things that are automatically assumed to be true based solely on the language we use to convey them. . People don’t typically stop to analyze them because this is a lot of hard work and effort to put in to an implied idea. Implication is the power of how to use body language. This is a simple and easy process once you get the hang of it but can be very powerful when put to full use. facial expressions and tone of voice in order to imply a thing. This principal is very powerful like most of the Stealth Tactics. Refocusing Attention is when you subtly place the suggestion you want to get across in conversation and then distract or refocus the listener’s attention elsewhere.

yes or no?” The bind is in that no matter how he answered the question he would be admitting guilt of beating his wife. You sound as if you are asking a question or giving a choice but you are really getting a much bigger question answered in the process.This may sound complicated at first but once you get into the habit of using presuppositions they are very easy to use and you in fact use them everyday. Presuppositions have a lot in common with implications simply because they are assumptions. A bind or double bind is a sneaky way of redirecting the resistance of a person because they simply do not have a choice in the matter. The Law of Reversed Effect is simply that the harder you try to do something the more likely it is that you will fail. It is not the more your try to do a thing it is the harder you try to do a thing that will result in failure. The main point in Stealth Tactics is that this is a way of disguising what you are doing in order to defeat the critical factor and get your message through a person’s resistance. If you do not it is likely that your listener’s unconscious will start to distrust or dislike you in the actions you are taking. . Until then the main concept you need to know is that these are principals that can be combined with one another and the other language skills you have been learning in order to really know how to begin to communicate hypnotically. The first Stealth Tactic we will discuss is the Law of Reversed Effect. This is not to be confused with persistence. A famous Marx Brothers line that is a double bind is when a man asks the hotel manager. it will explain how we should be using something called the Hypnotic Challenge. Binds and Double Binds are a strategic way of phrasing a statement or question that gives the illustration of a choice but that choice really does not exist. Because these tactics are a little on the sneaky side you will want to be sure to exercise the best judgment in using them. “So are you still beating your wife. Binds and double binds are a very powerful way to bypass the critical factor as are all the other Stealth Tactics. You will learn much more about these and how to use them as you progress through the next five articles. Stealth Tactics are used in a way that either will be unnoticed by your subject or will be too complicated for them to really grasp the objective you have in mind. The Law of Reversed Effect in Hypnosis: How to Use the Hypnotic Challenge As you dive into the deep art of conversational hypnosis you will find that there are a set of Stealth Tactics that can be used in order to bypass the critical factor in people’s minds. Again this Stealth Tactic is very powerful and can be like all the Stealth Tactics layered with the others to make a more powerful affect than when used alone. Finally the sixth Stealth Tactic is called Binds and Double Binds. It was thought in the 1970’s that binds and double binds were the cause of schizophrenic symptoms resulting from childhood.

In the Hypnotic Challenge you are going to be setting your listener up for failure by using the Law of Imagination and the Law of Reversed Effect. If you think of something you want but should not have you start to set yourself up for the failure in this law. . When the conscious mind starts to interfere with the fluid motions of the unconscious the result is failure. Our unconscious mind acts on the things we decide to do and works out the navigation of how to actually do them. The test is not within the suggestions themselves it lies within the challenge and failure to complete that challenge attached to the end of the test. The more you think about preventing yourself from getting the thing you shouldn’t have the more positive associations are ignited in your head. if you like cars the excitement of owning a new car. The conscious mind works on the simple things. The unconscious mind makes the more complicated functions of life run more smoothly as it can handle much more complicated procedures. you are reminded of it often as you think about how you shouldn’t have it. If you like cake the taste. The Hypnotic Challenge is a way that you will ask someone to try to fulfill a suggestions and you watch to see how they fail.There is a reason this failure will take place and that is that our conscious minds work in a way that it executes doing things. things that only require 5 – 9 steps to accomplish. When a person try’s and fails a challenge you have set before them they will unconsciously start to believe that resistance is not within their means. Now this brings us to the Law of Imagination. you read the words consciously but your unconscious deciphers them and adds the emotions and feelings that accompany the words. Usually if you want something the thought of it will bring a mirage of good experiences to mind. For instance you decide to read a book. It is only when the conscious mind starts to get into the unconscious mind’s territory that failure begins to take place. This is important to understand as it is the basis of why the Law of Reversed Effect works. A classic hypnotist would do this through suggestibility tests. Now in this comes the Hypnotic Challenge. These are good feelings and experiences that you relate to the thing you are trying to avoid. The Law of Reversed Effect works because our conscious mind is trying to do something that we would normally use our unconscious mind for. The way this works is when you state that you do not want something or you shouldn’t do something. The best way to describe this law is to give you an example. We are all humans and in that we want things. Eventually you will be overloaded by the positive images of the thing you shouldn’t have and your unconscious will give in and get the thing you shouldn’t have. which is yet another reason for failure.

such as the word try or something with a like meaning. Now let’s review this as there is a lot of action going on in this Stealth Tactic. by showing a person that they have no resistance and that they will fail you have actually. As a hypnotist you must learn to bypass the critical factor using a set of Stealth Tactics in order to enter people’s minds. The critical factor and resistance will be completely bypassed in the process. Stealth Tactics are simply a way to do one of two things. All of these steps will cause a conflict in their resistance to your suggestion. that control will be given over to the hypnotist. This is where the reversed effect comes in. The best way to use this law in conversational hypnosis is to use a linguistic trick by using words that imply “try”. “Try” itself implies failure and to imply the failure is to stack the odds in your favor that they will actually fail at a preconceived task. The Law of Reversed Effect says that the harder you try to do a thing the more likely it is you will fail. You really want to learn how to mask what you are doing in order to enter the mind and leave your suggestions. As long as they continue to believe this one thing it will continue to ring true for them. get into the mind unnoticed by your listener or complicate them to the point of allowed entry. They have no resistance. passed up the barrier that causes failure. Redirecting Resistance and Refocusing Attention Will Boost Your Influence in Hypnosis Conversational Hypnosis is an art largely made up of the language you use. To put this law in action you need to require that the subject make a conscious interference with a normally unconscious process. You will add to this basing the odds in your favor by asking them to complete a task it is likely they will fail at. As you do this you will use subtle hints to imply they will fail. Because they believe this you now have the power to avoid all failure in your objective as you have bypassed all their resistance. Stealth Tactics are very helpful in the field of conversational hypnosis in this manner. This takes a fine skill as it means you must bypass the critical factor and defeat resistance. Once you learn how to use them you will be able to deal with your subjects in a way that you have never experienced before. Now all the suggestions you make will easily flow to the unconscious because there is no resistance in place to stop and examine the suggestions.As long as the listener believes that resistance is not within them to control. they failed because you set it up that way. in a very sneaky way. . now they will believe they have no control over failure.

it makes them feel weak and can ultimately give a person a poor psychological frame to continue to grow from. The bottom line is the more a person feels out of control the more they will fight to take that control back. one of which being a variety of upgrades. new kitchen tile. resistance can actually help you to get where you need to be inside the mind to carry out your purpose. Let’s face it no one likes to be controlled by someone else. It is to purposely give a person something to resist that will fail. As a fantastic real estate agent you give him many options to consider when purchasing a house.While it is important to know how to sneak in bypassing all resistance. It becomes a question of you versus them and can be damaging to the self esteem. When they put this instinct into motion the Law of Reversed Effect happens and they will fail causing more damage and hardship to the self esteem There is a solution to this and it is not to abandon all you just learned about the Law of Reversed Effect! The best way to combat this problem is to use the resistance you are stealing from them to uplift the persons self esteem. Your desired outcome was for the man to buy the house. Redirecting resistance is very simple in the idea of it. they were not at the mercy of all outside influence and they defeated some external suggestion making them in control of something. if we don’t we start to overcompensate with feelings of low self esteem and destructive behaviors in our relationships and with ourselves. This will give them the feeling of power back. You have given your client something to resist other than the suggestion you initially wanted to take place. The idea is to build on your rapport at the same time you are sneaking your suggestions in. After hearing about the upgrades. Next thing you know he decides on no upgrades but he buys the house. Use your tools and skills to get the person to like you more. As he was having resistance to that you gave him the . The best way to do this is by redirecting resistance. he hasn’t quite signed on the dotted line just yet. Now here you have redirected the resistance. A good example of this would be if you were a real estate agent and you have a client that wants to buy a house. Now you need to learn how to go beyond that. It can really bring out the worst relationship in a hypnotist and subject when used too often or in the wrong way. give them a feeling of control back in their life. You must learn how to use resistance in a way that is helpful to you as the hypnotist. He has found the house he wants but is still having some second thoughts. As people we feel we need to have control of our lives. Believe it or not. The problem with this tool is it puts your listener in a combative frame of mind. fireplace so on and so forth. The Law of Reversed Effect is very useful tool however it can also create problems in your hypnotic relationship.

much more powerful. Redirecting resistance is solely about finding the things people will be able to resist instead of your original purpose. In refocusing attention you will plant the seed in their mind then before it is noticed you will focus attention on something other than resisting the original idea. Then maybe 5 months down the road you are having a similar conversation and you state the idea as your own. and it will be combined with all the other principals you are learning in order to create a whole. This principal is similar to seeding ideas but creates a more powerful effect. You see here how this one layer effect of refocusing attention can be powerful and has probably happened to you at one time or another. much. The key is to refocus the attention before the critical factor gets a hold of it and starts to criticize it. suggest original idea. You may not even know the idea came from your friend because you were not focused on the statement itself you were focused on the entire conversation that was taking place. refocus and so on and so forth. This . refocus. six or seven layers of different topics. When you put this skill into action you will drop in the suggestion and refocus the attention repeatedly.” By accepting the invitation to resist the second part of the statement you are automatically making the first part true. Now think about the same idea but in layers of five. especially when it is combined with other stealth tactics. The next Stealth Tactic that we will cover here is that of refocusing attention. The person resisting feels as if they have regained control of their life again and you get to slip in the suggestion with little to no resistance. you can do this as well. The power in this tactic is that the original idea will go unnoticed and start to grow as you focus the person elsewhere. As a Stealth Tactic redirecting resistance is very powerful and will be an awesome skill to store in your toolbox. An example of how this works is if you were having a conversation with a friend and they suggest an idea or make a statement in passing. The beautiful thing here is you both win. The concept here is to make a suggestion and implant it and then refocus their attention elsewhere. If there is no conscious information coming from them then the suggestion will have the time it needs to grow within without time for resistance. “When you do this. The statement is only a small part of a much larger conversation but it is still there. Eventually it will appear to them as their own idea and people tend to agree with ideas they think are their own. It really doesn’t matter to you if he upgrades his fireplace just that he buys the house. There are thousands of ways to use this principal. As the conscious mind focuses on the idea of resisting your new idea the old one goes in unnoticed and usually becomes valid. Suggest.upgrades to resist.

a new set of information to focus on. In Implication you will see that anything you imply to a listener will automatically bypass the critical factor. when really these details are probably unimportant. Implication is largely based on the use of body language.idea of layering creates an overload of information to the point of lack in ability to keep and focus on the original idea. The first way to do this is to simply change the topic. There are degrees with which you must alter your repetitions. On the other hand. however both body language and voice are at the heart of Conversational Hypnosis. You can also confuse them. The Stealth Tactics you have been learning are important as you learn to implant your suggestions while bypassing the critical factor that causes the mind t reject or analyze what is not it’s own. An overload of information will cause their conscious to focus on finding a place for all the details you are giving them. The idea behind all the Stealth Tactics is to enter the mind unnoticed or overload the mind once you are there so you can leave your suggestion. If you are working with a very sharp minded individual you will need to repeat less and mask your suggestion more. you will need more repetitions and can make your suggestion in more blatant statements. The mind does not process and analyze implications they way it does things you say outright. If you make a statement a loud the very sounds of the . The Subtle Art of Implication in Hypnosis The language you use in Conversational Hypnosis is key to your success as a hypnotist. Another way to distract attention is to overload the person with details and facts. When you learn to carry this out successfully you will have the ability to change lives and obtain your goals as a hypnotist. Now it is very important to remember to use repetition in this process. You will be able to determine how often repetition is necessary from experience with each person you work with. This will focus them on trying to decipher what you have said and again focus will be distracted. As you continue to learn more concepts and principals of Stealth Tactics along with other language skills all the parts will start to come together to create a complete picture that is Conversational Hypnosis. There are ways of distracting attention that will make this tactic even easier. Implication is the next Stealth Tactic you will need to add to your arsenal of mind tools. it is also equally important not to come back to the idea so often that they figure out on a conscious level what you are up to. The opposite happens for the simpler minded. Both of these elements must be mastered in order to accomplish the goals you have with people.

The concept behind Tacit Authority is to imply thing about you as an individual. they will automatically assume you are brave and loving of animals. “I know you parked the car in the garage. The other students are following the set expectation by the first student to ask a question. but sets an expectation within your mind of the type of service you will receive. too tired or just overloaded with information in the first place. and make it believable. This brings us to the Implication Tactics.words you use are instantly being checked by the critical factor for agreement. The first Implication Tactic is called Implied Directives. Many times charismatic people are very good at tacit authority. The third Implication Tactic is the Tacit Authority. This is the art of asking someone to do something without actually asking them a question. The reason for this is that it takes a vast amount of effort to analyze an implication. This happens when you use an implication to set up an expectation. however it is rare. They are statements you make that are accompanied by a certain tone. This doesn’t mean it never happens. When an implication is made it is done so with body language and tone and is less likely to be checked and often is not at all. They are not inclined to brag about themselves they display their achievements and allow others to draw their own conclusions. An everyday example of this tactic is when you visit the office of a doctor or lawyer and they have numerous certifications and articles displayed about the type of work and their successes. If you tell a story about rescuing a puppy from a river. you use them everyday. many times people will not do this out of habit. For the conscious mind to analyze an implication there is simply more work and effort involved. A good example would be to say. which are simply ways of using the Stealth Tactic of Implication. . especially in Conversational Hypnosis. The items that are displayed don’t require the professional to tell you how skilled they are at their profession. This changes how people respond to you in different ways and environments. A common example of this is when a teacher asks if her students have any questions. Implications are very common.” This is quite obviously a statement and not a question but when said in a specific tone it implies a question. It all has a pattern and a flow to it. Often after one person has raised a hand and asked a question there will be others to follow. How you use an implication is very important. The teacher has made the implication and expectation that there are probably questions about the subject matter. The second Implication Tactic is to Create an Expectation. Another way to use Tacit Authority is to tell a story and allow the listeners to draw conclusions about your personality from that story. body language or look.

It is vital to learn how and when to use certain aspects of language to be successful in hypnosis. As you learn the Stealth Tactics you will also be learning how to combine those tactics with other language principals and concepts.” The implication is more believable for the simple fact that it is their own idea. You can steer that view and invite confidence. mannerisms. They are believed to be true just because of the language you are using. Stealth Tactics are a set of ways that will help you to enter the mind of a subject and leave your suggestion either without detection from the critical factor or by overloading the conscious mind in a way that it will not object to your statements presence. The first is that there is a car. . Once you master all the language skills including Stealth Tactics you will be on your way to becoming a more skilled and accomplished hypnotist. certificates and so on will all tell their own stories about you or what you are asking of the person.” This is a fairly common statement. And the third is that there is more than one child in the car. The fourth Stealth Tactic used in Conversational Hypnosis is the concept of Presuppositions. a change in voice. So what exactly is a presupposition? A presupposition is a linguistic assumption. The main concepts here are to remember that in Implication you are using the tone of your voice. Presuppositions are used everyday by you and everyone you know. trust and comfort with the Implications you coax from them. If you were to state. Almost every statement you make has a presupposition built into it. All of which will help you in creating a full process or picture of how hypnosis works. Implication is a very powerful way of making a statement without actually having to find the words to say it outright. Raised eyebrows. “The kids are riding in the back of the car. things around you and facial expressions to imply a thing. Changing Hypnotic Realities Without a Word: The Power of Presuppositions Conversational Hypnosis illustrates its power mostly through the language you use. The best way to explain a presupposition is to show you an example. These are things you assume given the statements you hear and make. If people are drawing their own conclusions about you from implications they are more likely to believe them than if you were to simply say “I am brave. and there is a few presuppositions built into it. body language. they came up with a view of you that is all their own. Stealth Tactics are some of the most valuable concepts you will learn in the time you spend studying hypnosis.These three smaller tactics will help you in applying the Stealth Tactic of Implication. All these things are things you assume from that simple common statement. The second is there is a back and front to the car.

you are busy thinking about where the kids are in the car.” . as soon as. These are used to imply quality or action. You can also accomplish this by using words like begin. The final presupposition you need to know is that of adverbs and adjectives. curious and sadly. As you are learning the three types of presuppositions you can also practice stacking presuppositions. The first type of presupposition is one of awareness. first. second and third. Once the statement is made you are not questioning whether or not there are kids or a car. This means they are not going to take the time to critically think or analyze what you are saying. after. prior to. Words you can use to imply awareness are know. Any words that describe a time sequence or time something happened. Even though this is not really necessary or important it does allow time for your suggestions and ideas to quietly slip by the critical factor. Now there are many different types of presuppositions that can be made in many different ways. You can use numerical order to do this. making resistance nonexistent. In this concept if resistance does take place it will happen on the level of awareness not on the subject itself. aware. The presupposition that uses time and time sequence will state a chain of events in sequence or a time that they took place. In this presupposition you are making your listener more aware of the quality of a thing than the thing itself. end. Usually when you stack presupposition the listener’s conscious mind will get over loaded with information and generally revert back to just going with the flow of your speaking. luckily. before. This is a great way to distract the conscious mind from noticing the suggestion you are slipping in. The second type of presupposition uses time and time sequence with in the statement. They are descriptive words like fortunately. In this presupposition you are taking the focus off the subject and redirecting their focus to where or why it is that way. “Luckily. one on top of the other you are sending and overwhelming amount of information out for the conscious mind to make its way through. When you stack presuppositions.Another way that presuppositions work is once the information is implied you no longer consciously try to disagree with these facts. The reason this works to distract resistance is that your listener gets caught up in organizing the events and when they took place. continue and so on. we will go over some of the most valuable for your needs in the art of hypnosis. I did catch the train. When you take the time to imply that you are aware of a certain thing it will immediately draw your listener’s attention to it. realized and noticed.

The final Stealth Tactic you are going to learn is called Binds and Double Binds. when to use certain skills and how to apply those skills. the attention is drawn to the lucky part. The child is presented with an impossible choice that of a desire to be loved by their parent versus the desire to avoid violence. This was a theory that came from a famous Anthropologist in the 1970’s named Gregory Bateson. the ways you use the language. It is important to remember that these are not just statements they are valuable tools for you to sneak into the mind past the critical factor. In this presupposition there is no need to know how to use or stack them because the conscious graciously does it for you. . An example would be a parent that beats their child and explains it by saying the violence is just a way I show I love you. The study concluded that this impossible choice caused schizophrenic conditions in children presented with these choices. The resistance is newly placed on the how. The Bind and Double Bind come from a line of thought called the Double Bind Theory of Schizophrenia. This will adequately overload the conscious so your suggestions are firmly planted. How Schizophrenics Can Help Your Hypnosis: Binds and Double Binds The art of Conversational Hypnosis is much about language. This can be done with one presupposition but is more likely to work when you stack three or more together. The stealth tactics you learn here will eventually be combined with all the other language concepts to create a larger picture of how everything works together smoothly to create better lives for everyone. If you made this statement alone your listener would not resist the fact there was a train but want to know why you almost missed it. This theory came to the conclusion that schizophrenia was a way that children developed to cope when presented impossible decisions by their parents. how did the action happen. Stealth Tactics are a way of doing just this. Bateson investigated the cause of schizophrenia in our society and came up with the Double Bind Theory of Schizophrenia. These tactics are used for distracting critical factor or overwhelming it to the point that the suggestion goes in undetected.There is no question about the train’s existence. how did you almost miss the train. In doing three or more presuppositions you will override the conscious’ ability to keep up with you and there will likely be no critical analysis at all. All of these factors are important to learning how to have a smooth interaction and insert undetected and agreeable suggestions into the mind of your clients.

Let’s take the example that you are a jewelry sales person and you say to a customer. it really doesn’t matter which option they end up choosing. “Would you like your diamond set in gold OR silver?” In this double bind you are giving the customer a choice but you are still implying that the customer will be buying the diamond. . which behaviors are being consciously and unconsciously controlled the behavior is still being implied. it is an impossible set of choices to choose from. how will schizophrenia help you in your hypnosis? The answer is the creation of binds and double binds. You can read the words on this paper focus on them and think about them or you can read them and daydream about what it would be like to put them into action. Now in a double bind you will use the word “or” to create the actual double bind. Now double binds are very common and at times it is not negative to fall into one. Remember that a double bind is an illustration of choice. Within this same concept of Conscious-Unconscious Double Binds it is important to understand that you can do things two different ways. No matter which way it goes.So the question comes. These of course can create some rather unpleasant experiences if you do not proceed correctly with this concept. As we have just set out a bind is giving someone a choice that doesn’t actually exist. We can all do things two different ways. When you learn to do binds correctly you will make your listener feel empowered by the fact that there is a choice and still be acquiring the information or lack of resistance you initially wanted. usually using the word or to separate the options. In this concept you will be able to allow some aspects of the subject’s behavior to be controlled consciously and others unconsciously. those are unconsciously or consciously. If you recognize when someone is using a double bind on you. Either way you are getting what you want. This is a way of redirecting resistance in you are giving a choice that implies the very thing you want but gives them a choice about the thing you want. once you recognize it there is a way out. Within this Stealth Tactic there is a Special Tactic included called ConsciousUnconscious Double Binds. It is important that you are aware of the word “or” so you can consciously create double binds as well as notice when they are being used on you. Although you are creating the illusion of choice you are not really giving the person you are conversing with a real choice. If you decide not to accept the bind or double bind on any level you will be denying it and creating a new freedom for yourself. Regardless of whether you are deciding to accept or deny the double binds you hear daily you can still maintain awareness for them. This is merely a way of using double binds hypnotically.

experiences. however defining these is difficult. As a hypnotist you can disguise those suggestions with Stealth Tactics. insights. as this will not be effective. this is the art of suggestion. There are places in the mind you must learn to access. The instructions that the unconscious will take from the conscious must be presented in the right way in order for it to stick. denial and other defense mechanisms. . Although no one can accurately and concretely say what actually happens inside our heads we know from life experience that certain results come from certain effects. Now the trouble here is no one really knows how the human mind works. experiences or thought processes at one time. Once you learn how to set these events into action you will be closer to making happier lives for everyone. Our unconscious is the master controller but will also take commands from the conscious mind. habits and wisdoms that we have built up over the span of our lives. We have discovered that it is safe to say that everything that happens within our minds and bodies are unconscious or semi-unconscious events. As to why the results are what they are can only be theorized about but we know that trauma causes pain. Influence & Persuasion in Hypnosis: Changing Moods Not Minds Conversational Hypnosis is really the art of changing lives. There are so many ways to interpret the word mind that giving it a definition is extremely difficult. A simple way to describe the process of the mind we know are that consciousness is the type of awareness you can focus on.In understanding binds and double binds it is important to recognize the conscious and unconscious minds and how they work. Unfortunately you cannot just tell someone to change. As hypnotists we work with the conscious and unconscious minds on a regular and consistent basis. and one of those is the bind and the double bind we have discussed here. There is no philosopher or psychological researchers who have been able to define the human mind in concrete terms. It is known that the conscious mind can hold up to 5-9 ideas. The conscious mind is also responsible for making choices and plans. The unconscious mind however is responsible for a huge amount of tasks. As hypnotists it is important for you to have an understanding of the conscious and unconscious minds. moods to change and triggers to pull. We either made suggestions to ourselves or others make suggestions to us. It holds all our memories. when you get down to it your purpose as a hypnotist will be to help people to make positive changes for themselves in their lives.

But then the researchers had the students take the test again after giving all the students a few new shots of alcohol. Therefore when you change the state of mind all the behaviors and information that individual has access to changes. And in most of these studies it shows that the ways in which people code the behaviors they have is dependant on the state of mind they are in when learning that behavior. The students who were studying sober performed better on the test. The first group of students took on this task sober. Access State Principal which really says within those very words what you will be doing with it. If you have the tools to change their mood you will be more successful in changing their mind quicker and more thoroughly. Since the 1970’s many tests of like nature have been conducted. You see most people believe that in order to change someone’s thinking about a particular subject you need to change their mind. However there is a more efficient way to change minds. The students then had a few hours to study and after were sent off to take the test. acted or behaved in different ways. The best way to picture this is that the mind is made up of many different rooms. the second group was given a few shots of alcohol to get them a little intoxicated before they began. Behind the Access State Principal is the idea of changing moods. this is really a way to change learning as well. In . They will most often try to do this with logical arguments. persuasion and facts.One of the most important things you need to learn as a hypnotist is how to change behaviors. provoke a new set of emotions the state of mind changes. not minds. You will be accessing different states in order to change people’s moods which will in turn change the ways in which they think about things. It was used to study state of mind and performance. The vital key in changing behavior and learning is to know the Access State Principal or ASP. This all relates to the Access State Principal. every room is a different state where you have learned. When you learn to change a person’s mood their mind will follow because it is all connected in the mind. In the second test the students that had studied while intoxicated did better than those who had studied sober. Basically the researchers got together two groups of students and asked them to study and memorize a list of nonsense syllables. There was a scientific study done on ASP in the 1970’s. So in theory each separate room stores the information for all those different states. Access State Principal will give you the knowledge to change the way people think and behave in any given set of circumstances.

When it comes to changing minds the science behind it can be broken down simply. The state of mind is what controls your behaviors within that state of mind. mental images and behaviors in order to access those states of mind. how you learn it and how to access the information you want to share consciously. This is why changing moods changes minds. You must be able to help your subjects to access each state you need in order to accomplish your goals together. at least for our purposes.order to have access to that information you need to enter that state or room with in the mind. Access State Principal will be a tool that you will learn to combine with many other skills. knowledge and inspirations. You will need to lead them into changing their body movements. Every state is a little different in some way as each state of mind allows you access to different sets of information. The more intense the experience the better the state of mind you can access. Part of this accessing of state of mind will be learning to hit their emotional triggers in order to cue the responses that control these behaviors. This means the ways you move. This will create a great starting point in amplifying their experiences and make the most intense experience for them. each affecting the other. where you store the information you learn. When your body move the neurology in your brain changes. your listener’s state of mind is really the control center for everything you do. Now this is all important to Access State Principal because when you are attempting to change a subjects mind about a thing you will need to access their state of mind. Your state of mind. It has to do with your emotions and your physiological state as well. Each time a different state of mind is accessed a different or new set of neurology is lit within our brains. When your body either stays in one position or moves to a new position this too is involved in accessing or shutting down information in different states of mind. Part of your job as a hypnotist is to learn the secret paths to access those states of mind. The different states of mind hold the ability for individuals to improve on focus. With the Access State Principal you can improve your life and the lives of those around you in numerous ways. to make a powerful set of hypnotic tools How Emotional Triggers Can Boost the Impact of Your Hypnosis Emotional Triggers are a very powerful part of what you will be doing as a hypnotist. As a hypnotist you will want to be able to imbed these triggers in . State is of course more complicated than just a bunch of lights going off in your brain. performance. They are an unconscious response that is triggered within the body to develop a physical or emotional behavior.

Many times these triggers are created by environments and sometimes they are created unintentionally by other people. The dogs began to associate the ringing of the bell with the expectation of food. Before Pavlov and his dogs were recognized for this discovery of unconscious responses or emotional triggers there was an American doctor by the name of William Twitmeyer who is considered the unsung hero of discovery in unconscious responses. No matter how they come about they are there and they can be created by you. Post hypnotic triggers are emotional triggers that can be set by a hypnotist within another individual to create a specific reaction. This accidental and unconscious response was the first discovery of unconscious responses and emotional trigger. It was a very graphic example of emotional triggering and one that is still talked about in history today. In this experiment Pavlov would ring a bell directly before sending food to them through a shoot. William Twitmeyer discovered the Knee-jerk reflex. It is an automatic nervous system function that was being triggered due to the ringing of a bell. A Russian researcher named Ivan Pavlov is credited with the discovery of unconscious responses. This was a profound discovery in that it astounded people to actually be able to see such an unconscious event controlled by the nervous system to take place on cue. The dogs developed an emotional trigger in a short period of time. Twitmeyer also realized in his discovery that after around 50 to 100 times of repeating the process just holding the hammer in a position that suggested he was about to tap the knee the person’s leg would automatically jump and straighten out. This research by both Twitmeyer and Pavlov shows us today that there is a truth in the conditioning of unconscious responses and emotional triggers.your subjects so you will have the ability to produce behaviors in them that will lead to the positive outcomes set in your goals. After a while just the sound of the bell would cause the dogs to salivate. These are referred to as post hypnotic suggestions. sometime between 1901 and 1902. In his experiment known to us now as Pavlov’s Dogs emotional triggers were presented to the world. Emotional triggers were discovered at the turn of the century. The knee-jerk reflex is when you firmly tap the soft part of the knee cap to extract a reflex in which the leg jumps and straightens out. It is also a very powerful example of an unconscious trigger that was either intentionally or unintentionally implanted in the patient. which are in essence an emotional trigger. Salivation is a bodily function that can be consciously controlled. .

This is just one example of the many unconscious responses and emotional triggers that are common to us everyday. It is your job as a hypnotist to learn how to recognize and develop this skill for yourself so you too can create these emotional triggers in the people around you.Emotional triggers that are created by our environments naturally occur on a daily basis. They access the unconscious response through the recognition of boxes in the advertisements. The advertisements we see everyday utilize this principal by way of packaging. If you want your listener to relax you must access it fully. when we see those boxes or packages on the shelves of the supermarket we instantly recognize them. Without this you will have difficulties in the future accessing the exact strong state of mind you were originally seeking. bypass the critical thinking. In learning how to implant an emotional trigger in your subjects you must take certain specific steps to ensure you are doing it correctly. Triggering people into an emotional state is a powerful technique to learn. phrases or even the voice of someone familiar. In order to do this you must learn to create your own hypnotic triggers that will access emotional states from the people you are helping. The package seems to stand out from the others surrounding it. activate an unconscious response and be rewarded with a desired behavior or thought pattern. Some very common examples of naturally occurring emotional triggers are songs. the smell of perfume or cologne. . smell of cookies baking. When this happens you are reliving the memory as you think of the events and feelings it brings to mind. One of the most common examples of an emotional trigger is in advertising. Whatever state of mind you have access to when you set your trigger will be the state of mind that is presented once your trigger is fired. Any time you hear that particular song you are instantly taken back to a certain memory or set of memories. pictures. In the 4 Stage Protocol you will absorb the attention. Before you can actually set the emotional trigger there are conditions that you must be aware of in order to be skilled in this area. It will give you the ability to obtain certain behaviors or thoughts put into action from the people around you. there is no room for mixed states of mind here. This can be something as simple as hearing a song that brings back specific memories of a time in your life. The first condition you must we aware of is that you must have access to a clear state of mind. The first of those steps is to follow the 4 Stage Protocol. After you have successfully done this you will have set the scene for creating an emotional trigger later on.

Once you have decided on a trigger you set the trigger simply by doing it. smell taste. gesture. When you fire the trigger and the previous emotional state returns you will know you have accomplished this short term goal of setting an emotional trigger. It can be a word. The final step and one of the most important is to test the trigger. Do something they can see you do. If the state does not return you simply need to start over from the beginning and try again. You can do this by simply breaking the concentration with a distraction. The 4 Stage Protocol will help you to set the right environment to set a successful Emotional Trigger. In order to create a new Emotional Trigger in a person there are skills and concepts you must learn to do first to be successful in implanting an Emotional Trigger. Before you start to practice the concepts in this article be sure to have the principal of 4 Stage Protocol mastered. . Both these concepts will help your subject to enter the clearest state of mind to whatever emotion you are trying to provoke. Aside from the 4 Stage Protocol you must also be able to understand and utilize the technique of ‘going first’. Keep in mind this is a very powerful technique of accessing states of mind and should be done with caution. sound and sight triggers. This is to set the trigger. The trigger you are setting can be anything you can work in to a casual conversation. Examples of these are simple. How to Create Emotional Triggers in Hypnosis Emotional Triggers are a key element in Conversational Hypnosis. However it is good to know that while you can use any of these the easiest to work with are the touch. This is important because once they are in a clear state of mind you will set off your trigger once again and then watch to see if it has taken effect. This is the third condition for setting an emotional trigger. After you have set the trigger you will want to condition it through repetitive actions. touch or sound. Once you have mastered these two skills and are well practiced at the other beginning skills you will have the ability to smoothly set successful Emotional Triggers. These skills will help you to embed your suggestions is a pure clear state of mind. hear you do or feel you do physically.After you have successfully done this you will want to continue with the next condition. They will make change for the people around you easier and more efficient. It doesn’t matter how you do this as long as you leave them with a clear state of mind.

If you cannot use the 4 Stage Protocol then your attempts at setting triggers may likely go unsuccessfully for the simple fact that the conscious mind will be too involved to let the trigger in. Pre-existing triggers. whether created environmentally or by you. This is done by actually giving direction to the person’s inner experiences. If you will remember this is used to bypass the critical filter and keep the listener from analyzing your trigger. this will assist you in accessing hypnotic experiences. The reason for this is you will have to work harder to bypass the critical filters as they will still be in place if the person is consciously aware. will be helpful in your job as a hypnotist especially when working with the same subject consistently. The danger here is that it will activate the Law of Reversed Effect. Another pitfall of setting triggers while the conscious awareness is checked in is that it will take more and more repetitions to set the trigger. By doing these detailed descriptions in vivid detail you will be triggering an already existing emotional trigger. This happens because once a person is used to or recognizes your hypnotic tone or auditory shift to a hypnotic voice it will tend to trigger responses much quicker. The Law of Reversed Effect if you remember is the harder you try at a thing the more likely it is you will fail. This way it will take less time and effort to set a successful Emotional Trigger. The main language skills you will want to use are detailed descriptions that bring a set of vivid pictures and feelings to the forefront of the listener’s mind. There are other tools in your language that will help you with this. . The harder they are trying to consciously activate the state you are trying to trigger the more likely it is they will fail. Your trigger may not even make it past the critical thinking of the person and be rejected before it is even set. the second step is to induce a State.When you have a listener and you are ready to set an Emotional Trigger in them you must first utilize the 4 Stage Protocol. On the other hand it is possible to set a trigger when someone is consciously aware. So the first step in setting Emotional Triggers is to use the 4 Stage Protocol. This is a trigger that was previously developed through environmental experiences or because you created it purposefully in a previous session to trigger the state you are looking for. This shift to your hypnotic voice when working with your regular clients will help them in accessing hypnotic experiences. Setting Emotional Triggers is an act that needs to happen when the conscious mind is not aware of what you are doing. Inducing a State is easiest done by asking questions that will be vivid enough to bring the experience back to life.

. This is pivotal. After you have accessed a clear state of mind you will set your trigger. If you want the trigger to be a gesture or mannerism use that specific gesture or mannerism. Do whatever it is you want the trigger to be. A quick review of the vast amount of information here is that you will set Emotional Triggers by accessing a pure state of mind. After you accomplish this you will use the ABSAIL formula to link it all to an action that is carried out by the person you are working with. This is just as it states. Finally the fourth step in creating an Emotional Trigger is to associate the State to the Emotional Trigger. Think about if you were to always use your hypnotic tone with people who are conditioned to go into trance when they hear it. It is important to also remember that setting and creating Emotional Triggers in people is a powerful action and will be one of the key elements in the basis of your hypnosis. The stronger your subject’s state the easier it will be to not only set the trigger but also to activate that trigger to access the state again later. At the height of their emotional experience you will set off the trigger you have chosen. if it is your voice use that voice. The third step in creating Emotional Triggers is to intensify the State. These should be used to bring to light positive changes in a person and because these triggers are set accidentally around you and possibly by you everyday it is important to become aware to only do it when the time is right. you will be attaching the clean state of mind to the emotional trigger you want it associated with.This is why you must develop several different voices. you must produce the cleanest. It can produce dangerous situations for you and your subjects. Remember that your tone of voice is important and will often work alone with those you have been in hypnosis with before. clearest and most pure state of mind possible in order to get the best result in setting your trigger. this attaches that state to that trigger meaning whenever you want to access that set of emotions in a person you will use that trigger to do so. this is done simply by firing the trigger. This way it is easy for you to fire the trigger later with little to no extra effort. At this point we should add that it is important to really polish your skills so that you are aware that you are only setting triggers and inducing hypnotic states when the outcome will have a positive effect. Your speaking voice must have a different tonality than your normal speaking voice otherwise you could send people into trance at inappropriate times. Hypnotic states should only be accessed when the person is in a situation where they are not consciously concentrating on any other thing. It is also important to remember that the trigger you set should be something you can use within the context of a normal conversation.

The concept behind revivification itself is to bring an experience to life for the person having it. this is simply done through repetition. your trigger was successfully set. After you have set your trigger you will want to test it to be sure it was set correctly and accessing the correct emotional state. meaning you see the signals that show you they have re-entered that state. However it is equally important to make sure it is a pure state. This is done by breaking the state the person is currently in and re-firing the trigger. The listener needs to be able to experience the memory fully in order to access a completely pure state of mind. if at all. Always keep in mind that the more powerful the state is the easier the trigger will set. If you are asking them to relax they will think of times and places where they felt this way. How to Access States in Hypnosis Using Revivification Conversational Hypnosis is a type of hypnosis where it is very important to access certain states of mind in order to set triggers to change lives for the better. If you can keep this in mind and access a clear state of mind before setting those triggers it will aid in the process of accessing states with revivification as well. You will have conflict in placing your suggestions and triggers if the state of the listener is not just in the mode of relaxation. In order to do this you must learn and know how to access those states to start the trigger process with a clean and pure state of mind. This can cause problems in accomplishing the changes you want to achieve throughout the course of hypnosis.It may be possible that with some subjects you will need to repeat or condition the trigger. The main thing from previous articles you will want to remember as you learn to use revivification is that you need to know how to change the whole mood of a person before setting your emotional trigger. You will remember these signs from the Signal Recognitions System we reviewed earlier in these articles. then observe. Accessing the state of mind you want is important. Access State Principal plays a huge role in this process. When people access emotions they are really going back through their files of memories to re-experience memories that correlate with the emotion you are asking them to bring to mind. If your listener is experiencing relaxation along with anxiety it will cause the same combination of feelings when you set off the trigger again in the future. This means you will be using and developing . This is because the clarity of the state of mind a person is in when the trigger is set will determine how well the trigger is going to work. If the person re-enters the same state.

We all must experience the actual answer before our minds compute how to answer a question. . When you ask questions of the people around you. After you have told a story and you are now in the same state of mind you wish your listener to be in you prompt or ask them of a time when they felt that way. You want to do this in the exact same way they said it to you. This will cause the person to really get deeper into the experience and in turn give you a much more quality answer. When you ask a question make it sound like the answer is extremely important to you. and repeat it back to them. By ‘going first’ your physiology will change. You see when you ask a question of someone they are required to reexperience the situations where they felt the way in which you are asking about. your body will sub-communicate that emotion on an unconscious level through tone. ‘Going first’ in this situation means that you will first tell as story of your own that would get you into the same emotional state you are trying to get your subject into. Revivification will run more smoothly if you apply the principal of ‘going first’. especially when using revivification you want to make each question sound meaningful. In your practice as a hypnotist you will be asking questions of the people in your care. these questions will be the start of a journey through their experiences in order to answer each one. The first state inducing method (and the only one we will focus on in this article) is the revivification process. movements and gestures. When you repeat the same words back using the same tones and such it will help your listener to access the memory and experience it more fully. In turn the person you are talking to will unconsciously pick up on those signals and start to be open to accessing that emotion as well. The next step in revivification questions is to listen closely to the answer the person is giving. This is a process of accessing a state is by asking revivification questions. These questions are used to give direction to your subject while they are attempting to emerge themselves fully in a particular emotional state. meaning they will not be interested in reliving an emotion for you. If you sound bored or uninterested the person you are working with will be more likely to reserve their answers. The reason for doing this is people will use words that are what we call trigger words. these words are important to them. lean and emphasis on the words they used. body language. Use the same tone. You can use different tonalities and language suggestions to make this happen.different skills in this process that will make the experience as real as possible for your subjects. If you want the person to feel happy you would tell a story of a thing that happened or a time when you were completely happy.

focus. to really get involved within the mind.As you are doing this you will notice that you are going to be able to create a kind of feedback loop. All these improvements will help in changing the way a person feels which will impact changes in their behaviors as well. In this concept it is important to know how to change your own mood as well as the moods of the people you are working with. As you use the process of revivification remember that part of the goal is to make the experience as real as possible through the language and stories each of you are telling. It is important to understand how the mind works when accessing emotions set off from different moods. listen for the sensory information they are giving. Each time you complete the loop you will be allowing the subjects to dive deeper and deeper into the state of mind you are accessing. without changing the mind you cannot access those different feelings. This is a powerful scenario and will be a great help in accessing pure clean states of mind How to Use Sensory Descriptions to Access States in Hypnosis Sensory descriptions are the next skill for you to build in accessing state in hypnosis. Every time you change your mood the path of the mind follows. When you change your mind you have the keys to different rooms in your mind with different feelings. repeat the answer back to them exactly as they have said it and then start again. Sensory rich descriptions will help you in accessing the states you are seeking. solve problems and be generally inspired by things. As you do this you will also want to be sure to create smooth transitions between the words and ideas you’re using for the listener to focusing on. experiences and emotions. experiences and emotions. Before we jump into the ways in which you do this we should talk a little about the Access State Principal. then ask them to give an example of the same emotion. Sensory rich descriptions are a way of using your language to appeal to all the senses of another person. The general idea behind sensory rich descriptions is that you are going to be kicking the imagination into high gear. As you develop your skill in unlocking the different states of mind you will see a positive change in the abilities of your subjects to perform. In Access State Principal you are learning to change your mood which will in turn change the information you have access to. This should bring the word picture to life and really activate the person’s imagination. The effects of your words will describe a vivid picture that will recreate within their mind exactly what you are talking about. . You want them to use all their senses in this state inducing method. In this loop you will give a story to go first.

Also be sure to include kinesthetic sensations. Really paint the picture as if they were actually going through the motions of it. The best way to start is for you to do so in ‘going first’. including descriptions of colors. . The final secret to this method of accessing states is to keep an even and flowing language from one idea to the next. pitches and rhythms. Remember to utilize your language in a way that creates very smooth transitions so as not to disturb the flowing pictures in the person’s mind. scenes. Describe all the things they would be hearing. This will be easier to do the more a person is in trance. The more entranced the person is the better they will follow your story line no matter what the story or idea is. How to Intensify States in Hypnosis The state of mind in Conversational Hypnosis is really at the forefront of the battle you are beginning. How does the sand feel on your feet? Did someone brush against your arm as they passed? These are just as important in bringing a story to life as the other senses. animals.There are several secrets in doing this and the first is to be sure to include descriptions of all the sense they would be experiencing within the context. The second secret in using sensory descriptions is to really get the person to imagine the scene. These would include not only feelings and emotions but also the physical feel of touch. The less of a trance state you have the easier it is to get distracted by uneven language or lack of smoothness in flow. This is what will truly bring a picture in the mind to life for your listener. objects and distances. Describe the things they will see. When you take the time to imagine what you want the listener to see it will make it much easier for you to describe in a way they can visually imagine it. conversations of others. For example you will want to include the sound of water. These are the feelings and emotions all the other subjects would cause or stir up inside of them. These details should involve all the senses and use the best possible descriptions you can. In order to have a positive outcome from your hypnosis you must get the person you are working with to access a pure and clear state of mind that involves the emotion you are targeting to react to an emotional trigger. So in review of accessing states through sensory rich descriptions you will want to always remember to ‘go first’. As you do this you will want to create distinct definitions of what you are seeing with specific details. The better the trance the more abstract you can make your ideas.

To start with you can use intensification in the change moods not mind concept. This is important to know simply so you are aware that getting in and out of good clean states may take practice for some people. There are basically four techniques to make a response more intense. how do you work on intensifying the state of a person in order to help in hypnosis? One of the first ways is to intensify the response you are getting from your subjects. experiences. These concepts can be used together or separately and it is important to know how to use your basic hypnosis knowledge before wading into these four concepts. Some of the skills you will want to be practiced at before hand are first to realize that some people have a much easier time getting into states than others. . States of mind are similar to different rooms in a house. So let’s get down to it. The more intense you make the mood they are experiencing the more dramatically they will change their course of thinking. In each room you keep certain stuff and you are only able to access that stuff when you are in that room. Now intensifying the state of mind comes in as a big help because the more clear your subjects state of mind is the more efficiently your triggers will be implanted. The more you can amplify and intensify the state of a person the more powerful your suggestions will end up being. Different states of mind will allow you to access the different memories. If you do not have a pure and clear state of mind you will have limited access to the stuff you need for that experience. This is helpful because the reason for changing moods in the first place is because it allows the mind to follow without interference of the critical filters. There are several different reasons why you would want to intensify the state of your listener. The mind works much in the same way. It will also greatly improve your abilities as a hypnotist.One of the ways to do this is to intensify the state you are using in each different session. This alone is a reason for needing to know how to intensify a state and is a big step when getting a person into a different state of mind. As we all know by now the emotional trigger is a very important step to accomplish as it will eventually lead to the changes the person wants to make in their life. Intensifying the state of mind for your subject is really going to help them in many different areas of their hypnosis. feelings and definitions that are associated with that state. It is important to know how to intensify this response in order to be accessing a state that is strong enough for you to spend time setting an emotional trigger to.

hot words. together to make a direct request to intensify a feeling. You can put all these things. Keep in mind you are not going to be telling them what experience to have this will take place as a result of you telling them to intensify a feeling. the first is to start with all the different emotions your listener has in the experience and start to set triggers to each one individually. The more they notice and pay attention to the feeling you wish to make more intense the more this will take place unconsciously. This is very easy. This is a simple suggestion that can be done very directly or less directly and smooth depending on the person you are working with. a much simpler way. This can be done with many different principals you have learned including the piggy backing of suggestions. You need to make it your responsibility to have their complete attention locked in to access a clear state. linguistic bridges and trance words. After that you will ask your listener to relay a similar experience. one right on top of the other. Then as you hit the climax of the story set a trigger. In this example you have doubled the emotional impact of that trigger as there are now two different experiences associated with it. The second way to add intensity to your hypnosis is to layer emotional triggers. you will be taking the intensity level to a new high for your listener. By laying different emotional triggers. Another way to do this.Another tool you will need to be working well with is the absorption of attention. The first way to do this is a simple concept of direct suggestion. you simply suggest directly that they intensify an emotion. Now you are ready to get into how to intensify a state. is to layer your emotional triggers to access different experiences each of the same state. This may sound complicated but it is really quite simple. tell a story that involves the state you are wanting to access. Think about the power this can have if you continue the loop five or six times. The more attention you have from them the better they will be able to access the state you are looking for. you will then revivify it for them and as they enter the experience of revivification you will set your trigger again. After you have done that you can combine them all into one trigger and you will end up with a nice array of positive states being set off by one trigger. Start by going first. That in turn means you will be able to set a more proficient trigger. ideas. After all there is no need to intensify a state that will not be useful and the better the state the more useful it will be to you and your subject. Two ways to do this. .

Now go forth and be intense! The ABSAIL Formula for Influences in Hypnosis So you are very aware by now that the purpose in being a hypnotist. experiment with it and see how you can intensify things with the non-verbal actions listed above. directly tell them to do it with detailed instruction or combine the amplifications into your story as if they were a part of the story itself. taste. sharper. at least in Conversational Hypnosis. Use statements that imply or ask them to make things more focused. The A stands for Absorbed Attention. One of the key formulas in learning hypnosis that will help you reach these goals is the ABSAIL formula. . brighter. These are nonverbal ways to intensify and experience. this helps as it creates the sense for you and you begin to go first as you tell the story. In this technique you can use gestures to assist you in getting the point across. smells. The idea here is to be sure to build up every sensation and sense that is in the experience. healthier and more fulfilling lives. and more vibrant. and is the first stage in this formula as well. These changes should lead people to lead happier. You can use this skill with any of the senses. In this concept you will take hold of all the senses in the stories and amplify them to make them more real. The first two steps you will be familiar with as they are taken straight from the 4 Stage Protocol in learning hypnosis. All these things will give you the skills in how to make a thing more intense. Each letter in ABSAIL signifies a step in the somewhat challenging process of persuasion. sight and emotions. There are two ways to accomplish this. Make sure to keep in mind that these are powerful ways to access states and be positive when you are working with them as they intensify emotions as well. They use things such as tone. The ABSAIL formula is a simple set of words that will help guide you in creating behavioral changes for the people you are working with. Like we said this from the 4 Stage Protocol. body language and facial expressions to imply a suggestion. This is simply the concept of focusing your subject’s attention. The final technique for increasing intensity is to control the inner pictures the listener receives. bigger. is to create changes in behaviors. These include sounds. physical touches. Tone is a big one here as you change the tonality you use it will send signals to intensify an experience. gesture.The third technique for adding intensity is to use modular enhancers. louder.

This needs to be done to the point of all their thoughts being focused on you and the states you are inducing. All their thoughts, ideas and emotions should be following along the parameters you are setting with in the conversation you are having with them. Draw them into you and fill their senses with what you are saying. Make sure that you ‘go first’ so as to provide information they can adequately follow along as you are subcommunicating the experiences you want them to focus on. The B in ABSAIL stands for the second stage in the 4 Stage Protocol, and that is to bypass the critical factor. Now this is imperative, because before they can begin to respond to you unconsciously their critical factor must be asleep. Critical factor is the mechanism inside our heads that makes conflict with information. It criticizes and analyzes all the information that consciously flows through our minds. Critical factor must be bypassed in order for you to be able to access a hypnotic trance. If this is not done then you will not be able to successfully place suggestions within the minds of the people around you. S in this formula is where we start to veer away from the 4 Stage Protocol. S stands for State change. This is an important part of your objective because you need to access different states within the mind in order to sow the seeds of suggestion in the right places. If you have no way to help your clients change their state of mind then you will not be able to advance in the session. State change will happen when you change the mood of a person. You change moods not minds, remember. So as you change the moods of your listener you will have more freedom in establishing the state you would like them to enter. A and I in ABSAIL are paired to stand for augmentation and intensify. In the idea of augmentation you are simply trying to expand the state of mind. Make it encompass more of the emotion and experience your subject is having. Intensity can also be augmented and made greater. However the actual definition of intensify is to increase the amount of feeling behind the story, feeling or emotion; that is why these two go together so nicely. After you have augmented the state you want to intensify it as well. You also want to intensify the responses you are getting from your subject. By intensifying these things you are making the experience more real for them. You are creating a vivid picture that they can lose themselves in. The greater the intensity of the state the better and quicker you can set an emotional trigger, making this an important step in this formula and in hypnosis. That leaves us with the L. The L in ABSAIL is to Link to Action. There is a choice in this step you can either set a trigger or go directly to the linking to action. This happens after you have ignited the neurology within the brain and it is aglow with the action of

the experience you are creating for your subject. You simply take the emotion that they are filled with and link it to the action you want them to take. Now that you have all the components of the ABSAIL Formula it would be nice if you could picture it in action. The best, and most common, example of ABSAIL we see everyday in the form of advertisements. Advertisements take you through every step of ABSAIL in approximately 30 seconds to a minute. Ads are a prime example of this in that they begin by absorbing our attention and then move into bypassing the critical factor simply because they are usually uninteresting at the start. After that they change state and add intensity by teasing you with the things you most desire. Usually there are fast cars, beautiful women and glamorous lifestyles in advertisements. They heighten the intensity by showing you what you want to see, what many would like to have. Then they simply link their product to the action that is taking place with in the ad. It is important to learn the ABSAIL Formula as it will be a foundation for you to check yourself against when you are using conversational hypnosis. These steps are easy to remember and designed to offer you success in the field of hypnosis. As you build on each one of these skills you will learn to set the conditions up in just the right ways to access states properly. Usually this is done with ASP in mind. As well as combining them with the other techniques you have been learning throughout. These are all skill that can be used together to create a powerful and impacting change to better a persons life. These techniques will assist in a successful point of action where your subject takes the reigns and learns to have a more fulfilling life because of their work with you How to Use Precision Language in Hypnosis Conversational Hypnosis is an art that is mostly made up of language and the ways in which you can use that language in order to impact lives in a positive manner. Precision language is a type of language that will help to create a series of conversational events in order to drive that impact home. Precision language is really a language that is made up of words that have a greater impression on people. The impact that these words create will leave your listeners working to build a stronger state of mind. Precision language is made up of words that not only bring out the emotion in people they tend to induce trance themselves at times. Precision words can do many things for your listener. They can be used to build anticipations, accelerate the action in an idea, as

well as build softer language frames. (Building a softer language frame will make your suggestions and instruction of action more acceptable to the listener.) The first skill that you will focus on in Precision language skills will be the ability to build a vocabulary of and use hot words in context. ‘Hot words’ are words that have a universal meaning to them that have been created from society and culture. They are words that are heavy with emotion and work to send a strong bold message that peaks interest and or curiosity. The opposite of hot words is called neutral content language and this is what doctors use to communicate with patients. This blander language helps them to create emotional distance between themselves and their patients. This is not the type of language you want to use. As a hypnotist you are walking on a path which is laden with emotional attachment. Attachment to stories, feelings and the betterment of life for those around you, to not get emotionally involved at some level would be a disservice to your patients. At the same level of the way doctors speak most people have found a way to speak differently as well. Many speak in tones and words that are emotionally disengaging. This is a type of self protection from others reactions to what they may have to say. At times it is referred to saying what is politically correct, however politically correct and emotionally disengaging are not quite the same. A hot word is a word that creates a powerful response and that is what you will need in this profession. They are also considered to be the vocabulary of the unconscious because they evoke emotion within people and this is the real domain of the unconscious mind. Remember that anytime you have an emotional response you are also having an unconscious response, this can be used in a hypnotic way to your advantage. Hot words play a large role of importance in Conversational Hypnosis. This is because these words can change state of mind and move people dramatically. There are so many hot words that are hanging around us everyday that it would be impossible to list them all for you. But there are places that you can specifically find them. These are out of the mouths of politicians, teachers that move you to learn, motivational speakers as well as (believe it or not) the headlines of tabloids. Some examples of hot words that are used everyday that you probably hear are baby, murder, drug addict, and so on and so forth. Any word that evokes a strong emotion with it’s meaning on a societal level. This means it must have a strong impact on the majority of people that hear it. If you are the only one who finds a word emotionally moving that may be a personal trance word for you (we will discuss these later). A great way to use hot words is to put two or more together and create contrast with them. An example of this would be if you saw a headline on the paper that read, “A

Mother’s Secret Life as a Baby Murderer”. This is a headline that is just exploding with hot words. Most of the words in the headline have an emotional meaning attached to them; mother, secret, life, baby and murderer are all important words to most people. Setting them next to one another makes the impact of them even stronger because are not used to seeing these words together and although the statement makes sense it seems unbelievable to us. A mother is supposed to have unconditional love for her children and children in general. A murderer is viewed as a part of societies wretched. Secret is always a great connector as it draws in people with curiosity; we are conditioned to want to know all the secrets we can. The bottom line is using these words together creates a very strong and powerful impact, it brings up emotions inside people. Maybe it makes them angry or sad, whatever the emotion is it is there because of the impact the hot words have created in the statement. Now hopefully you won’t be making statements like this to your subjects but words and how you use them will be pivotal in your hypnosis. It is important to have a wide vocabulary of hot words so you have a wide range of emotion evoking language to use with different people in different environments. As you discover and build your hot word vocabulary start to use them in your everyday conversations and see the different ways people react compared to the way you are used to speaking. Even though you are not using them in hypnosis yet doesn’t mean you can’t study the effect they have on people in casual conversation How to Use Hypnotic Words to Double the Impact of Your Hypnosis Session Hypnotic words are another element of the Precision Language that you will want to work to develop in order to improve your Conversational Hypnosis. Hypnotic words are another type of hot word that are specifically designed to cause a person to begin to enter a trance or altered state of mind. Hypnotic words can also be used in any stage of the 4 Stage Protocol. As you will see these are words that can be used in absorbing attention, bypassing critical factors, creating unconscious responses and using unconscious responses. These words can also be used to elegantly recreate experiences, express ideas in a hypnotic way and will create a smooth language for you to engage in your conversations. So how do the hypnotic words work to engage a mini-trance or beginnings of an altered state of mind? When you use a hypnotic word in conversation with a person they are required to access the experience that goes with the word you have said, at least to some degree. Their

This can be done repeatedly and will create an enormous impact in your hypnosis. any word that has the same meaning or connotation as these words will more than likely fall into the category of a hypnotic word. however this is no guarantee. Just the very meaning of the word implies that you will be bypassing any rational thought about the word or idea that is attached to it. focus and mesmerized. These conversations will be memorable and easy to trigger for your subjects if the environment is right. . It is imperative as a conversational hypnotist that you build a strong library of these words to have and use as you need them. Hypnotic words are words that are closely related and extremely important to hypnotic ideas. Hypnotic words are similar to words like fixation. Since the meanings of words are the emotion we incorporate with them the meaning of this word itself will simply slip a suggestion right past the critical factor and into the unconscious mind. After they do this they can put the word and it’s meaning into the context of the statements you are making. However if you take the time to practice the words and add them into inductions they will become very powerful in capturing the themes of your conversation. as you will find that many of the hypnotic words will fit well into the first stage. You will also easily be able to use hypnotic words in bypassing the critical factor and activating unconscious responses. The repetition that is created will give a variety of experiences and emotions to access while still using the hypnotic words to induce trances. This is a powerful way to layer hypnotic words.brain will unconsciously do this in order to really define the word you used. curiosity. As you are learning to use hypnotic words you will find that you can use them in layers like many of the other concepts we have discussed. However other words such as fixation or attention can be used in many different instances and stories for intensification purposes. For example if you use the word ‘tired’ the person you are talking to will take that word out of the statements you made and access the emotion or feeling that defines for them. This is the only way they will really understand it the meaning it has for them. These are words that imply a fixation of attention and will always activate the neurology inside a person to begin a kind of trance response. It is true. When a hypnotic word is used alone there is a possibility that it will start the process of inducing a trance. The more you can get used to using hypnotic words in different instances the more opportunities your subject will have to access the experiences you are taking them into. Spontaneous is a great word to use in bypassing the critical factor. There are many hypnotic words to choose from that will fit into the contexts of all the stages of the 4 Stage Protocol.

whether at the movie theatre or on your television at home. You will do this next by learning about hypnotic themes. But now that we have a list of words. many hypnotic themes. There are many. which are specifically designed to induce the beginnings of trance we need to. Instead there is only a picture playing out in your mind. As you are engulfed in the movie’s action you are eventually so absorbed that the very activities around you go unnoticed. another example would be if you are a person who enjoys reading. there are many words that you will find that will do the same type of thing with all the different stages of protocol. They will help you very much in your ability to induce states and trances for the end effect of life change for the better. so now you have taken care of two steps in one with simply using one hypnotic word! This is of course only one example. Often you will lose track of time and continue reading because the story line is too captivating to put down. How to Use Hypnotic Themes & Personal Trance Words in Your Hypnotic Sessions When really getting at the heart of Conversational Hypnosis we not only need to talk about the words we use in language but how we actually put those words together. The idea or activity in the themes is loaded with hypnotic characters and as I give you some examples you will see what I mean. You see and are confronted by them everyday probably without even noticing it. Now the two examples I just gave you are common everyday samples of how a hypnotic theme happens. and nothing happens around you except what the characters in your book are doing and saying. feels and looks like. they are stronger. This is an example of a hypnotic theme. Hypnotic themes are by nature the big brothers of hypnotic words. As you sit down with your book you usually end up so wrapped up in the story line that you don’t even notice that you are actually reading words. bigger and more powerful. A hypnotic theme takes the hypnotic words we have been working with and puts them together into a new context. These are activities that are loaded with the . broaden your horizon. They will be a wonderful tool throughout your Conversational Hypnosis training and profession. You are feeling the emotions they are feeling and closely following their story as if it were your own life being played out for the world to see. hypnotic words. You are too busy experiencing within yourself the lives of the characters you are watching. A hypnotic theme that is very common is when you sit down to watch a movie. Hypnotic words are great tool for you to build on. It is important that you put these words into a list and keep them handy as you will no doubt be using them on a regular basis.The word spontaneous also creates an unconscious response in itself.

you may notice the eyes slightly more dilated and glazed over. adding it to your file of the way things feel. This is because the signal recognitions systems you have learned about will be present even in this sort of trance. Hypnotic themes are a very powerful way of conveying a story and engaging people in only what you are saying. Your attention is completely absorbed and the critical factor is bypassed mainly because you believe it is a story. sound and the way they affect you. They will be very helpful in creating a positive environment for other Conversational Hypnosis skills. As you begin to use hypnotic themes in your practice you will be giving rich and deep descriptions of things. but that is because they are simply themes and not the whole process of hypnosis. However. Reading books and watching movies are both experiences that will be categorized in the hypnotic themes section of life. The more you speak in hypnotic themes the more your listener will become engaged in what you are saying. It usually isn’t going to be the type of trance where a person falls on there face because they are so hypnotized but it is defiantly an altered state of mind. The more you focus in on these things in your stories the more focused and interested your listener will become in your words. You are also putting the uncommon response into action. We usually don’t view them this way and no one expects them to change your life for the better.hypnotic concepts found in the 4 Stage Protocol. They will be lost to your conversation much like they are pulled into a book or movie. They are very powerful and can have a dramatic impact on the lives of those around you. Another skill that we need to discuss is that of personal trance words. Look for these signals the next time you are in a deep conversation or telling a good story to a friend and you will see that you are probably inducing these everyday without even being aware of it. This in itself is the activation of a trance. you are taking in the experience you are watching or reading about and making it your own. The activity is also getting an unconscious response from you in that it is evoking emotions. look. and a difference in their breathing. sometimes strong emotion if you can identify with the characters and sometimes just the sharing of the experience. They will seem awake with their eyes open and they will respond to your words with slight nods of the head. an occasional word of agreement or facial expressions. These are again related to hypnotic words but they are different in that they are words important to the . Their neurology and the related matters within them will begin to activate and start buzzing them with excitement about what will be happening next. therefore needs no or little analysis. ideas and activities.

People will find their personal trance words without even knowing it and they will use them over and over again. one that most people understand in a broad sense within the culture. It is most often easily used in the 4 Stage Protocol and can be used with almost any concept here as you are learning Conversational Hypnosis. Now there are both positive and negative personal trance words and as you work with people you will begin to pick up on these. Language is the number one tool you will be working with. Then when you use the word or repeat it back to them you need to do it as closely to how they say the word as possible. When you are in a session with a subject and you are using personal trance words you will not have the same trigger effect if you simply state the word. The bottom line is personal trance words are unique to the individual my personal trance words will likely be different than yours and they will have a special meaning or significance to each person as well. You must pay attention to the mannerisms.person. tonality. Action accelerators are words that will create that need with in the unconscious mind. rhythm and general way they express the word to be effective. Hypnotic words have a universal meaning to them. Precision language is going to work with the other elements of language you have been studying. you want a positive experience. Action accelerating words are one of the new tools that will help you to create a new twist on how to add impact to your language. Now you must learn new ways to manipulate and form those thoughts. emphasis. . ideas and suggestions so they serve the purpose you are looking for. When you learn and study language in a way that teaches you to manipulate it to get across exactly what you want when you want to you will be a far better hypnotist than if you were to neglect this skill. Use Language with Precision in Hypnosis Using language with precision is going to be a key factor in your abilities as a hypnotist. Each time they use the words they will lean on them in the same ways. ideas and suggestions to the person you are working with. As humans it is in our nature to want things as quickly and efficiently as possible. Personal trance words on the other hand are words that people will lean on unconsciously because they are words that are defining to them. using the same tone. This will give you the greatest effect and will allow you to use these words in your language to your advantage. These words become natural triggers for the people that they belong to. It is the vehicles that will take your thoughts. body language and even the same facial expressions. For your purposes in hypnosis you will want to use only the positive personal trance words as you interact with your subjects.

These are a great component to combine with action accelerators once you learn how to use them together. keep anticipation acceleration in mind and sooner or later you will be able to recognize them in others conversations. This is basically done by frustrating the response. They give off the feeling that response is needed immediately in the moment. now. You know you will get it later but you want it NOW. and eventually you will have a good start on this vocabulary. Because they are so powerful it is also important to consider that there are times when they are appropriate and times when they are not. There is anticipation that naturally and unconsciously starts to build within you simply because you cannot have it right now. These words create a pressure for the listener to respond immediately and unconsciously. Some good examples of how actions accelerators work and sound are the words. So what words do you use to build anticipation with in other people? Words that give a perception of time. the desire to have it will grow stronger and stronger the longer you must wait. In this alone action accelerators are very unconsciously powerful. This is determined by the context of the situation. If you are feeling hurried in your response you will often bypass the critical factor out of the feeling of urgent need to meet the request. Until then. “Can I have it. When you frustrate a response you are basically adding intensity to it. the person themselves and the environment they are in mentally and physically. eventually we will get to them. fully. Any time you insert one of these words in a statement or question you will evoke the emotion of quick action. In a moment we will go over some examples of these words.Action accelerators are unconsciously connected within us to feel societal pressure to give a quick and complete answer to whatever the request or question may be. After the statement is made or the question is asked you are left with no time to second guess your decisions or statements. quickly and immediately. Finally. Another way to improve precision in your language is to use Anticipation builders. Think of something that is right in front of you but you cannot have it. Consider how much more you are likely to want something after someone tells you that you cannot have it. Think of a two year old and the way they often go on and on. even just a little. a little later we will gradually work them into some statements. how about now can I pleeeeeeease have it!” The more you say no the more determined they are to pester you until they get it. There is not hard core rule to tell you when it is ok to put this kind of pressure on a person. . As soon as this happens and you have frustrated the response. Anticipation builders are exactly as they sound they assist you in building anticipation within your listener. can I have it.

There is always the likelihood that a subject will not respond to a suggestion that you have given them. or holding you back from actually getting to the point. This includes and is related to softening language in that the impact will make your words and actions softer. "Close the window to keep the heat in. maybe some frustration too. This is the effect they are designed to have and there are many more words around that will do the same thing. As you use these words you will be building the anticipation up and adding power to that with your other language skills. Whether or not they actually do is really irrelevant. the important thing is the flow of conversation has not been interrupted by resistance and loss of rapport. You will notice these words have the ability of slowing you down. “You could imagine yourself in a boat on the water”. With language softeners you can make your commands sound much more like polite requests which they are much more apt to put action to.” Versus. maybe and could. especially those of high status. This is a great and powerful way to introduce new ideas or suggestions to a person while avoiding resistance. Once you have created all this mental frustration and momentum you will then use action accelerators to release the potential of your idea and there is so much activity going on unconsciously at this point that there will be very little critical factor available to analyze what you have said. do not like to hear commands and instruction from others. This is ultimately done by building a yes set of choices that are really instructions. you have them in action and a little anticipation should have been created for you. These are statements that are soft.Now you have some samples. they are also going to be true which is where the opportunity for resistance and loss of rapport are immediately defeated. These are another way of using precise language. When you ask people to do a thing internally like imagine or feel they may not respond and this can result in a loss of the rapport you worked so hard to build. The reason you will want to know and build a good vocabulary of these words is you can avoid antagonizing people. The opposite of the first two language skills here would most likely be Language Softeners. less expectant.” Other words that you can use to soften your language are perhaps. . Some people. You could say something to the effect of. They are words that are used to soften up commands or instruction and are usually placed at the beginning or middle of statements. “You might close the window to keep the heat in. There is no argument here because it is true that they could do it. The way to avoid this is to give your listener choices that are in all reality instructions. Finally there is a way to make the failure to respond to a suggestion seem irrelevant precision in language. They are also most likely found somewhere within the instruction.

Ambiguous words. It then narrows down the field and choose the definition that makes the most sense dependant on the context and circumstance of the statement. Right can refer to a position of an object or person. And as you become aware of them you will be able to create a bank of words that can be used in this manner. It is a casual word we use everyday whether we are putting on our right shoe or whether she was right to wait longer for the bus. Ambiguous messages are simply these words put into a context that will deliver a suggestion or message to the person you are speaking to. First let’s define these words and messages. The conscious mind will hear one message and the unconscious mind will be very busy deciphering and filing away the other possibilities. which have different meanings. This simple trick of using words with different meanings will give you a wide range of levels you can work with a person on. You will learn to embed them into suggestions so that what your conversation is based on may not be the actual message their unconscious is receiving. Ambiguous messages will do two very interesting and complicated things for you as a hypnotist. It will first require the conscious and unconscious minds a choice. . The ways in which words similar to the word ‘right’ work within our minds is important here.Always remember there are times when each language style is appropriate. There are a vast amount of words in the English language that will have several different meanings or definitions to them. It can also mean you were correct in answering a question. Even Milton Erickson knew this and practiced it. circumstance and context to know when the different languages are needed and will be most helpful. Different words will mean different things to people depending on where you are and the nature of the language. Before you can do this you must find the words. will be used in your practice as a hypnotist. Ambiguity in Hypnosis Ambiguous messages are a hypnotists dream when they are learned and practiced correctly. A good and common example of an ambiguous word is the word right. This applies here as there are times to be soft in direction and times to be much more direct. You will have to rely on your interpretation of the person. When you hear a statement with an ambiguous word in it the unconscious mind will extract that word in turn and analyze all the different connotations and meaning it can have for that particular person. As you will learn later you will be able to communicate on multiple planes with words that are ambiguous. know the different meanings and be able to use them in the correct contexts.

When learning to use ambiguous messages it is important that you pay attention to setting up the scene or context in which you are going to be using these words. If you really want to study this further. Using ambiguous words and messages are usually done in a story. They are not too hard to pick up on and will give you some further examples of how this is done and the effect it can have on people. not confining or alarming. You will think you are sending a specific hidden message and really they will get what may seem like nonsense to them.This alone will cause the second thing to happen which will be that you will begin to communicate on different levels and the listener will unconsciously be keeping up with multiple messages embedded into their meanings. These are comfortable words and ideas that the unconscious will begin to relate to the other meaning of space for them. Let’s say you are in sessions with someone for a fear of being in tight spaces. Ways you can prepare or set up the context for using ambiguous messages and words is to do some seeding of ideas to build up to the correct interpretations. especially having not practiced it. You will tell a story that can be completely off subject as long as the pre-seeded ambiguous word is involved you will be able to plant your suggestions. not alarming. The truth is this is a very sophisticated concept and understanding it can take time. If you tell a story about space and being in outer space. you can drop in lines that talk about how comfortable space was. who was very skilled at layering meanings of different levels into his plays. Another way for preparing is to embed the information in the person before you start in with your multiple meaning words. you can see this concept happening in many of the various plays by Shakespeare. or otherwise known as claustrophobia. It is however just the beginning of multiple layered effects. If you do not and the meanings are interpreted differently that you are expecting a completely messy situation can occur. maybe even serene. their meanings and how they can all occur simultaneously. Now don’t be alarmed it this all sounds very complicated and confusing to you. The Language of Confusion in Hypnosis . and peaceful. The unconscious will pick up on the idea that space is okay. quiet and dark yet peaceful. the idea of claustrophobia and a fear of tight spaces. comfortable. and you should. It is a common occurrence and just becoming aware of it will be a good step.

giving you the opportunity to send in the suggestion with little to no detection by the critical factor. each time using a different context for the word and doing it repeatedly will be a difficult task for the critical factor to sort out. His secret weapon in this was simply to confuse them.Now normally we don’t like to try to confuse people. Milton Erickson was a great hypnotist and one of the pieces of his profession he was most admired for was his ability to get the most stubborn and resistant people into a state of hypnosis. however the information from you will just keep coming. When you use this layering effect is sure to include double meanings as this is what really gets the confusion going. one right after the other. much like you learned to do with ambiguous messages. Let’s give an example in which you use the words ‘left’ and ‘right’ in your conversation. left and right. Layering the double meanings on top of one another. Just these two words. The first way to really concentrate the language of confusion is to layer it in. This allowed him to simply slip past the critical factor and induce a hypnotic trance in those who were very resistant. it gets all tied up. with all their different meanings and in all different contexts. after all that is the point of hypnosis in the first place. Confusion in Conversational Hypnosis is very powerful. How can confusion be used to create a positive outcome. confusion related to Conversational Hypnosis can be a fascinating and powerful tool as the master hypnotist Milton Erickson has shown us throughout history. As the conversation proceeds the meanings will start to get confused. The goal here is to get enough confusion going that the critical factor is completely overwhelmed and preoccupied. Your ability to confuse people will assist you in sneaking by the critical factor to insert your suggestions into the unconscious itself. The language of confusion with in the context of hypnosis will allow you to do things that would normally not be allowed due to the strict surveillance of the critical factor. Erickson’s secret weapon of confusion. So how exactly do you get past the critical factor with the language of confusion? Confusion will simply keep the critical factor busy trying to sort out all the different messages that it has received. . The unconscious at this point is like an open door just waiting for you to walk into. However. Your listener’s critical factor will want you to slow down so it can analyze it all. So let’s take a closer look at Mr. When you master the technique of confusion you will be able to bypass the critical factor easily and efficiently. Confuse them to the point that the critical factor within them is too busy trying to get unconfused and make sense of it all. When done purposefully it can seem in a way cruel.

Dealing with something that is non existent is more difficult than dealing with things you can see. For example. After you have accomplished . First your mind recognizes the subject. When your mind hears a statement about something you don’t have there is a process to go through in order to understand that statement. Another confusion pattern in called the double negation. mainly because most people never think about it. a negative does not exist. Keep in mind that the word and its meanings will need to fit into the context of what you are trying to get across to your listener. (the thing you don’t have) then it has to take it away realize what you are left with. In this technique the mind has difficulty because it does not like to deal with negatives. it does to a point but you will be surprised at how often this layering can still be done. you can use more but you should start with two and work up from there. This language of confusion can be used anytime you come across a word with multiple meanings.The quick smooth relay of all the different meanings of the same words used in different contexts will be very overwhelming to the critical factor. The confusion becomes so much that the critical factor will just give up at some point and let down its guard. “I don’t have a piece of gum that you can’t chew. “I don’t have a piece of gum that you can’t chew anymore than you can relax right now. Speaking with one negative comes so easily that unless you read this you may never know how hard your mind is working when it hears more than one negative in a statement. and touch. It seems that the need for adequate context would limit your abilities here. It is important to understand how hard the mind is working here. It is otherwise known as double negatives. The way the double negation confusion pattern works is to use two negatives in the same statement. How to Overload the Conscious Mind for Better Hypnosis Overloading the conscious mind is a task that is quite easily done.” After you have made a statement to a person with two or more negatives in it you will simply attach the suggestion to the end of it. So how double negations work is you make a statement with two or more negatives in it. Negatives are confusing because if you really stop to think about it. In Conversational Hypnosis you will be doing this in order to confuse the mind so the conscious aspect is overloaded with trying to figure out what you have said. hear.” Notice how you focused on figuring out whether or not I actually have a piece of gum for you? Statements with two or three negatives are generally confusing enough to the mind that the critical factor will too be busy dealing what you do an don’t have that the suggestion you attach to it will slip in unnoticed.

No matter what the subject or how it is being presented. facts or ideas you can rattle off in a conversation. This is why when you are having a conversation with a person about their car being in the shop and they start to give you a bunch of different facts about the car they drive. as is ‘The store is out of milk. the car their parents drive. If a person is able to keep track of the information they will more than likely be focusing on the wrong information which will still distract the critical factor and again allow your suggestion in anyway. The next language trick or confusion pattern you will use to overload the mind is called the spontaneous change of meaning. you want to really give them a lot of details to use this powerful concept to its full advantage. Your speaker was talking about his car being in the shop. whether it be fact. As you can see this is not a great number when you put it into the amount of items.that your suggestion will bypass the critical factor and move right into your mind without being noticed. When that happens you . This is done by the sudden and unexpected combining of two different statements. they make sense. “I’m going to the store is out of milk. This is a plus for you as a hypnotist because then you can attach a suggestion and it will flow right on in.’ This sudden change in how people are used to hearing things causes critical factor to stop for the confusion. just confusing enough that you have to stop and think about what I have just said. the people who drive them and the facts about them straight that you will miss the point of the conversation in the first place. and keep straight 5-9 items at one time. The idea behind overloading people with details is just that. the car Uncle Tom drives and the car Aunt Hilda drives you may get confused. You will so busy trying to keep the different cars.” In this statement the meaning at the beginning and end are fine. When you take two statements that end and begin with the same word you can mush them together to make one sentence that just doesn’t quiet add up. Five things are generally pretty easy for a person to remember and nine is beginning to become quite difficult. But somewhere in the middle things get a little confusing. For example. fiction or just random information. It is a fact that on average the conscious mind can concentrate. Overloading the mind with any information will cause the critical factor to either get distracted with unimportant information or shut down all together. If you take the statement apart you see that ‘I’m going to the store’ is quite average and normal.

Another way to incorporate spontaneous change of meaning into your Conversational Hypnosis is to introduce a suggestion in your conversation and then continue speaking as if it never happened. Shock and surprise will create their own type of trance induction. Yet another way to use this change of meaning is to avoid the ambiguity all together and just combine two statements that end and begin with the same word together. This again causes enough confusion for critical factor that it wants to stop to figure it out. any time you really shock or surprise someone you will automatically run over the critical factor and make it in. Again your suggestion gets in to the mind as it bypasses the confused critical factor. There is a caution in shock and surprise method. If you use this spontaneous change of meaning too often it can become annoying and overbearing. Some people do not like to be shocked and surprised so be sure you are picking and choosing wise times and the right people to use this technique on. Now the unconscious does pick up the suggestion and stores it away for future use. Becoming too confusing can be counterproductive in that your listeners will no longer have an interest in listening to you.can simply add your suggestion to the flow of conversation and it will again go in unnoticed. Also remember to use these when you need to. The key here is to make sure to add these statements casually into conversation otherwise they will be noticed and detected. which is true for most confusion language tactics. As you include more and more of these spontaneous changes the mind will not only pick up the conversation you are having aloud it will begin to recognize the pattern being created within through the hidden messages. These statements will make more sense and be a little less confusing but still distracting. which is perfect for a hypnotist. This is a fascinating concept. This is overridden by the fact that you are still talking and there is no time to go back to figure it out. not for every other statement. How to Use Embedded Suggestions in Hypnosis . Lastly we come to the language confusion concept of shock and surprise. Just by being shocked and surprised your conscious thinking will immediately overload and shut down leaving only the unconscious open to suggestion and ready to follow instruction.

He prepared a file of the uttering’s from the schizophrenic’s files and inserted his own embedded messages in place of theirs. Milton Erickson came up with was that some of the words buried deep with in the non sense were meaningful and made sense once connected. Erickson decided to conduct a study of his own using the reams of texts recorded verbatim with what the schizophrenic patients were saying. At the time Dr. Because this was only a theory it needed to be tested. many of which were themselves schizophrenics. This is a skill you will use over and over again to create suggestions that are unrecognizable to the conscious mind. Erickson insisted that she take dictation from him. The next time the secretary needed to lie down because of the pain in her head Dr. An embedded suggestion is nothing more than a suggestion that is often repeatedly buried in the context of a conversation of miscellaneous words and uttering’s. The idea was presented to him through rumor that the random things that schizophrenics would walk around saying and muttering really had some deeper meaning to them. The statements that contain the suggestion may vary in wording and meaning but the suggestion itself is focused on a particular aspect you and your subject will be working on together. The theory Dr. Erickson knew of a secretary in the office that suffered from severe migraines. This practice was first discovered somewhere between the late 1940’s and early 1950’s by the famous master hypnotherapist Dr. Dr. Usually the finished phrases included explanations of the patient’s conditions and asking for help. Erickson became aware of this rumor he happened to be working as a Doctor at the Worcester State Hospital with mentally disturbed inmates. As Dr.Embedded suggestions are an important aspect that will provide a very great amount of power within your Conversational Hypnosis practices. The doctor spent more time and found and recorded all these words and put them together to create what he thought were real attempts at communication. These undecipherable phrases were ways in which the afflicted were trying to communicate with whoever would listen. As he poured through the vast amount of different transcripts all of uttering’s that had been recorded word for word from schizophrenics he discovered something. when she got a migraine she would have to immediately go and lie down to deal with the pain. Upon realizing this theory Dr. Erickson deciphered the many uttering’s he found that there were actually messages embedded among the majority of non sense words and sounds. . Milton Erickson.

All of these will be useful in hypnosis depending on the person and subject matter you are dealing with. Such as shaking or nodding your head. There is not a person on earth who can speak in full sentences that has not at one point or another told a story. There is sufficient evidence of this from cave drawings to modern day books and the internet. ten minutes into the dictation her head was completely pain free. countless times. Erickson’s study. This happens because our unconscious minds have an extremely good ‘ear’ for ‘hearing’ or identifying and picking up patterns within life (including your conversations). This is a very powerful technique as it lets you speak directly to a person’s unconscious mind and instill the actions needed to get the responses you want. The stories you tell as a hypnotist will not be all princesses and castles. Stories can be true life like antidotes. So what Dr. some more complicated. There have been many studies since Dr. Embedding suggestions in your Conversational Hypnosis will likely be a fantastic skill. The idea of telling stories has been around as long as humans have. often and well as it will be one of the defining factors in a novice hypnotist and a master hypnotist. Erickson did was to prove that there was a way to get messages across hypnotically when embedded in a list of non sense. metaphors. The mind can pick out the patterns of the words that make sense and use those suggestions and respond to them.As he was a doctor she begrudgingly did so without putting up much of a fight. parables. Another example of how the unconscious mind picks up patterns in life is referred to as implicit knowledge. nor will they all even be fictional. or informational stories. Story telling is a broad range of things. no one ever taught them to you directly you just somehow know how to do them. These are things that are learned in the background instead of the conscious forefront of learning. Embedding suggestions works for many people at an unconscious level. similes. Implicit knowledge are those things you just seem to know. that also prove his theory stands the test of time. These are simply patterns that the unconscious mind has picked out of life and learned. jokes. She was amazed and Dr. facts. you know what it mean but you were never exactly instructed on how to do it or what it meant. Today this principal is known as unconscious priming in the psychological literature that circulates. especially in hypnosis. Her migraine was gone. Erickson had proven his theory within this study. They happen everyday. . Embedding suggestions is an art you should practice hard. Amazingly. The Power of Stories in Hypnosis Stories are a wonderful and powerful tool that you use often now and you will use often in the art of Conversational Hypnosis.

This is important as you put into the context of telling stories to improve your hypnosis. everyone like to hear a good story. After these two things are accomplished you are in a very powerful position. Emotion is the language of the unconscious and stories evoke emotion. You feel emotion for a story as simple as not being able to find the eggs at the super market. Because story telling is so pivotal in hypnosis. Practice with those you know. This new reality is not really defined and can blend realities together to confuse them. you can use a story to conjure a hypnotic effect in another person.You tell the mechanic about the funny noises your car is making. The story itself can really be on any topic as long as you are focused on inserting your suggestions. These are hypnotic themes that will help to draw your listener into a hypnotic state. To seed ideas in your stories be sure to embed suggestions within the story. There is no resistance to stories. You tell your child about sharing and your spouse about your day. a listener with no resistance and a story they will want to listen to. Trance themes that you can start out with are relaxation on vacation. you should really concentrate on getting experienced and good at it. These are all examples of stories that happen daily. Once you pass up the critical factor you have the ability to create identification with characters and the person you are conversing with. they are all powerful. You often find yourself identifying with the characters the speaker is talking about and experiencing their lives and emotions as if they were your own. being drawn into a movie or suspenseful ideas. They allow you to live in the character’s experience. This is why you feel emotion when we read particular stories. You should be aware to use trance themes within your stories as this will have a greater impact on your listener if they are coaxed into a trance. Now lets look at hypnotic stories. . You may identify with the story tellers frustration or dismay. You tell the grocery clerk about how frustrated you were trying to find the eggs. The other thing that stories do for you is to take your reality away and suspend it as you enter a new reality. Every story speaks directly to the unconscious mind. It is because you identify with the characters at some level. especially Conversational Hypnosis. how exactly do you tell a hypnotic story? The first thing a story does for you in the area of hypnosis is to seed ideas or set up a frame work of ideas that will lead your listener into experiences. All these stories also have something in common. Stories do several things in hypnosis first they bypass the critical factor. The critical factor recognizes a story and really pays no more attention to it simply because it is a story.

teaching and sales. This concept actually inserts the idea of the motions the person would be going through so they think they have experienced it even before it has actually happened. which is in essence your listener’s situation or problem. You can use stories as a way to embed suggestions. Stories have been around since the dawn of man. How to Structure a Hypnotic Story That Appeals to the Unconscious Mind Stories are a powerful and essential building block for Conversational Hypnosis.Isomorphic stories are another helpful skill set to keep in your library. and seed a strategy in the minds of others. emotional triggers and link these suggestions and triggers to a specific action or outcome. This is a technique that is used in many different areas including competitive sports. sometimes without even trying. When you tell a story you will incorporate hypnotic themes. This is the art of forming the unconscious mind to be aware of a thing before you actually tell it in the story. Really be cognizant of mirroring your listener and their situation in the story you are telling about other characters. They will also assist you in embedding suggestions. Competitive sportsmen talk about how they will win and this is responded to on some level of the unconscious. They will help you in bringing in hypnotic themes and plant processes in the minds of your subjects. Sales does this through testimonials of products. setting emotional triggers and producing productive positive outcomes. The same goes for teaching a teacher can plant the teachings in a form of pre-teach before they actually teach the lesson they want their students to learn. Telling a story. whether it is a hypnotic story or not. very powerful. Stories absorb your attention. they convince the customer that they will be happy with the product before they even purchase it. All the story telling skills and types we have covered are very. This type of story will send your listener away analyzing what has happened and eventually find their own meaning stemming from the story you have told. Finally the last aspect of story telling you will want to practice is that of priming the unconscious mind. they bypass critical factor simply because you recognize them as stories and they create unconscious responses in everyone. A sales man shows you want you will need to do for the paper work of buying your car before you actually fill it out. An isomorphic story will also offer a solution or plan of action to take about the problem or situation within the story. This goes back and relates to mirroring. All through history life has been documented with some type of story telling. These are stories that portray likeliness to the situation or person you are telling the story to. . is a way of bringing a person out of their own world and into an altered state of mind. accessing states.

You may think it was a bad story or you may think you heard a great story. The second rule for building a hypnotic story is that you must break that routine. From there you can build and add to the story as you feel necessary. There needs to be a character in the story that is changed. Whatever routine you found to begin your story with must be broken. Even the simplest stories are still recognized as stories because they follow a type of formula that you hear and think. Something needs to happen to affect the character you are changing that will produce an impact on that character as a result of an event. okay so that was a story. In this article we will build an example story together. The next rule to this formula for story building is to change someone. Stories are an important part of what you will be doing as a hypnotist. Hopefully you will be creating and telling great stories. . There needs to be an interruption in the action. Remember as you read this information that we are focusing on the telling of stories. All these aspects of story telling run right along the lines of the skills you will practice and master in hypnosis. What you will do as a hypnotist is tell stories in order to invoke change in the people around you. it does not matter as long as there is a routine placed at the beginning of your story. So the beginning routine of our story will be.” This is a routine that will start the story we are going to build here. Either way you are not able to deny that it was a story.Stories can help you to suspend reality as well as merge realities together. They can offer a quiet resemblance to your life and the situations and problems you find yourself experiencing. A simple set of instruction that will help you in creating the most basic principal of what a story is. “I was driving my car down the highway when I heard an unexpected noise coming from the back seat. “I was driving my car down the highway. there are different actions and ideas that need to take place. but it must contain these few instructions in order to fall into the category of a hypnotic story. something other than driving down the highway has happened. The first rule you must include in all your stories is to begin with a routine. this is much different than the writing of stories. This means they need to have some type of emotional effect. They are an art form and there is as much a method to good story telling as there is to hypnotic story telling. There are certain aspects that need to be involved to tell a hypnotic story. In order to get on your way to telling good stories there are parts of a story that you need to be consciously aware of. This can be a very simple routine or a complicated one. at least to some degree.” Here we have broken the routine.

I immediately pulled the car over and got out to see what the situation was. Stories and hypnosis go together very well and story telling will be a powerful and important part of your job. . Re-incorporation is when you add a seemingly meaningless detail to the beginning of the story and then reincorporate it at the end. Now there is a fourth and final rule to hypnotic story telling that you have the option of including or leaving out. create an unconscious response and put the unconscious response into action. This is called re-incorporation and it really pays off in the end. Now there are many ways to tell stories. As I looked in my rear view mirror I saw a small black dog. This is a way to usually add a riveting effect to your stories. I decided that I would have to postpone my plans to go out and take the little dog to the animal hospital. The stories you tell will be used to do many things you have already learned. Your listener will have no question about what you have just said and it will meet the expectations of a story for anyone who hears it. They can assist you in any of the steps in the 4 Stage Protocol. But these are the rules that will rest assured give you a good story frame. They will allow you to have a frame set in order to mirror the problems and experiences of the people around you so they can identify with the characters and put the solutions you suggest into action. A good hypnotic story will absorb attention. The little dog was bleeding and was in great need of medical attention.“I was driving my car down the highway when I heard an unexpected noise coming from the back seat. In your studies to become a great hypnotist it is important to really focus on your ability to tell a good story.” The part of my story where my character decides to take the dog to the hospital is where the change is taking place. she was holding her paw in an odd way. If you find one that works better for you and incorporates all that a story need then you should stick with what works for you. bypass critical factor. If you can follow all the rules of story telling you will come up with a story every time that will be recognizable as a story. If you can find a way to incorporate it into your stories you will be glad you did. the rest is up to you Insider Tricks: Polishing Your Hypnotic Stories Story telling is not only an age old process it is an important part of hypnosis. Stories will also give you a place to seed ideas and place suggestions. There is a clear decision made and an emotion is attached to it.

The second trick to telling hypnotic stories is to let the muck come out. morbid thinking. Stories are created by the unconscious so you need to free yourself here completely. There will be a certain amount of muck within you that will need to seep out in the beginning phases of your story telling. The fact is this is going to be unavoidable and you ultimately are not responsible for your stories. The first trick to this is don’t try to be good. In this context it only makes sense that you should be the best possible story teller you can be in to influence people in the best possible way. If you don’t get it out you will pollute the flow of your creativity and that is the first nono you were warned of in this article. Do not criticize yourself for the stories that evolve from this muck. Don’t be surprised when the muck comes. your creativity. What this means is that there is a set of rules that we have covered previously and you need to stick to those rules. dirty muck. One of the most important things you will need to remember to do this is to avoid at all costs the restriction of your unconscious. Since you have had a little experience it is time to start to polish up those stories and really make them shine.All of these things are just the tip of the iceberg in what good story telling can do for you in Conversational Hypnosis. just open your mouth and let the muck fly. Good story telling is in essence a win-win situation for you and your clients. . This muck is dirty. so just let the much flow. sexual perversions and all other types of socially unacceptable thoughts that we never discuss with other people. This may sound a little odd when the purpose of this article is to enhance your story telling abilities. This muck is made up of all the things you think of and ponder that are not socially acceptable to say in conversations with the people you interact with on a regular basis. This is a natural process that happens to all story tellers that are really great. If you stay with the rules instead of trying to be good you will tell stories that are good. It can be a combination of obscenities. Do not censor yourself in your story telling. The stories you tell will often be the backbone of your interactions with the very people you are trying to help to better their lives. Trying too hard to be good at telling a story can often times be self defeating in that you will diminish the natural flow of the story. Adopt the attitude that you don’t care what others think of your dirty. Don’t destroy your stories by trying too hard to make them the best stories ever heard. As you have been learning you have probably been practicing telling stories in some way or another. swearing. There are tricks that will help you to keep your creativity flowing and free.

Make sure to visualize it all so you are creating a reality for yourself and your listener. If you are telling a story and you set the scene as you are living in the ocean there are automatically going to be associations that go with that idea. You can probably tell I am now going to tell you to ‘go first’ for this trick. These associations are the things in the circle. all the future twists and turns in the story will already be laid out for you in the things that are associated with every thing that comes before it. In this you are conditioning your brain to grow new neurology and make new connections that will let the stories come naturally with practice. These are ways that will hold up your story telling and bring it to a stall. Remember that all the things in the circle are going to have associations as well. These things could include a submarine. The best way to illustrate this is to give you an example. Blocking is when you keep doing the same activities over and over again simply because you are afraid of moving on to the next idea in your story. This is an easy way to follow your own story. water. All the rest of the things that are not associated with the pieces of information you are giving need to be left out of your story. The fourth trick to story telling is to keep things inside ‘the circle’. The best way to become an exceptional story teller is to train your brain. These are all in the circle. semi trucks and camels. There is also a broader aspect to this circle of surroundings that the listener may not expect that can also be possible. boring. Things that will be around you will be fish. Just keep talking. A good insight to keep in mind with this is to avoid blocking or wimping out. sand and seaweed. Things that are not going to be in the circle are dogs. a body floating in the water and a pirate ship. When you are telling a story each piece of information you give will have natural associations attached to it.The third trick is going to be for you to visualize the scene. You are right it is important that you can not only visualize the scene but also put yourself into it. Finally the last trick to follow for story telling is to just keep talking. Now that we know the insider tricks to polishing your stories lets add a few insights to them to get the complete story on polishing your stories. This is a simple idea that is fairly easy to follow. You will always have subject matter in the associations with the elements you have previously told in the story so let it flow. . furniture.

There is no need to panic because you don’t know the rest of your story as you tell it. You should not be afraid to move on. Each next step is presented to you in the list of associations that spring from the previous step. Just in this you have already accessed an altered state of mind. Story telling gives you an insurmountable amount of power with in hypnosis. It allows you to implant emotional triggers. The final concept and second additional insight into story telling is to just take it one step at a time. How to Create Emotional Triggers with Hypnotic Stories Hypnotic stories are essential to your practice and profession as a Conversational Hypnotist. Story telling is a way for you to access states through the unconscious without triggering the critical factor as well as seeding ideas for future use to change lives. When you embark on telling a story your objective will be to get an emotional response from those around you. There is no need to know the whole story at any time in your story telling. Story telling has evolved since then and is now available for you to use in practices such as hypnosis. The art of telling stories is a time tested tradition that has been alive as long as humans have been alive. Remember that you have a preset story line provided by you unconscious and the association with the aspects of the already existing story. feelings and solve problems. Context of the story will play a .Wimping out is when you keep circling around the same idea repeatedly running in the same circle. tricks and insights and your stories will grow from your unconscious beautifully. The best thing to do is just stick to the rules. The unconscious is the house where your emotions dwell and when you create an unconscious response you are in effect creating an emotional response as well. Taking it one step at a time will be easier for you and your listener. It is a way to express many different types of situations. hence it is a very powerful tool for you to use in you quest as a hypnotist. which you learn more about later on in this article. If you are keeping it inside the circle you will have all the answers you need. You need only to look as far as cave drawings to know this is true. In this article you will learn how to create an emotional trigger with a hypnotic story. Hypnosis is a way of altering your experiences to become more responsive in a focused and calm mind. This will serve only to strengthen your story telling ability and assist in propelling you into new areas of the telling of stories. You want to revivify the experience for your listeners. really make them come alive in your ideas placed in the story. There is no real limit to the power behind a story. By following these insights and tricks and combining them with the rules for telling a story you will advance in this area powerfully.

Keeping in tune with your creativity and how to let it flow freely from your unconscious to create the story will be pivotal. Remember the things you have been learning as they will be valuable tools for this process. You need the experience to convey the emotions you wish to extract from those around you. As you use all these concepts in your building of stories you will be more apt and more able to let your unconscious mind freely create the story straight from the creative wells with in you. There are other aspects you have learned that you will want to work into this web of story telling as well. ideas and characters of your story real for yourself in turn your listener will have a better chance of tuning into that same picture. You will find that ‘going first’ to visualize the story will heighten the awareness of your listener. Soon you will have the capability to tell genuine stories that will also induce hypnosis and present hypnotic themes. In practicing your story telling you will be making up stories and telling true stories at the same time. You must access the correct contexts for the emotions you are trying to coax from the people around you. In fact you need to experience the emotions as well. All of these aspects along with keeping inside the circle and never stop talking will get your story telling to a new level. and see a response to that action. hypnotic themes and sensory rich language. In doing this you will sub-communicate the experiences that you want your listeners to have. The best way to do this is to ‘go first’. The story itself will set off emotional triggers and open the people around you to suggestion and change. All the tools still count in this type of story telling. precision language. In going first here you are not just going to be visualizing the story you need to really place yourself within the story in your mind. If you can make the events. You will be able to embed the suggestions you want your listeners to put into action. These include the hypnotic language.big part in this. When you start to combine all these aspects of hypnosis you will be actively creating emotional triggers within your stories. You will need to use the three rules of story telling as well as the re-incorporation of events. How the Master Storytellers’ Strategies can Help Hypnotists Master Hypnotic Stories . The more you create stories to tell the more your unconscious mind will relate those fictional stories to true events that have taken place in your own life.

Reciting stories word for word is one of the best ways to completely kill a story. The first strategy is to let your own stories ‘slip out’ naturally. The one thing you don’t want to do is to memorize your stories. The story telling tips and strategies in this article are straight from the horse’s mouth these are real techniques used by master story tellers and they will enrich the ways in which you practice and tell stories to those around you. their ideas and strategies will help you to excel far beyond the norm of story telling practices. This will happen more often the more used to telling stories you are and before you know it you will be telling stories that are completely taken from your own true experiences. They will evoke a response and stir emotions. As you do this you will be rehearsing the story so it will provide practice as well as a great library for you to access whenever you need it. Stories have been one of the secure rocks in the foundation of hypnosis. There will be stories that you tell that will become your favorites. This will also reinforce your ability to remember and revisit the stories that are perfect for situations you run across with the people you are helping. . Regardless of whether these stories are from your life. As you do this your own stories will begin to naturally flow. The second master story tellers’ strategy is to collect a storehouse of great stories. Your mind will start to relax as you get more accustomed to telling stories and you will begin to be reminded of the stories in your life that fit into the contexts that have been set. In this strategy you will begin to see that over time you will have trained your brain how to tell stories. The language and art of story telling is deeply embedded in the concepts and ways in which we use hypnosis. the lives of others or completely fictional it does not matter. These will be the stories that have a great impact on yourself and those around you. record the highlights of them so they are captured. They exhibit all the elements that you are taught to use and do so on an unconscious level that evades resistance. The strategies that you will learn here will still be encapsulated by all the things that stories help hypnotists do in their line of work. These are stories you should write down.Master story tellers are the best that you could possibly hope to learn from. let the little changes happen as long as the big things stay the same if it a truly great story already. As you tell stories you will remember events and times in your life that you will be moved to insert into the story you are telling.

all these things will re-excite your audience over and over again. If this is true then the next logical step in your education will be to refine and sharpen the trance induction skills you have been learning. a great Conversational Hypnotist that is. it will keep them coming back for more. again want they want and need to hear. Story tellers through out history have always had audiences that returned repeatedly to hear the same stories over and over again. Many of these skills you will be able to use in trance induction as you learn to broaden your horizons in this area. To do this you must take all the skills you have been learning and keep them as fresh in your mind as possible. Without this skill in sharp condition you will have a very difficult time improving the lives of those around you. . Once you determine how you need to tweak your story you will be telling the right story to the right person or people.The third story telling master’s strategy is to remember the highlights of each story. How to Become Great At Conversational Hypnosis One of the first parts of being a great Conversational Hypnotist is to have the ability to induce trance in another person. Finally the fourth master story teller’s strategy is to use your signal recognition systems. As long as your signal recognitions system is on and alert you will be able to tune change your stories in the ways that will fit your audience. tone of your voice and your linguistic skills. Use your hypnosis tools to help these ever changing details to unfold. This is all about watching and observing the signals that the listeners are giving to you about what they want to hear. Let changes take place in the rhythm and pace of the story. The skills and tips in this article will nearly guarantee you the ability to send you subject and those around you into hypnotic trances. small details change. The ability to alter the state of mind has been something you probably have been reading about and possibly practicing for some time now. For now you should focus on the basics of becoming great. Sometimes it would take hours to finish a story and other times the same tale could be told in mere minutes. what they need to hear. The reason your signal recognition system is so important here is because you will be looking for the unconscious signals that the story is right or wrong for the listener. This is because they never told the story in the same way. things like sensory rich descriptions. This concept is a time tested one that emphasizes that we should carry the highlights of a story with us but be negotiable in the other details. The 4 Stage Protocol along with a couple of secret tips will give you the important and basic specifics for inducing a hypnotic trance.

These are all skills you should already be familiar with and if you are not then a brief refresher may help before you carry on. As you have read before the critical factor is the filter of the conscious mind that criticizes and analyzes all the information being sent in from outside sources. This is simply getting any type of unconscious response from the person you are inducing. The 4 Stage Protocol is really the meat and potatoes of getting someone into a hypnotic trance. You will learn ways to do this as you go on to other articles. The first step is to Absorb Attention. This is important because without attaining the unconscious response you will have a difficult time leading it to a desired outcome. That result can be a thought process. being to Lead the Unconscious Response to a Desired Result. . blinking and so on. all you need to know now is you simply must be able to get a persons attention focused on you to bring them into an altered state of mind or hypnotic trance. which is to Activate an Unconscious Response. This brings you to the fourth and final stage in the 4 Stage Protocol. The second stage in the 4 Stage Protocol is a very important one. Without the attention of your listener you will not be able to continue in the area of inducing a trance. The method you use largely depends on the person and circumstance you are in. When you recognize the different signals or unconscious responses you must take them and lead them into your desired result. A change in breathing. This set of rules or concepts contain all you need in order to create hypnotic trance in another person. Your listener must be able to agree and accept your suggestions on some level so you can not only seed them in but get a response from those suggestions. remember that these are the basics and you will be learning many more layers of skills to add to these as your education continues. The fixation of attention can be done in many different ways. Now that you have been reminded of the four stages you can set those stages in the back of your mind and concentrate on how to get someone’s attention. idea or anything you want that will help in the person’s goals of life change. No matter what hypnotic effect or process you want to do with your subject you must always first absorb their attention. That brings us to the third stage. action. On another note. as long as it is unconscious. It is imperative to make any type of progress with the betterment of life that you bypass the critical factor. Bypass the Critical Factor. an emotion or reaction to your suggestion that is communicated from an unconscious mind level. It can be any of the signals found in the signal recognitions system. So make sure to practice getting people’s attention.

These inductions will largely be taking place through your ability to use your language in certain ways. They knew when to just simply make a direct request of a subject. After you have refined your ability to get attention with directness you will learn to move to more indirect ways of still getting the attention you need. This is something that you will want to move on to after you have mastered the direct routes of absorbing attention. body language. However there are other important aspects and skills that you will combine with language in order to alter the state of mind for your subjects. gestures and unconscious sub-communications. These things will happen in the background of conversation and be harder to spot by your listener. This is not a certain look you will shoot across the room at a person and they will suddenly slump over into a . most like to please others and in asking a very direct and easy thing will certainly get your listeners attention. Making a clear concise request without embarrassment or hesitation is an important way to start in getting peoples attention. The above list of ways to attract attention is great but sometimes it is just good to be direct. The Secrets of the Hypnotic Gaze Induction Revealed The art of hypnosis and learning hypnosis are all about learning how to use language. In Conversational Hypnosis you are going to be inducing trances. This is a way to make things less blatant and more smooth. and often it can give you the best results. You can attract them down the rabbit hole by showing them something they want so they in turn want to follow you. You will learn how to accomplish the art of absorbing attention with more subtle communications. The second secret in hypnosis that relates to this is to learn how to move from being very direct to indirect as you improve your skill. Being simple and direct in asking for attention may seem like a contradiction since in Conversational Hypnosis you are usually trying to learn how to be indirect. One of those other various skills will be using the Hypnotic Gaze.You can attract their attention by telling them something that will interest them. You should have no reason not to be direct. Being very direct is one of the best kept secrets in hypnosis. You can attract their attention by asking questions that instill some curiosity. But if you take a step back and think about the greatest hypnotists like Milton Erickson and others even they knew when to be direct. doing or asking them to do. All these are ways of attracting attention. Humans by nature like to comply. more like they are taking place in the background of what you are really doing. Simply ask them to direct their attention to what it is you are saying.

deep sleep. The second thing that will take effect in the Hypnotic Gaze is it raises tension in the other person. Eye contact. perfect and use to invite a person into the world of induced hypnotic trance. you are having a natural effect on another person through the very natural effects of eye contact. absorbing the attention of your subject. This is a response. How does it do this. That very thing. As time goes on you will be able to refine your gazing skills to become more indirect and conversational as you apply your hypnotic gaze. as you will soon see. The first thing that a hypnotic gaze will do for you is to absorb the attention of the person you are applying it to. You will use it along with your language skills to induce a hypnotic trance and produce an outcome. this is a skill you will practice. well the simple fact is when you make and maintain eye contact with another person it obligates them to respond in some way. It needs to be clear in your mind that you are not overpowering someone with your will. What you will do is get their attention by making direct eye contact with them. Because of this simple fact you will need to be aware of the different signals you can send with it and be sure to send the signals that will have the best intentions for both of you. You will not be able to simply look at a person and ‘will’ them into a trance. . Hypnotic gaze can assist in the first stage of the 4 Stage Protocol. it gives you the ability to turn that eye contact into a hypnotic induction! The simple unspoken demand for attention through eye contact begins the trance process. It is a great and powerful way to do this. people will see you are doing it. And you are not creating any type of occult condition. They may not know quite what you are doing but the actual gazing will be detected. it must be as you will be looking directly into their eyes. This is a skill you will learn to use in the context of normal conversation. Again this is not a will power type of thing that you read about in story books. There is not form of overpowering an individual with a simple look that will produce a trance alone. that obligation is what begins the trance response. You are not producing a mind controlling magnetism. The hypnotic gaze induction is a tool you will first learn to use very directly. Quite the contrary. the eye contact increases responses through the tension it raises in the person you are locked in with. This direct eye contact will affect them on many different levels allowing you to coax them into an altered consciousness. does have a very powerful effect on people.

Projecting good will onto the person you are gazing at is as easy as feeling it yourself. very important. To be confident in your actions will result in success from your actions. This will give the person the feeling that they are no longer being looked at but that they are being looked inside. the more unconscious the person’s thinking will be meaning the less critical factor will be in place. You will get back whatever you are projecting through your gaze. The subcommunication of insecurity and hesitation will affect the success of your induction badly. going into this trance you will not get positive results. You must expect the other person to go into a trance. The way to incorporate this new step is to find it in you first. This will sub-communicate that you are in a sort of trance and unconsciously they will want to follow that lead. Think about how you want them to feel that feeling of good will. the third phase of hypnotic protocol. to do this there are things you need to watch in yourself to be sure you are sending the right signals out. These are not good things and so to be conscious of the feelings you are projecting is important for the process to continue. will it to them. The first is the tension that is being produced from the constant eye contact will drive a feeling of obligated response from your subject. if the person feels you are hostile they will be defensive. yes ‘go first’. In this we find the third secret of the hypnotic gaze that is to subtly suggest a hypnotic trance. The fifth secret of the hypnotic gaze it that confidence breed’s success. If you do not have expectations. .This does two things in your favor as the hypnotist. Going first in this instance is to alter your eye contact that you have been diligently maintaining to look through them. positive expectations. The second thing this tension accomplishes is the bypass of the critical factor. This direct unconscious way of thinking allows you to move smoothly into the suggestion phase. The next step that you need to be very aware of is that you should not just be subcommunicating that they go into a trance but that there is a connotation of good will involved. if the feel intimidated you will start to loose rapport. Projecting good will to the person you are involved with is very. Instead of focusing your eyes on their eyes look to the backs of their eyes. If you are accessing and sending out the signals of hypnotic trance it will non-verbally invite the other person to do the same. The simple fact is you must avoid showing any automatic defense mechanisms. Remember the more tension that builds. In doing this your body language will change with your mood and give subtle suggestions about the interaction you would like to have with them.

All of this will help insure the best hypnotic gaze environment for both you and the person you are working with. you will really dive into what this . they will be open to your suggestions. You want to transmit through your body language that you mean for this to be a pleasant experience of mutual cooperation. This is a skill that once learned will absorb attention.These are things like blinking too much. when they are showing the automatic defense mechanisms it is a signal to you they are building pressure within. Keep in mind to have your confidence up and your insecurities checked at the door. breathing normally and comfortably. eyes relaxed. you want to project good will and confidence. On the other hand you want your subject to be doing the opposite. When you see the signals that this is happening you will make a clear and concise direct instruction for them to go into trance. no pun intended. bypass critical factor. the sub-communications you send and go first in the feeling of good will. This is done by having softer features in your face. As this tension builds they will lose the will to want to escape it. The hypnotic gaze induction can and will be used in many instances to run through the 4 Stage Protocol with many of your subjects. Now you have heard and read in depth all about what the hypnotic gaze is and what it will do for you as a hypnotist. in this article. This will keep them comfortable and relaxed enough to agree with your suggestion when the time is right. In building up to this suggestion to go into trance you will maintain a constant gaze. You must keep an eye on. provoke an unconscious response and set the scene for you the direct that response. Next. You will keep it in a friendly manner that is conveyed softly to them. shifting your gaze excessively. That pressure means they are beginning to respond to you hypnotically. Basically the things that make you look nervous and unsure of yourself. yawning. The Great Hypnosis Secret: How to Use the Hypnotic Gaze Induction The Hypnotic Gaze Induction is a powerful piece of language that requires more thought behind your actions and composure rather than words. For now you should be concentrating on the more direct method of the hypnotic gaze but as time goes on you will be able to be less direct in this skill. It really takes care of it all when you learn to do it correctly. Finally you also need to be aware of the direct or indirect approach to take with each different individual you are working with. fidgeting and so on.

The outside trance that you will be entering into will not be a picture of you slumped in your chair feeling all glossy and glazy. This is a comfortable non intimidating feeling. You also want to go first in these matters because you also need to enter a sort of trance. You will travel along the lines of what the hypnotic gaze induction procedure is. You can do this by making them ‘soft’ or through ‘smiling eyes’. You have instilled a sense of comfort. Of course you want to do this because these are the feelings and attitudes that are necessary for you’re subject to feel upon entering hypnosis. You will use instant rapport techniques to project these feelings and states of being to your listener through your sub-communications. This means you will start with the eye contact. as though you are staring right through their entire head. As you start your induction you need to start on the outside and slowly move inside and then beyond. ease and good will between you and your subject and projected it into your environment as well using your instant rapport skills. This will sub-communicate that you are going deeper within them and they should do the same. yourself and the art of hypnosis.will technique can do for you. The next step in the hypnotic gaze induction is to focus your hypnotic gaze. ease and good will. Open up your senses. It will seem as though you are looking 3-4 inched inside their head. hearing. . and then slowly shift your gaze to looking within them. You will want to access an outside trance where as your subject will be going into an inside trance. how it starts. Expand your vision. where it goes and where it ends. As you maintain that eye contact make sure you are aware to keep the sense of good will and comfort flowing from your eyes. You will do this by first making eye contact. It may be helpful to remember this is a gaze not a staring contest. Your attention should be focused outward and you will have no trouble functioning in your environment. You should not be surprised when the first step of this induction as with any induction is ‘going first’. The things you will want to go first in are the projection of feelings like comfort. The way you go into an outside trance or a ‘hypnotist’s trance’ is to expand yourself into the room. These are both very different and necessary in an induction. After that you will again want to shift your gaze to looking at the back of their head and finally completely through their head as if you are focused on an object 3-4 feet directly behind them. In doing all this you really have just set up the environment for your subject. and feelings into the room and really have a sense of open awareness. No cold hard forced stares just a soft focus with gently upturned corners of the eyes.

Think of how you would consol an injured child or animal. This is where you begin to really verbally let your subject know they are entering a trance. as well as changes in their breathing and the way they perceive their environment. see how it changes and changes within you. This is a strong sign that they are going into a trance. calm and soothing. you tell them what they should be doing. You can practice this with different objects or with people you are conversing with on a regular basis. The types of subjects to focus on here are the relaxation of the face. As you describe these signals it will let the person you are working with know that they are entering a trance. you describe it back to them. To use your tonality you will use your voice to slow everything down and create space in your language. so on and so forth. The third step in this induction is to use a hypnotic tonality. This is a very important part of the induction and you must practice it and learn it well. powerful induction into a hypnotic trance. You will use these as you speak to your subject and as you gaze at them. This creates a strong double feedback loop. How to Refine the Powerful Hypnotic Gaze Induction . Get comfortable with it. If they actually begin to do any of the things you are describing or other trance signals you will want to take advantage of describing those exact things back to them in order to reinforce the trance induction. focusing and re-shifting of your gaze is telling them with your unconscious communications that it is time to go within. Entailing all of these steps and recognizing all the responses in the hypnotic gaze induction is the recipe for a very strong. Be sure to keep a good focus on your subject as you do this.What you are doing in all this shifting. muscles and eyes. Tonality in the hypnotic gaze induction should be soft. The fourth and final step is to describe the trance experience. You will want to remember all the signal recognition signs so you can describe in detail to the person what is happening or what should be happening to them. they do it. This should be an easy step to put into action as you have probably been practicing this from the beginning of your hypnosis study. Practice the focus and shifting of your gaze. The deeper they see you go within them the deeper they will unconsciously recognize they need to go. You want to project yourself as trustworthy and exhibit kind calming sounds in your voice. Any of the trance signals in signal recognition are acceptable topics in this phase of induction.

In this you should display with your signals complete confidence in your ability to induce trance. Finally the fourth step in hypnotic gaze induction is to still use your hypnotic language as you create a double feedback loop for your subject. The hypnotic gaze induction in itself covers and accomplishes the 4 Stage Protocol all wrapped into one induction. and as they unconsciously put them into effect repeat back to them what it is they are doing. The first step in hypnotic gaze induction is to go first. You will develop an instant rapport rich with feelings of comfort and good will. The voice tone in this is much more normal but can have the same impact as the very deep. This is simply slowing the rate at which you change your tonality down so it is less obvious that you are converting into a hypnotic tone. This will reinforce their actions and lead them deeper into trance. The first area of refinement that you will want to concentrate on is how to make your inductions less direct. Make good use of your hypnotic language and create a relaxing environment with the words and tones you use. Now that you know how to do a hypnotic gaze induction you will want to not only practice it but refine and perfect it as well. slow. The second stage is to apply your hypnotic gaze.The Hypnotic Gaze Induction is powerful indeed and know in how to use it will be a wonderful tool for you in your practices. It does this through a series of phases which you will lead a person through using eye contact. you will learn techniques to make your hypnotic gaze inductions run very smoothly and eventually go undetected by the person you are putting into trance. A quick review of the four steps in the induction will help you to get into the mode for this article. low trance voice people are used to hearing. In learning this concept keep in mind that your actual language will not change. . This is where this article comes in. Tell them what you want them to do as far as trance signals. A good way to do this is to only change your regular conversational voice slightly to be smoother on the ear. You will put yourself in an outside trance to create external focus. It is important to keep your gaze calm and clear. The third step in this induction is to alter your voice to a trance tonality. but most of all steady and unwavering. This is done through the art of overt and covert hypnotic voices. this only really works on the tonality you are using. Use all the aspects you can to create a calm voice that slows everything down. When you do this there will be very few people who will actually notice you are using a hypnotic tonality with them. body language and tone of voice.

The third and final refinement skill for hypnotic gaze inductions are to talk in extended quotes. This in the world of hypnosis is always a positive aspect. almost as if it fact just because another person said it. The Secret of Conversational Hypnosis: the Piggy Back Hypnotic Induction In the art of Conversational Hypnosis you will begin to file away many different ways of inducing trance in your clients. In this the listener hears you giving them information. Instead of describing a trance they will be or are going into you would describe the experience your friend John or Jane had. They are aware on some level that you are really talking about them and the things they are experiencing or doing but it is presented in a story about someone else. These are great to keep on hand as skills that will assist . It goes in to their unconscious and becomes an embedded suggestion that will help to send your listener into trance and actually have the experiences you are leading with your quotes. And the third and final refinement is to use extended quotes to make a thing agreeable and put into action by the subconscious. The second refinement technique that you will focus on is called my friend John/Jane technique. You use this to quote what another person may have said about something. This converts your instruction to a story about an experience someone else had.The idea of overt is the more obvious hypnotic tone of voice that you may use in some situations and the covert is the more indirect and less obvious tonality you will use. you can’t deny what someone else said there is little resistance. except it is easier to agree to as it is someone else’s experience. The first refinement is to change your tone of voice to create new voices that are less or more covert and overt. So in refining the hypnotic gaze induction you really have three concepts to put into action. In using these three refinements you will increase the power behind your hypnotic gaze inductions to make them more efficient and powerful. In this technique you are essentially creating a double reality for your listener. The second refinement technique is to tell stories and experiences that happened to other people to make embedded suggestions. When you talk in extended quotes you are really just putting words into another person’s mouth. It still sends the same message of the signals and such you want them to experience. Because they view it as a statement that they can agree with. Many times you will make the decision of which to use based on the person and environment in which you are dealing. In this technique you are not changing the words of the experiences you describe you simply change who they are happening to.

It is now that you can see in doing this suggestion you will have already bypassed the critical factor as well. You will use words like notice. In the piggy back principal a suggestion is attached to an accepted idea the suggestion just slides riding on back of the information that the listener has already accepted. And that is where you start to see the happenings of the piggy back principal. The word notice itself requires you to make some kind of comparison and you can not do this without accessing the feeling behind whatever it is you are comparing. hear and see to draw attention to things that are already in existence but the listener is not being consciously aware of. which are things you can see. if the person in session is listening to you at all you have just completed the first stage. The piggy back hypnotic induction does all these things and will be an important tool in your tool box of hypnosis. bypass their critical factor. they will be breathing and so to notice it is a suggestion. This is most likely to happen because you have made a statement that is true simply because it is their experience. The Piggy Back Hypnotic Induction is of course closely related to the piggy back principal which is the process of attaching a suggestion on to ideas or thoughts that have already been accepted and granted passage through the critical factor. Keep in mind that the first stage of the 4 Stage Protocol is to absorb attention. you will be bringing it to their conscious attention. If you are noticing or comparing a thing you are experiencing it. the fact of breathing and noticing it both usually get by the critical factor .and guide you as you need new techniques for new people that you come across and want to help. cause an unconscious response and lead that response to the agreed upon outcome. You cannot compare something you are not aware of. there is no way to argue with your own experience. every time without fail. feel or hear. Using the piggy back hypnotic induction mainly relies on direct experiences. you will be redirecting their awareness to a process that is happening unconsciously. That is they must absorb the attention of the listener. feel. The second thing this type of statement or question does is it allows you to take control of their attention. For example if you ask someone to notice the rate at which they are breathing. In this induction you will use these senses to draw attention to unconscious things and this in turn brings them to your conscious. This can also be used with taste and smell at times but those are a little more complicated and less likely as they are sense less used in hypnosis. When speaking of induction you know that they must all include the 4 Stage Protocol.

on the sole principal that the first is agreeable. They are breathing, there is no denying that. Now it isn’t a guarantee that the suggestion will get in, it is not inevitable. But there are no guarantee’s in hypnosis. If you use the piggy back principal correctly and to its full potential you will be making it increasingly more difficult for someone to resist the statements you make, in that you are actually building a yes set. The more yeses you get the harder it is for the listener to say no. The more time you can coax your subject into saying yes the better. The more yeses you get the less likely you will get a no as it will interrupt the flow of things, people like to do what is easy and fighting a statement that is easy to say yes to becomes a lot of work in these situations. When your subject is caught in the yes set and continues to follow the loop you are leading them in their unconscious will begin to make your statement true for them. The key factor here in this induction is that you are attaching suggestions to these yes sets. The suggestions you are attaching need to be strong enough to provoke a response but subtle enough that they will not stop to say no to them. This is a fine balancing act that you will need to learn. The suggestions you piggy back need to require less work to put into action than saying no to the suggestion altogether. A great example of this in action would be if you said “Close your eyes and relax” “Every time you hear me say relax you will get heavier and heavier until you are completely relaxed.” In these two statements is a piggy back, a yes set and an experience. The yes set comes at the beginning. The simple act of closing your eyes is easy to respond to it is something your subject will likely say yes to. The word relax will automatically be spoken because you have the control to say it, whether or not the person you are speaking to complies will depend greatly on how strong your yes set has been up to this point. However you must notice that the word ‘relax’ is the piggy back in these statements. It is attached to the original statement and therefore will more than likely get past the critical factor and become a part of the experience the listener is having. Now in just these few steps you can see that you have absorbed the attention of your listener by using one of the key words to draw attention and make a comparison. You have successfully bypassed the critical factor by attaching your suggestion to a true statement that has already been granted passage in.

You have also drawn out an unconscious response in the experience you are relaying to them then again with the piggy backing of a suggestion you are creating an action to go with that response. It all seems to happen very quickly here and it will be better understood when you really get to practice a piggy back hypnotic induction for yourself. A Step by Step Guide to Using the Powerful Piggy Back Hypnotic Induction When learning Conversational Hypnosis you will be building a bank of inductions that you will use at different times for different purposes with different people. One of those inductions that you find to be very useful will be the piggy back hypnotic induction. In the piggy back hypnotic induction you find that you can accomplish all four stages of the 4 Stage Protocol easily and powerfully. Through the simple task of attaching suggestions to statements and yes sets you will successfully absorb attention, bypass critical thinking, solicit an unconscious response and use that response toward a specified outcome. In the piggy back hypnotic induction you will do this mainly through making verifiably true statements about direct experiences. These will use sensory words like feel, notice, see and hear. You will use these words in a way the redirects awareness by way of taking control of their attention. Let’s take a look at a step by step guided way to use the powerful piggy back hypnotic induction. To begin this induction you will first start your session out with making verifiably true statements. These statements should contain words like notice, feel, see or hear. You can use taste and smell but they are more difficult to work into a conversation where you are really having that experience. You will usually be using the sensations that are associated with hearing, seeing and feeling. Each of these true statements should portray physical aspects all about the sensory experiences that are true. You do have a feeling in your leg; you can become aware of it when it is brought to your attention. Remember these are simple statements about the person’s physical state that are true. In the second step of the induction you will simply add a conjunction at the end of your set of statements and a word that makes a suggestion to do something. Conjunctions that you would use are words such as while, and, because or that means. After adding the conjunction you will simply add a word like relax, grow heavy or breathe. When you use this induction you find it easier to accomplish the induction if you use your hypnotic language that you have been learning through out your training. In this

induction all the other things you have learned are still going to be very useful, especially the language skills. By the end of step two you have made your four or five sensory rich true statements and have added a suggestion to the end of them by way of using a simple conjunction. In doing this you have started a process of relaxation for your subject. The next step will be to repeat the first two steps over again. In this step you need to be sure to keep your statements again a completely verifiably true about physical aspects of your listener. Then you will again attach a relaxing suggestion to the end by way of conjunction. Each time you do this you will take the suggestion just one step further into whatever state of relaxation you used in the original set of statements. Using your hypnotic language you will continue to add to these suggestions throughout the induction. The final step in the piggy back hypnotic induction will be to continue your statements each time making them less true. By this step you will have been creating a very strong and powerful yes set. You will make your verifiably true statements less true and your attached suggestion in a way that they will stand on their own. Eventually as you progress through the continuous loop that is this induction you will be making only stand alone statement for your listener to take in and actualize. Now that you know how to take your listener through the entire piggy back hypnotic induction there is one more concept to keep yourself aware of. That is that in this induction you have the option of making it a very direct or indirect type of induction. When you use this induction as a very direct induction the suggestions you attach to the true statements will use terms that are directly related to hypnosis or going into trance. These will be words like hypnosis and trance; you will use them frequently and liberally within the induction. To create a less direct induction you will use all the same steps only you will utilize more indirect trance themes. You have read about these before and they will be words like relax, imagine, go within or to make comfortable. There are many other examples and strings of words that you can create for yourself and use in this indirect way of performing the induction. When you apply the indirect way of using the piggy back hypnotic induction you will be able to conduct the induction without ever really directly stating what it is you are doing, and all the principals will still be there. Choosing to use the direct or indirect area of this induction will largely depend on the person you are working with and what you would like to accomplish. Either way will work and accomplish the goal you have in mind when it is done correctly.

How to Refine the Piggy Back Hypnotic Induction The piggy back hypnotic induction is a perfect induction for many different clients. When it has become a skilled and practiced technique it will cover all of the stages in the 4 Stage Protocol; these include absorb attention, bypass critical thinking, get an unconscious response and direct an outcome from that response. In the piggy back hypnotic induction you will absorb attention through four or five statements you make that are verifiable facts about the sensations and sense in their physical being. These are statements about how their hand my feel or comment on their breathing. At the end of the statements you will attach a suggestion. This is why it is called the piggy back hypnotic induction. The induction and placing of suggestions happens using the piggy back principal. As you attach suggestions to your true statements they will generally be accepted as truth simply because it is easier to accept than deny them. As you make the true statements you are taking control of the person’s attention by directing it to the true sensations of the body and its experience. Those statements are accepted which sets the critical factor up for bypass. As the suggestions are attached the slip in unnoticed to the listener and an unconscious response is usually the result. After you have attained an unconscious response you can go ahead with the hypnosis and embed your life changing suggestions. This is a brief overview of how the induction works and how it utilizes the 4 Stage Protocol. Now it is time for you to refine the method, reading in detail about the piggy back hypnotic induction is suggested. After you have studied the process you should be ready to refine it with the remainder of this article. The first way to improve this induction is to talk about indirect hypnosis themes. When you decide it is time to go in a more indirect route with your induction you will use these suggestions to do so. The best way to alter your induction so that it is more indirect is to go from talking about trances and hypnosis to talking about comfort and relaxation. As far as the induction itself goes it doesn’t matter whether you choose to go the indirect or direct route. You will choose your approach depending on which is more suitable for the situation. You will get more skilled at making these determinations as time goes on, for now just do what is comfortable to you. There is always the option of merging the two, direct and indirect, to come up with something in the middle. The second refinement that you should be aware of is to use the ‘my friend John/Jane’ technique. This is the same as in the hypnotic gaze induction. This addition to the induction will also take your piggy back hypnotic induction in a more indirect direction.

hear and feel.This becomes more indirect because you are no longer talking about them in the audible sense. But not quite in the sense you see in old movies and Hollywood. As time goes by you will move your statements to bring attention to the more internal thing that are going on within them. The first is that of personal experience. These can become very tired and predictable pretty quickly. you pretend to be at the library in their mind checking out and using their experiences on a more intellectual level as opposed to a sensory level. and make true statements about those themes. So your other option is to use the mind read statements. Refinement number three is to start with external awareness and move to the internal awareness. The final refinement for the piggy back hypnotic induction is to read minds. The way this works is to use themes that everyone must go through in their lives. Just be aware of your surroundings and the customs there and in the environment your listener is from. Reading minds in this sense is the same but then again different. This would include anything you can direct to the feelings and senses that happen within the body. You are describing someone else’s experience. you will give them a ‘guessed’ truth instead of the sensory rich statements you have been using up until this point. However the listeners subconscious will pick up that you are speaking about them on some level and internalize the experience as if you were telling them it was their own. or they have disagreed with a parent. The statements you have been using are all about things the person can see. There are several different types of mind read statements. the only thing to beware of in this is to know the area you are in and know the common practices there. To say to someone in America that they have know freedom for the majority of their lives would be true. heard and felt outside of the body. feeling the way relaxation affects the way their body feels on the inside. . but to say that to someone who lives or has lived in China may not apply. Yes you need to learn how to read minds. These two statements are true for nearly everyone you speak to. These are thoughts that you retrieve from their experiences. These would include subjects like bringing attention inside themselves. An example might be that they have met both nice and not so nice people through out the course of their lives. In this refinement you be changing the type of true statements that you are making. These things may include things that are seen. This again makes the induction much more indirect by starting your statements with the external things that are going on.

you will really need to know something about them. The same principal applies. Milton Erickson’s Hypnosis Secret: The Trance Voice Induction There are many types of inductions in the area of Conversational Hypnosis. This will be good practice as you will soon be using them in your hypnosis. The second mind read technique has to do with beliefs and expectations. You can use any of these mind reads in regular conversation and you should in order to see how they work and get a good grasp of them. religion and religious beliefs or anything you may know their personal view on. or ‘better late than never’. These are both things that most people would agree with and have agreed with since they heard it. As you now take these refinements of the piggy back hypnotic induction with you. . Another of the many inductions we are learning about is the trancevoice induction. Beliefs and expectations that you may use in your mind read are political views. these are the things that most will assume to be true given the culture they are in. in this mind read The third type of mind read is one called truisms and generalizations. especially things they have personally told you. It is determined by cultural experiences and common themes that run along the lives of many. You can usually use just about anything you know about them. Keep in the cultural reference points of where you are that they accept. These are simply statements in each culture that is generally accepted as true due to passed down belief. Remember that these will of course vary depending on the area and culture you are in. As you learn each of them you see that they are appropriate for different people at different stages of their lives. In order to use this mind read you will have to be more than just casually acquainted with your listener.This mind read is in a nut shell like making a very. This category is quite similar to the beliefs and expectations. you will realize all the different ways that people internalize and experience things. The difference is simply the subject matter. And finally the last form of mind read is cultural assumptions. A great example of a truism is ‘better safe than sorry’. this is not a huge requirement but nonetheless it is necessary to know a little. very accurate guess at the personal experiences they have had in their lives. Do not make assumptions that could be ill conceived. that you will be making an accurate guess involving the beliefs and expectations of your listener.

You will be conditioning people to respond to you every time they hear you speak. In order to do this you are still required to create the experiences in order to condition each new subject. it was actually Milton Erickson who was the true discoverer of the trance-voice induction. in an office or park when there is no task other than hypnotism at hand. The trance-voice induction and its conditioning are similar to Pavlov and his dogs. The trance-voice induction is powerful. one for hypnosis and one for casual conversation. There are appropriate times. . There can be a big problem with this idea if you use your normal speaking voice for your trance voice. After a while whenever the dogs heard the bell they would begin to salivate whether food was presented or not. the discoverer of trance-voice induction used many different voices for appropriate environments. You have to condition you subjects to respond hypnotically to your trance voice. There certainly is not magical happenings in this induction. It was only when Grinder and Bandler. This all ties into knowing when you should and should not be using hypnosis on a person. There are times when it is inappropriate. These inappropriate times would be hard to control if you did not have at least two different voices. Even Milton Erickson.While the discovery of this type of induction was attributed to John Grinder and Richard Bandler. He conditioned the dogs to have the expectation of food when a bell was rung. Milton Erickson’s hypnosis that they “discovered” the trance-voice induction. this is not a good idea. in a car with someone who is driving. would instantly cause people to fall into deep trances. Erickson’s discovery in this type of induction will be very helpful to you in your practices. creators of NLP. In a trance-voice induction the listener is conditioned over a period of time to respond hypnotically to your specific trance voice. This is specific to you and the person you have conditioned to go into trance when you use a certain tone of voice. not something anyone can do to everyone with a certain pitch of voice. You know the myth that a certain tone of voice. In order to avoid sending everyone you know into trance all the time you will want to develop a trance voice that is varied from your normal conversational speaking voice. interesting and shrouded by myth. Another myth that surrounds the trance-voice is that there were some sort of magical powers involved that would cause a tone of voice to instantly send those around you into trance. usually monotone. studied and modeled Dr. Well the truth about the trance-voice induction is that it will in a way fulfill the above myths but not to the degree in which they are usually regarded. there is actually work to be done.

Once they start to respond to you in that way you will see they are in trance. the learning voice will talk about times they have learned. relaxation and excitement. This activates the neurology in their brains that makes it easier for them to learn. The different voices you create will be used to recall within your subject time when they experienced the thing you want them to do. You should also add pauses and make your voice soothing and comfortable. yes sets and of course other indirect skill such as the ‘my friend John/Jane’ concept. When that neurology is activated the setting is created for that activity to happen more efficiently and quickly. these will be things that are identified with your trance voice. Each purpose will depend on the subjects you are developing voices for but it is safe to say you will probably at some point have different voices for story telling. The more difference between your voices the more obvious and direct you will become. learning. As your listener activates all the learning experiences they have had inside their mind they will become more able to learn. As time goes on you will develop many different trance voices. In the trance-voice induction you will need to keep in mind all the other aspects of inductions you have learned previously. the slighter the difference the less obvious. language skills. They will all vary slightly to call to action either the conscious or unconscious. each one will accomplish different purposes. How varied you would like to make them is up to you. you will be speaking to both the conscious and unconscious at the same time with two different voices. hypnotic gaze. As you do this you are attaching the experiences. in our example learning. rhythm and pitch so it is easily recognized by the unconscious to connect that voice with trance characteristics. You will need to use all the skills you have learned. piggy back inductions.In order to set up your separate induction voice you need to learn to add different qualities to your speaking. How to Use Erickson’s Secret Trance Voice Induction – a step by step hypnosis training guide . We have covered in past articles how to change the tone. their experiences to the act of learning. As Milton Erickson discovered through his excellent hypnosis the secret of the trancevoice induction is to essentially return the neurology in the brain to a certain experience through the conditioning to voice. When you start to use this induction you will be incorporating two very different aspects into one. The two voices will of course be varied so they can be picked up on by the conscious and unconscious.

Conscious mind activities are going to include things that happen when you are awake. . Hypnosis is just like any other profession or activity. The trance-voice hypnotic induction is one of the tools that you will use to get hypnosis underway.In the study of Conversational Hypnosis there are various inductions and tools you can use to help your subject’s to enter into an altered state of mind. The concepts you will include in this list are going to be comparisons between the conscious mind and unconscious mind’s activities. Everything about this voice will be the same as your natural conversational voice. As you read each conscious mind’s activities you will use your conscious voice. An unconscious activity is anything that you do automatically. was the great hypnotist to discover the power of trance-voice hypnosis. there are steps to take to set up the environment and get people to respond to you in the ways that you want. It is a very powerful way to condition people to enter an altered state of mind just by the tone of your voice. In this induction you will spend time conditioning your subject to recognize and respond to the particular tone. This is as easy as making a list of things to do. Milton Erickson. tone and rhythm that you would if you and your best friend were discussing the dates you had last night. The trance-voice hypnotic induction is the skill of changing your voice into your hypnotic voice in order to induce a trance. The steps you must take for this induction are pretty simple once you are acquainted with them. You will use the same pitch. These are things you choose to do. use a conscious voice and an unconscious voice to do this. you don’t choose to dream. The differences between these voices will be that your conscious voice is the same as your normal tone of voice. logical things. breath. The first step to the trance-voice hypnotic induction is to compare the conscious and unconscious minds. rhythm and pitch of your voice. processes you work through on a daily basis. As you do this list recital you will move on to step two. like wise as you read the unconscious mind’s activities you will switch to using your unconscious voice. instead you are going to recite a list of concepts. or you do on purpose. Unconscious mind activities are going to be the things that take place when you are dreaming like sleep and dreams themselves. Once they are conditioned correctly they will respond much like Pavlov’s dogs in that the response will come with little coaxing and the reward will not even have to be in sight. however not credited with the discovery. keep your heart beating or control the temperature of your blood.

These little facts will help you in deciding when to use which voice. always being sure to change your voice. The fourth step in this process is simply reversing the process at the end of the trance. Now that you know the full process for the trance-voice hypnotic induction you can practice it. you will eventually be only talking about unconscious mind activities. It is the more holistic side of things and likes to take a look at the bigger picture of things. Soon you will be speaking only of conscious mind activities in a normal voice which will bring your subject out of their altered state.Your unconscious voice however. This is really bringing us to the third step in this induction. This is your hypnotic voice. It is important that you not only know when to use which voice but that you also make a clear distinction between your voices so as to never confuse them or your listener.3 billion process it can handle at a time. This is going to be gently including an unconscious mind activity from time to time. which is the activity that is really going on. This is because you are still working in the conscious frame of mind. . Just remember as you do this that the conscious mind had a small capacity of 5 – 9 processes at once and is the planner. think about it and more fully grasp the different minds and their activities. When you are ready for your listener to emerge out of their trance you will simply change the direction in which you were going previously. will be different. As you begin to weave more and more unconscious mind activities into the conversation. In this you are conditioning the mind to respond hypnotically to your trance-voice. The unconscious mind has an enormous capacity of up to 2. You will start with unconscious mind activities in your trance-voice and slowly integrate conscious mind activities back in with your normal voice. doer. It will typically be slower and more comforting. and the analyzer. The third step to the trance-voice hypnotic induction is going to be going between the conscious and unconscious minds. As you work through the induction a little way you will be using your unconscious slower voice more frequently. put the pieces together instead of separate them and be more spontaneous. You will switch to your unconscious mind voice and with its slow and smooth tones include unconscious mind activities. In the beginning of the inductions you will typically be using your normal or conscious voice more often. As you are primarily talking about the conscious activities in your conscious you will work in this step. As you read before you will be primarily working with the conscious mind in the beginning of the induction.

This can be a sensory description of anything from a vacation on the beach. it is simply just the manner in which the mind works. getting the voices confused or making them so unclear that your listener is confused can be an unfortunate event for both of you. By using a story you are sending them the experience with sensory descriptions. a walk they took in nature or something as simple as driving their car. At some level you are requesting that they access a similar state and really get into it to access those experiences. Because the mind works this way you as a hypnotist can use it to your advantage in your inductions. For instance if you ask someone about a movie they watched. meditation. those that apply to the senses. asked to recall and event or told a story. but there are other ways to make your inductions more hypnotically compelling as well as more interesting. in a form that they cannot disagree with. One of these techniques is to include sensory rich descriptions and stories to your inductions. If you tell a story of your relaxing vacation at the beach they cannot argue that it is not true because it is your own experience. However that description will get the unconscious mind to recall times when they felt the same way and allow access to those experiences sub-consciously. This is an unconscious process that happens every time you are presented with a sensory rich description. The easiest way to do this is to simply describe some kind of scene to your subject. at some level in the mind they re-access the altered state of mind they were in while they were watching the movie. Stories are going to be the way you carry these sensory descriptions to your listeners. This is similar in the way that you are asking a question to get the person thinking about a certain thing. As you use your various inductions in Conversational Hypnosis you will get better and better at them. The same happens when you use sensory rich descriptions and stories. . Any experience that for them produced a hypnotic effect and these are many. Now you have already been introduced to this in the art of asking deep meaningful questions that compel you’re subject to dive further and further into the experience you are asking about. Sensory Descriptions & Stories – The Key to Improving Your Hypnosis Improving your hypnosis will hopefully always be a goal of yours as you by nature should always want to be better at what you do. when you do this you are actually getting them to recreate that experience within them.This is because when you start in on unconscious topics you unconscious mind will always be in the conversation more fully and start to respond.

In doing that you are absorbing their attention and bypassing the critical factor because you have gotten their attention with a story and you have made it unarguably true because it is your story. You can tell any story you like. and as you use your words to describe it entailing all the senses it will become a real experience for your listener. Those descriptions will also come into the person as suggestions as to how they should feel. a time they experienced some sort of trance.As you tell your story you will use many sensory rich descriptions that will evoke in them the same feelings that would go along with their experiences. seeing and hearing to bring the experience to life. you will have the start to altering their state of mind. You can also do this by using likes and dislikes. The unconscious response comes in that you are successfully inducing a trance and eventually you will be able to lead that trance to an action. If you stick to the natural unconscious process you will get their unconscious involved automatically becoming more attractive to the unconscious and less to the conscious. The second way to improve your inductions is to share your experiences. It doesn’t matter as long as you include feeling. These two tips will help you to really envelope your listeners into the experience you want them to have. As long as you are keeping within the context of the 4 Stage Protocol and describing a scene that your subject can relate to on a trance level. these will usually be universal likes and dislikes that you listener will be able to relate to. You can use any trance experience whether it be the way it feels in a formal induction or the way you feel when reading a good book. As you do this you will want to continually compare what you are doing to the 4 Stage Protocol to ensure you are matching up to the protocol to induce a trance. This is a successful induction by way of learning and practicing two simple steps that you probably already use in your day to day life. The descriptions and stories you tell need to be responsible for getting past the critical factor by putting critical thinking. conscious thinking. Remember your goal is to create an experience through the descriptions you are giving. If you describe a scene of serenity and calm and tell how much you liked it and enjoyed it. Two sensory description techniques that will help you in this area are the ability to directly describe and experience and sharing your own experiences. go give good descriptions. out of commission. . this is something your listener will be able to envision themselves enjoying as well. To directly describe an experience is to simply use your sensory rich words to describe the process and feelings of going into a trance.

This was of course discovered by the great hypnotist Milton Erickson. This is one of the easiest and strongest ways to plant or embed a suggestion in a listener. You have had your whole life to practice as there isn’t a day that goes by when you don’t tell a story to someone. The first way to make a story truly hypnotic is to use it to deliver an embedded suggestion. and the answer is you can and you will. You should be able to really make the stories you tell do what ever you want. You have also had a brief period of time in your study of hypnosis to learn how to start to mold your stories so they accomplish certain tasks. He used embedded suggestion in many types of stories. Now you need to learn how to perfect a story in the manner of getting exactly what you want from it and the person you are working with. get reactions. deliver it by way of story.How to Use Hypnotic Stories to Get What You Want Stories are ancient. he also used them in readings of what seemed like complete and utter nonsense. . So now you have all these stories and ways to use them. You should also be flexible enough in your story telling that you can shape them with specific needed themes. In fact Milton Erickson did this as well with his famous tomato plant induction. For instance you have learned to activate the conscious and unconscious thought processes specifically when you want with stories. All the skills you have learned are not listed here but the point is you have learned a lot and can use those skills in your hypnosis. you need to know how to really get what you want with them. So you learn that if Erickson could use embedded suggestions within complete nonsense why can’t we use them within stories. settings and characters. will happen and will never happen there have been stories. ever since there has been someone alive to talk about the things that have happened. you have learned how to use stories to cover the 4 Stage Protocol and will continue to learn how stories can be more and more beneficial in the art of hypnosis. The only reason they were not complete nonsense on the technical side was that there were embedded suggestions placed throughout. You have also learned to use stories to evoke emotions from people. as well as to run parallel to the problems and situations of people’s lives. Stories are very powerful in Conversational Hypnosis. With the entire story telling experience you have you should be able to easily come up with stories whenever you need them. By now you should be a fairly good story teller.

Dr. ease. the theme of your story really doesn’t even have to relate to the suggestion your theme of your suggestions. Erickson used a theme of tomato plants because his subject took an interest in plants. When you take a person and put them through an emotional ringer you are activating their unconscious to get a response. all the things tomato plants do. Erickson can embed ideas of any theme within the context of any story. This man was a florist and when Erickson went to see him he decided to talk to the man at length about the kinds of plants Erickson himself knew a bit about. He did this in a way that was not obvious to the subject and it certainly was not obvious to the man’s family either. Milton Erickson spent hours talking to the man about tomato plants. It is in fact better if the two have no relationship at all because then the conscious mind will never know what was going on. so these themes and suggestions were well hidden with in the stories subject of tomato plants and all the need and do. comfort and growth. This is much like taking your listener on an emotional rollercoaster ride. This is a basic primal unconscious response. comfort and being at ease. It is fairly simple. he was on many drugs and there was nothing else anyone could do for the man. Erickson was asked by the family of a dying cancer patient if he would see him and try to ease the unbearable amounts of pain the man was in. The second way to use stories to get what you want is to install an emotional trigger in the story. After the hypnosis the man’s condition improved drastically. and he embedded themes of hope. The moral of the story is that you like Dr. This idea is very powerful because people have no choice but to respond to their emotions in a powerful way. If you recall the 4 Stage Protocol you will see that once you have activated an unconscious response you are already at stage three. As he did this he was embedding messages of hope. You have learned how to absorb attention with a story and the story itself will often bypass the critical factor simply because it is a story.Dr. So here you sit and you have . You can do this too. Dr. it is not alerted and there for puts up no resistance. Upon entering the room they realized that their family member was actually so deep in trance he did not even notice they had entered the room. They eventually decided enough was enough and went into the room to give Dr. Erickson a note about getting on with the reason they came. he talked about how they grew. growth. As the man’s family listened they were growing more and more impatient and wondered when he was going to start the hypnosis to make their ailing friend better. and loved the rain.

Stories are a way to access this domain as stories evoke emotion and emotion is one of the key factors in activating the unconscious mind. If you want relaxation and calm tell a story that will bring that emotion to light. All your emotion is stored in your unconscious and by reaching an emotion through a story you are automatically accomplishing the first two steps in the 4 Stage Protocol. and since we are all prone to similar experiences this should be an easy battle to conquer. the only thing left to do is get a reaction to that response and you have completed the 4 Stage Protocol. These are often called isomorphic stories. which mean they take on the same structure or shape of something else. Telling good stories is as easy as making it a topic the listeners can identify with on some level.triggered an emotion which is an unconscious response. How to Use Metaphors & Prime the Unconscious Mind in Hypnosis Conversational Hypnosis is an art form in which you need to have access to the unconscious happening within a person. but they will identify with it on an unconscious level. By changing their emotional state you will influence the kind and quality of the decisions they make. This is important as these emotions are going to very strong influence in you hypnosis once they are accessed. . The biggest trick you want to be aware of in installing emotional triggers in stories is to be sure you are triggering the emotion you want. When you tell a story you are automatically getting another person’s attention. Once the person’s attention is absorbed in a story you have probably already bypassed the critical factor simply because it is a story and it is unarguable. Now you need to learn more ways to get what you want from that unconscious response as a result of how you tell that story. This is of course very important. Setting off the emotional rollercoaster within someone can not only get you where you want to be in a hypnosis stance it will ultimately help your listener as well. People tend to not argue with another person’s experience. In doing this you are in essence influencing their behaviors. As they are identifying with the emotions and feelings the characters are experiencing in the story you are soliciting an unconscious response because emotion itself is an unconscious response. if you tell a good story you are going to be able to absorb that attention fully. One of these ways of getting what you want from a story is to offer metaphorical resolutions with in your stories. if you want your listener to be excited tell them a story to excite them not relax them.

In these examples you should be able to see how two completely different subjects can be related by the themes that are involved in the suggestions. The next way you will learn to get what you want from stories is to prime the unconscious mind. This is where the unrelated part of isomorphic stories comes in handy. How all those foods can be good and at least should be tried in order to really know if they like them or not. it affects your heart and health and the other people around you negatively. In this example Goldilocks is simply unsatisfied with many of the things presented to her at the home of the Three Bears. When you try to simply tell a person who has been smoking for years that they should consider quitting you are usually met with some type of resistance. In using this concept you will use stories to set an expectation for the future through suggestion and experience. You want to tell a story that mirrors indirectly the situation or problem of your client.In the way of using these in hypnosis the story will be taking on some similar aspects you see in your listener. This is a lot like formatting or pre-teaching a concept to a person. This will bypass any and all resistance that would happen if the two were connected. When you use an isomorphic story you are able to give advice where it would normally be rejected. This is can be used as a mirror for a person who finds that nothing is good enough or just right no matter how many choices or how hard they try to make it so. The person listening must not be able to tell consciously that the story is about their specific problem or situation. This is a dangerous way to live. Someone who is unwilling to expand their sex life may need to hear a story about the many different type of food in different cultures. Another example could be if a person wanted to quit smoking. The most important part of this type of story telling is to be sure it goes around and outside of critical thinking. Isomorphic stories can be used to mirror almost any aspect of life from sex to fear. there is still a type of resistance. in this the unconscious has its own freedom to make associations and choose the experiences to attach those associations to. A great and popular example of an isomorphic story is Goldilocks and the Three Bears. The same often happens when you tell them a story about someone who would not quit and died from it or became seriously ill. The key is to find a completely unrelated topic and use it to show the suggested answers. . If you have told a good isomorphic story the correct situation will be connected to it by the unconscious and a result will eventually occur simply because it is an unconscious process. You could tell a story about how dangerous it is to be morbidly obese.

This is when a person who has purchased the product somehow explains about their experience with the item. Another way advertisements do this is to give testimonials. This not only identifies with the new buyers reservation to spend money on an item but gives them a future expectation of the item.The best example of this in our daily lives is advertising. All of these methods are very powerful. To recall emotions and experiences through story telling is a powerful and useful skill in the art of hypnosis. in your mind about what a certain product will do for you. but this is beside the point for now. realistic or not. You can accomplish all four of the stages within the 4 Stage Protocol as well as use stories for many different aspects of hypnosis. or more popular with the opposite sex. . These are great examples of how you can prime the unconscious mind. Then how that purchase has affected them. You have also learned how to construct certain aspects of your stories to extract the conclusions and outcomes that your are looking for so you attain the exact things you want from the sessions you hold with different subjects. In this process the unconscious tends to account for many different variables that the conscious mind would not begin to grasp all at once. usually the product is wonderful beyond belief and they do not know how they ever managed with out it in the first place. It will change their life incredibly and they should not be without this product for one minute longer. Embedding suggestions and isomorphic stories are an indirect way to come to the conclusion you and your clients are looking for. Sometimes what would seem like an illogical decision is made but the future effects of it are astounding because of the frame work that was laid by the priming of the unconscious. The different ways to tell stories has taught you to accomplish the four stages in hypnosis and nested loops or nested stories will give you another way to do this. For example a certain type of car or truck will make you cooler with your children. It also creates a bit of pressure in that if you don’t buy the product you may be offending the person with the great testimony. The next aspect you must learn to conquer is the art of nested loops. Maybe they were apprehensive at first but purchased the item anyway. There is a sort of formatting that goes on and brings the unconscious to a conclusion that not only benefits the person at the moment but looks into the future benefits of the situation. You can use your stories to relax and excite people in the types of trances you are inducing. Any ad you see will set an expectation. The Persuasive Power of Nested Loops in Hypnosis There are all types of different story telling methods and skills to incorporate in you inductions as a Conversational Hypnotist.

The way nested loops work is to have your three. If a thing is finished. In a nested loop you will have many conclusions and suggestions that will activate the unconscious to be more fully in action. The consequence of this is that the unfinished business becomes remembered more fully or done better simply because of the importance placed upon it to want to be finished. The beauty of the nested loop when it comes to critical factor is that they tend to bypass the critical factor more efficiently in just the fact that there is more to concentrate on and confuse the conscious mind. If you use nested loops and always leave an open end or a sense of may be there is more to this then you will leave the door open for more or new information in the future. As you do this telling and breaking into each new story you are pushing the unconscious into working overtime. let’s say a story or thought. four or five stories in mind. Because each story is left unfinished the unconscious is going to be working even harder to finish the details and attempt to figure out the end of all your stories. These aspects will make the unconscious concentrate more and work harder.When telling nested stories or nesting loops within a set of stories is to design a tale that will require more of the unconscious attention than a simple story would. . Each story you repeat the same method with tell the story all the way up to the greatest turning point and then switch to the next story again. The other things these nested loops will do is to become less consciously detectable for your listener and are a more hypnotic route than the simple stories you have previously learned about. As you tell each story you will come to the climax of the story and then switch to another story. You will also be activating the unconscious much more so it is remembered more fully and done with more precision. Because the mind feels complete in that matter then the new information is harder to get across and accepted. thought or story simply because it is left unfinished. the mind will shut down afterward because it now has all the answers it needs. When you are creating these stories and leaving them unfinished you are going to be accessing a special principal called the Zeigarnik Effect. The Zeigarnik Effect is what happens when the unconscious assigns a higher level of importance to a matter. Nested loops are a combination of many different stories that in the end impact the unconscious even more fully than a simple story with one conclusion or suggestion. there is no reason to probe further. This can be a problem when there is new information discovered about the thing that the mind has shut off to.

You will start this process by learning how to use a basic nested loop. you are confusing the conscious with many details and hence bypassing the critical factor. The listener is left with a sense of wanting to know what will happen next. less noticeable to the conscious mind and require the unconscious mind to work harder at its task. As you confuse the mind and bypass the critical factor you have the opportunity to slip in all the suggestions and emotional triggers you want. How to Start Using Nested Loops to Boost the Power of Your Hypnotic Stories It is vital to recognize that there is great power and importance in stories in Conversational Hypnosis. Nested loops make your stories more powerful. You can also prime the unconscious with your many story lines and do this quite undetected as the conscious is too busy trying to keep all the details in order it will miss the opportunity to reject everything you are saying. You have also learned that there is a very powerful set of concepts involved in using nested loops to accentuate the power behind your stories. In these skills you will require more of the unconscious mind to be interested in what it is you are saying simply by the design of the loops in your stories. In creating nested loops with in your stories you will be leaving your listener with an ‘open mind’. It requires a bit of finesse to confuse the mind this adequately and you will learn how exactly to do this as we go on. You now have these things called nested loops running through your mind and how they work with your listener. which is basically the effect of the mind on closing off because the story was finished. metaphorical. It is only fitting that you should learn step by step how to use a nested loop with in your stories.As you use this method you are creating multiple realities for the listener. You are also aware that nested loops are a way of merging three or more stories together in order to create a bigger impact on the whole of the unconscious mind. These are all very important skills to posses when it comes to refining and perfecting your stories and they ways in which you tell them. It is essential that you have the ability to tell good stories that not only capture and absorb the attention of your listeners but also how to make those stories persuasive. and hypnotic as well as how to use your stories to prime the unconscious mind. This is a very powerful way to use story telling and should be practiced in the right ways so you do not use it wrongly. For now think about how powerful this is and how you may be able to use it in your practices in the future. By leaving questions about the unfinished stories you are creating the Zeigarnik effect. .

there really is no transition except for the fact that you have switched stories. almost simple. . This is where you will have the opportunity to make a very direct suggestion to your listener. Then you close each of your stories that you had begun to tell before the suggestion. Repeat these processes with the third story in that you will tell it until you reach the climatic point and then you have a space. it sounds harsh and can seem so when you use it but it will assist you in creating a greater amount of amnesia through out your nested loops. then one. You will probably want to start out with three to five and then go up from there after you have gotten the system down. any more than that will be in excess for most circumstances. You can do this because they will already be in an altered state of mind through listening to your three story beginnings. A hard loop is a clean cut to a new story. This is a way to cut to a new story with no explanation. Once you reach this point you will create a soft or hard loop and start your second story. You will first close story three. about 80% of the way through. The only catch to pay close attention to is that you do it in the reverse order of where you started. So you tell your first story until you reach the climax. The basic nested loop consists of three or more stories. what you will call the suggestion phase. Very direct and to the point. You tell your second story just as the first stopping right as you reach climax and again use a soft or hard loop to cut to the third story. After you close each story in reverse order you can continue speaking about the overall theme you started with. The soft loop creates a very smooth and somewhat flowing transition between the two stories. then you use your soft or hard loop to transition to the second story which you do the same thing with. The most that you will probably have in this set of nested loops will be twelve stories. A soft or hard loop is simply two different types of transition to go from one story to another. A soft loop incorporates the beginning of the next story within it at the point of transition. it is a simple process of just finishing each story. This is usually 80% through the story.This is the easiest of four different levels of nested loop and you will want to learn it completely and fully before moving on to the more difficult nested loops. To create a basic nested loop with three stories you will start out with your first story. then two. You will learn about amnesia soon. You will tell it as you usually would until you are at the climax of the story. put that thought on hold for a moment. Since they are in trance you leave a direct suggestion such as ‘You can make much better decisions now’. When you start to close your stories.

. Creating nested loops will deeply improve you skill as a Conversational Hypnotist. You began with story one and you will end with story one creating a bridge over stories two and three as well as the suggestion you neatly nested in the middle of it all. two and three you will defeat the structure of the nested loop and the amnesia and bridge will fail. As you start each story you will tell the beginning 80% of the story. Now you may want to know why we want to tell two stories in the middle then end in a way that will make the listener sort of forget they were even told. meaning one. You are in essence creating a sound bridge with story one that will start and end all your stories this creates amnesia about the middle and makes things seem more complete.The reason for closing your stories in the reverse order of starting has to do with that amnesia thing we put on hold awhile ago. causing the whole structure to fail. The only thing to really remember that we haven’t emphasized yet is to always remember to close your stories in reverse order. This is a lot of information to take in. It will create a smooth way to navigate you and your subject through the 4 Stage Protocol and leave you and open space to place your suggestion to improve lives. and although it may sound complicated once it is practiced and put to use you will see that it is not that difficult. If you close them in the same order you started. The idea is that they are not only forgetting the two stories in the middle but they are also creating amnesia about the suggestion you placed. There are other types of nested loops other than the basic. By closing in reverse you are creating a sort of amnesia. This is good because then there is no time to stop and analyze it or resist it. First let’s review the basic nested loop just to get you in the right frame of mind before diving into the intermediate nested loop. In a basic nested loop you are going to have three to twelve stories in mind. So just practice the correct habits in this simple or basic nested loop and then you can move on once you are comfortable. whatever the situation your listener is faced with requires. How to Improve Your Nested Loops and Make Them More Sophisticated Creating nested loops using three stories is a very important skill for your Conversational Hypnosis. here you will learn how to create and intermediate level nested loop and all the refinements and skills to add to your basic nested loops in order to do this. The stories and suggestion are still floating around in the unconscious and producing responses the amnesia effect is only masking it so there is no rejection of the suggestion.

The only way to know you are doing that is to tell them to other people and monitor their responses. Your goal is to elicit an emotional state from your listener through each story you tell them. In an intermediate nested loop you will use all of these steps. only with added refinements to it. music and character composition to get your listener to get emotionally involved in the story you are telling.After you come to the climax you will use a hard or soft loop and transition into the next story. You can also use dramatic devices to help you instill emotion in your stories. You will be able to tell certain things from your audience like where to pause. There are two different ways to tell a story. These stories should be practiced to the point of people not minding hearing the . You will repeat this process until you have told the beginning of each of your stories transitioning between each one. If you practice alone you may be able to rehearse your stories better and memorize them but the point is to get a response out of another person. same structure of the basic nested loop. bland and exciting. You will begin to use your skills in language and emotional triggers to add an emotional factor to each story you tell. You want to be able to create a true experience for your listeners. and include all the senses and feelings that would be portrayed if the story were a motion picture on the big screen. where to talk faster. These are the different aspect you see Hollywood using to get you emotionally involved in their theatrics. where to drop the tone of your voice and where to keep rhythm in your words. You can do this by dancing around themes and using your language skills to create experiences the listener can identify with on some level. You want your stories to be as exciting in whatever emotion you are trying to arouse as possible. Anything from visuals. play a movie inside their heads with your words. It does not really matter what the content of a story is you can make that content exciting or you can make it boring. At the break of your last story you will add a direct suggestion and then complete each story starting with the last story first and work through the endings until you have completed the first story. In order to accomplish this you will embed your emotionally evoking triggers and language with in the stories you are telling. The best way to get good at this is to practice it with an audience. The first refinement that you will make is to the basic structure of the stories you are telling. Starting and ending with the same story will create a bridge over the other information and your listener will be left with a sort of amnesia about all that happened within the middle.

The trance processes you will use will be very similar to the suggestions you have originally learned in the effect except it will entail more than a simple suggestion. If your stories are not strong enough to absorb attention then your loops will be equally as weak because you will fail to draw people into your stories world. This emotional rollercoaster you are creating with your stories is a complicated thing that is very useful in hypnosis. each story is going to draw some type of emotional state in your listeners. you will come up with a set of stories that you use often. You are creating a chain of emotional experiences within your stories. You are also functioning on multiple levels with your story telling. This will be given instead of just a simple suggestion at the suggestion phase of the nested loops. They would use the stock of ten to thirty stories to create a pattern of change within their lives. now you are telling three or more stories for your nested loop. You tell the story. The second thing you will add at the intermediate level of nesting loops is a trance process. and then you will break it with a transition and start a new story with a new emotion. they listen. They would tell the same stories over and over again each time the stories would be slightly different depending on the state of the tribe at that particular junction. You are beginning the practice of evoking a negative emotion and then changing it into a positive one through the stories you are telling. that story is telling a story. providing information and rendering a trance state all through the telling of stories. This is important because a nested loop will only be as good as the story you are putting it into. This is a powerful process indeed. Each time you go through a story beginning you will get an emotion to come up. sound familiar? As you do the same thing.same story twice because you are so good at evoking emotion when you tell it. and you observe said reaction and monitor where to take your story from there. To recap. You don’t have to be the best story teller in the world just good enough to get responses out of those around you. you will be able to change those stories to fit the confines of each person you deal with and the situations they are in to elicit a change in their lives. You are telling a story. . This is where you will begin to work your stories much like the ancestors of our pasts. it will always be a fascinating experience. The trance processes are created to take the listener’s mind on an excursion. they are more sophisticated than just do this or feel that. they react. You will know how to change the stories by the types of reactions you are receiving from your listeners and a constant feedback loop is born.

Trance processes can include any number of things from a set of instructions to following a simple trance process that you have read about or developed for your practice previously. The point is to make it more of a set of things to do instead of a simple suggestion. At this time you can opt to stay on the direct side of suggestions and review and add the trance processes later. The point is now you have more to work with on a deeper level of trance that goes deeper into the art of nesting loops, a very valuable and powerful way to get the unconscious to respond to you. How to Destroy Resistance with Stories: Master Level Nested Loops in Hypnosis It is important know about stories and how to tell them, you should be practicing this and becoming quite good at it as you do it daily without even thinking about it. The telling of basic and intermediate nested loops and how to use them is also vital. All these things are very valuable and powerful to your work as a Conversational Hypnotist. The stories that you tell will help you to bring out emotion in people as well as absorb attention and bypass the critical factor. This will help you to induce a state of hypnosis and drop in the suggestions that will eventually have positive life changing effects for the people you deal with. Using your nested loops, basic and intermediate, will aid in this process by tying it all together into a nice process that is smooth and comfortable for you both. The nested loops you have covered so far have taught you to use three to twelve stories with in a session. They have taught you how to use the process in telling each story to its climax and then beginning the next. They have shown you where to drop the suggestions, between all the beginnings and endings of the stories you are telling. These two types of nested loops have also taught you that you can create amnesia in order to safely seal your suggestions within the person you are working with. This is done by the order in which you finish your stories from last to first, creating a bridge and smooth closure to all the stories with in the nested loops. And finally you have learned how to observe and use the constant feedback loop created from telling your stories and how to modify them to fit the situation of the person you are in session with. Now you must learn the next step in nesting loops, the advanced and master level nested loops. As with the first two types of nested loops you are going to be using the same structural processes and adding refinements to those processes. The first refinement you are going to make is to take the trance processes in intermediate nested loops a bit further. In the intermediate nested loops you began to use trance processes in the suggestions you are giving at the suggestion phase. Now you are going

to take it a step further and use those same trances processes, any of them you have learned previously, and use them in the actual stories you are telling. You will take each story you tell and use it as a trance process all in itself. This will create a much more powerful impact on your listener than simply using them in the suggestion phase. In order to do this you will still be working within an emotional theme. This will keep your emotional rollercoaster ride going. However you can also use other tools such as metaphorical resolutions and pre-teaching within the stories you are telling. When you use a metaphorical resolution you will use your stories to mirror a situation the listener is having, the suggestion or story itself will offer a type of resolution that will be set in their unconscious to be put into action later. If you decide to use pre-teaching you will have the ability to indirectly explain the processes that need to take place in order to insure success within the situation. Either of these options, along with others you have learned, will set up a structural frame work that will help the entire nesting loop process to define a means at the end. Another plus of using pre-teaching as a trance process is that while it instructs their unconscious mind of what direction to take it also sets up intuitions that are unarguable by the critical factor. This structural frame work you create in the trance processes of your stories and other tools will be the guide for the final outcome. You won’t need to use only stories to do this but the stories can act as pieces to the puzzle that will be the final conclusion of the entire process. The nest refinement you will add to the nested loops is going to be what is called post hypnotic suggestion protocol. When you arrive at the point in your nested loops where you use the trance processes from the intermediate loops you will also incorporate post hypnotic suggestion protocol. This is a very valuable tool for getting people to do a behavior when a specific cue is performed. This is a very powerful thing to incorporate in your nested loops. The reason post hypnotic suggestion protocol is so powerful is that even when you are not around to influence the behavior as soon as they interpret the set cue they will execute a set behavior. This is a concept we will cover in depth later on in these articles. Finally the last thing you will add to your refinements of advanced nested loops is a new way of closing your loops. Now as you have learned you will still close all your loops from end to beginning, you will still seal the amnesia within by incorporating emotional and complete stories. But now as you close each loop you will begin to incorporate future memory processes.

Future memory processes are similar to pre-teaching in that you will guide your listener though an imaginary future where all the changes and suggestions have already taken place. You will show them what these changes will do for them. You will be showing them how their lives will change by using their imagination and your stories as a tool to place those pictures in their head. Your goal here in future memory process is to give your listener a realistic experience of what their world will look like once they have made the necessary changes. This is a powerful way to use presupposition, give them a visual of what success looks like. The other benefit of future processes is that it convinces the unconscious to assume success; this will cause it to do whatever is necessary to complete the tasks to get to that success because it is assumed. Now the next step is the mastery level nested loop. Again you will be making more refinements to the last three types of nested loops you have learned about. You will use all the same structures and processes of the basic, intermediate and advanced level nested loops. But you will be adding refinements that will create an even bigger impact and make your nested loops even more powerful. The first thing you will do is add to your stories the conversation induction protocol. These are the conversational hypnosis inductions that were very indirect, these can be put to use here in your stories as well. You can do this in two different ways; first you can simply create the structure of all the stories in a way that it follows one of those protocols. The other way to use this is to use a different protocol for each story to create a very elaborate and elegant set of loops that will likely guarantee a very deep state of hypnosis in your listener. The second refinement you will add to create a master level nested loop is to add embedded suggestions to your process. This can be done in a variety of different ways. You can use them very directly; ambiguity, quotes, stacked realities or any of the other ways you have learned to embed suggestions. You can even use them within the emotional states you have been creating with your stories; this is a very powerful way to use embedded suggestions. As you are embedding these suggestions you will be embedding emotional triggers as well. These triggers will be set to go off whenever you trigger them later on. As you master all these concepts you will eventually learn to modify the rigid structure you have read about here and begin to create loops within loops. All intertwining and weaving to tell stories within stories, all to improve the lives of your subjects. How to Design a Series of Nested Loops in Hypnosis Conversational Hypnosis is an art form that is based around the language you use to speak to others. Part of that language is going to include stories, telling stories in

Conversational Hypnosis will be very powerful especially when you learn to do it using nested loops. Nested loops can be done at four different levels; all are very similar in structure they just get more advanced as you go from basic to intermediate to advanced and finally master level. A nested loop is simply a way to tell stories that involves a variety of different stories that are told in series stopping at the climax of each story to start another. When you reach the end of your set number of stories, usually between three and twelve, you will stop to add a direct suggestion or trance process. After that you will continue by finishing each of your stories in the reverse order so you begin the process and end the process with the same story. When you use nested loops you will soon see that there will be a lot of things going on for both you and your listener. Your listener will be giving you their undivided attention, through which you will bypass their critical factor make suggestions and then bring them back from an altered state of mind. You on the other hand have an overwhelming amount of work to do. You must have a stock of stories to tell and be able to modify each one to the person you are working with. You are also going to be using many of the past skills you have learned in order to make those stories the best stories you can. These include emotional triggers, metaphors, ambiguous stories, pre-teaching hypnotic trance processes, embedded suggestions, future memories, seeding and post hypnotic suggestion protocol. All of these aspects will more than likely be included in the ways you tell your stories. So now that you know how the structures of nested loops work you should learn a fail safe way to design them so you are ready whenever you need to use them. Just knowing the structure and what it is you need to have in the design is much different than actually creating a set of nested loops. The first step in creating any of the nested loops is going to be that you will want to begin with the end in mind. The unconscious mind does not work in a linear and logical way, even though the structure of nested loops may look that way, you will need to start where the unconscious is ready to start. The way you do this is to first realize what you want the conclusion of the situation to be. Once you have figured out where you want your nested loop to get you then your unconscious mind will be much more obliged to take you there, you have given it directions to its destination.

Now that you have an outline of what you need to create you will also have a sense of what problems or hurdles you may face along the way. Nested loops are two fold they are created for a specific audience in mind and they are created to achieve set outcomes. These are all accomplished in the first two steps in creating nested loops if you have missed any of these you should go back and reread the last few paragraphs. As you create stories with these ideas you will let each idea evolve and grow with your story.The next thing you will want to do in creating nested loops is to really imagine your audience. The fifth step in your creation of nested loops is going to be starting in the middle. You should also be using these stories individually to test out on a variety of different people. This will be the processes of deciding in what order to tell your stories so they are most beneficial for your subject. If you know who your story is intended for you will have a good idea of where they are starting from and what knowledge they do and don’t have. a purpose. use your stories as resources to build to those stories. Use your brainstorming phase to write down all the things and stories that come to mind that apply to the situation of the person you are working with. You don’t have to tell your stories in order or even the same order every time. This is not set in stone it simply means to find the story out of your set that inspires you most . Remember that these are going to be your starting points for the rest of your structure. Identifying those now will be very helpful. a place to start. these are things you need to remember as you go through this creative process. You can use your stories to set up ways to resolve their problems through the suggestion stage. The fourth step in creating nested loops is going to be brainstorming. To review the first two steps in this process you should now have a picture of your audience. Not all the things you brainstorm will actually end up in your stories but a good amount will and it will usually give you enough ideas to complete your processes. Because you have your audience in mind and you know their problems. it is important to understand exactly how to do this because it is a powerful tool you will use often. The third step is going to be to over come the hurdles. Understanding your audience will clue you into the problems they are facing and what they want out of life. a finishing place and end all in mind. their dilemmas you can start to figure out ways to resolve those problems within your stories. You can think of your suggestions as the point of transformation. what do you want to do at this stage? This is important because after all your stories are finished you will merge right into the desired outcome.

It is important that you take the time to figure out what works for you it will only make you stronger and your nested loops and hypnosis more powerful. The way to become a natural story teller is simply to practice. Practicing will help to condition the muscles in your mind to access the creative channels you need to be more at ease with this process. The point is to allow your mind the time to get the creative processes going. go first. In order to do this you will need time to let your unconscious mind formulate and work through the things you will want to incorporate in your loops. This will fuel your stories and the themes you use with in them to help you resolve the problems at hand for your listener. This sounds a little impossible but as you are telling each story you will be thinking of all your resources in your skills and things you want and need to express will come to mind. In this whole process of creating nested loops you will need to become a natural story teller. Next you will fill in the blanks this is the sixth step. if you are telling it because you have to that will come through in your sub-communications and create the wrong environment for your session. The seventh and final step in creating a nested loop is to actually use the creative loop. The idea of using the inspirational story to start your nested loops will activate the creative processes in you unconscious and overall allow you more success in what you are doing. the ones you will use over and over again.and start with that one. If you don’t have time to sleep on this you can always use self hypnosis in order to clear your mind to make things come together easier. Many of your stories will come to you by way of instant inspiration. This is important to be able to mold your set stock of stories. The main thing to remember in this whole process is that it is a creative process and you will eventually discover your own ways of going about it all. and especially Conversational Hypnosis. The Power of Frame Control in Hypnosis Hypnosis. The starting story has to be inspiring to you. So basically you start with whatever story inspires you in the first place. and form them in different ways so they can be used in different ways for different things with different people. is all about the language you use and the ways in which you structure that language. You will be using the skills and valuable tools you learn in these articles to alter people’s states of consciousness and change their . When this time comes for your second story to start you will have formulated ideas for it through your inspirations from the first story. This is very. as you tell it you come to a point where the second story is appropriate to start. very important inspiration will lead you to whatever story is best to begin with in your nested loops.

. There is new information that makes you allow yourself to forgive the ‘laziness’ here. You would be more willing to forgive the incident and move aside to let the car pass at whatever speed was necessary. So changing frames has a lot to do with the information that is provided and just as likely the information that has not come to be discovered yet. If you see a man mowing his very small yard with a riding lawn mower you may initially think. This is because the context of your frame has changed. The beliefs you have.” But if you change the context and you know the man has polio and cannot use his legs properly most people will have a different out look. Frames in general are an assumed set of assumptions that people use to measure the world they live in by. it just means that you have a preset frame to judge things by. However if you have the inside information that inside that car is a dying child that needs to get to the hospital your frame would likely change. All frames are interpreted by the context in which they lie. men on cell phones while driving. the way you interpret wild crazy kids running amuck. morals and all these things are set in a context which is set within your mind. probably completely different to the previous meaning the person originally had. initially most people will be angry or infuriated at the gull and complete disregard of the other people on the road. With changing frames in a natural environment the more the information coming in changes the more likely you are to change your frame. If we change the frame again and say the car sped past with a dying child in the back. It is how you understand things in the scheme of things. One of the aspects you will have to have control over beside language is the frames that people have put themselves in mentally. women putting on make up while driving. If you can change the frame you will give a new meaning. in fact people would be pretty boring as they would really not have an opinion on much of anything. your frame would likely change again. elderly drivers. If you can take control of the power behind a frame you are essentially taking control of a particular meaning behind an interaction. but the driver stole the car and is not racing to the hospital but to the border of Mexico. politics. Without frames there would be no deep seeded beliefs. “Give me a break you are so lazy. A frame is simply the way you reference things in your life to the outside world. Now that doesn’t mean that context can’t change.lives for the better. If a car speeds by you and cuts you off. so to speak. There are frames that run through your life every day.

are either of them completely true? The fact of the matter is that usually the truth lies somewhere in the middle. This testing is used to find out if you think they are being false or genuine. what does he/she think and do you agree or disagree with it. help you. or police officers are your friends and keep you safe. Some police officers are good and do their jobs well. and since we are a not cat that is a good thing. When you meet new people there will almost always be frame testing going on. After all if you can win the frame war you will be in charge of leading the interaction and making it a positive one for all concerned. Now we will get to all that in a moment in the next article. they do help you and protect you. Truth in frames is irrelevant simply because they are based on perceptions of what others see and in what context they base their frames. Your main purpose in frames as a hypnotist is to be able to recognize them. There will always be a way to spin your frame one way or the other depending on the contexts you use. but first you have one more concept here to learn. These are both sets of mind or frames that people have. hypnosis. therefore their outlook on police officers is a bit jaded. and once the . is the Earth flat or round? So it will come in handy for you to know how to change frames in the people you meet and work with. it is how you get to know a person. For example. Maybe they were wrongly arrested and charged for a crime they did not commit. The way to use this is to take control of frames so you have the power to lead the interactions you encounter. We are all curious. recognize when someone is testing your frames and establish your frame as the dominate frame so you can lead the interaction. This is simply a territorial interaction to see how the two will view the world. Logically from an outside point of view you know that both of these statements are true but other people. and organized religion is good. and police officers are bullies and only want to catch you doing something wrong. When this happens with people one person’s ideas will eventually be overcome with the other person’s opinions and ideas and the winner will dominate the interaction. People will do this consciously or unconsciously it is simply the way human’s work. which will win. have a different context to put police officers in.Now when you have a frame there will usually be two polar opposites of it. Other police officers are more out to catch you doing something bad or have been corrupted in some way. figuring out how you will measure them up in your world. This brings you to the new term of frame wars. That is how to know when someone is testing your frames. organized religion is bad. this is when two different frames meet and battle it out until one frame gives way to the other frame. including maybe you.

This is a new set of information or experience being added to the original set of frames which brings everything into question. After this happens things tend to flow better between you. There are four primary fame war tactics that you need to learn to use in order to successfully change other people’s frames and take the dominate end of the interaction. this is because you now know your place with this person. Frames rule your thoughts and decisions about any particular situation. Every frame there is has an opposite. depending on the person these may seem logical or illogical to you. If you can master a way to control frames in your hypnosis you will be able to lead interactions in any direction you want. The power to do this will come from learning to be successful in frame war tactics. Frames will be very powerful for you as a hypnotist as well. That is beside the point. you can help but to have frames in your life. you think you have a person all figured out and then they do something you don’t expect or agree with. you will keep a steady stand and move along the original frame you have set. To keep strong and unwavering in the views you have of the world and your reality. A Special Hypnosis Secret: 4 Tactics to Win the Frame War Frames are a set of ideas that everyone has. this will be important as it will give you the ability to lead interactions to whatever conclusions you wish. This is much like drawing a straight line from where you stand in being challenged in your frame and not moving from the path of that line you have drawn. Maintaining your frame is simply to stand firm in whatever frame it is that has presented itself. This is classic and happens everyday. At this point things will stay pretty calm.interaction is battled out the tensions will ease as one of you will have won the frame war. No matter what is presented to you. preframe. They are to maintain your frame. the point is in fact that if there is an opposite way to view something then there must be a set of information to change that view that can be introduced in order to do so. that is until new information is introduced. All of these will be powerful ways to influence the contexts and ways in which those around you create their frames or change them. . These are the beliefs and the contexts in which you put situations in order to form a judgment. We will look at ways to win the frame wars in coming articles. reframe and deframe. you and the other person have both stuck your preverbal flags in the ground and know the others views.

Sure you were frustrated that you were late for work because you had to wait for a red light. so the frame is preset to fall in your favor. The objections and challenges you meet from others are often a way to test how sincere you are in your stance. if you are unwavering then the other person will assume you know that this is just the way things are. They will also assist in giving you the lead role in the relationship as you convince others time and time again through the techniques shown here to see things your way.This is one of the most powerful ways to win a frame war. idea or situation you are at war over. ideas and decisions. The fourth and final tactic is deframing. In this tactic you will be making the other person justify their frame. You can do this by simply telling people in advance what it is to look for. This tactic is often used along with the first tactic of maintaining your frame. this is a therapeutic pattern in which you take the frame that is offered by the other person and you simply deal with it. Framing and the tactics for winning frame wars is going to be a powerful way for you to change the way people are interpreting situations. get them to defend the ways they are viewing the situation or idea. The third tactic is to reframe. How to do Preframing in Hypnosis Conversational Hypnosis is a prime area for you to learn and perfect your skills of framing. but what if you had ran it and never made it to work again due to a fatal accident by the car that was speeding toward the intersection If you stop and look at the frame from another angle you are moving the context about in a way that is easier to handle. Deframing is used when someone is outright challenging your frame. The best way to describe this tactic is that you are changing the point of view for the other person. what they should be paying attention to. You put a new spin on the same situation. There are certain frames you all have that rule the ways in which you live your . They will submit to your powerful stance on the subject. This happens because in the preset frames that are challenged you will need to be consistent in maintaining those frames until the other person simply assumes you are correct. If you do this correctly you will be convincing the other person that your thought process is right before the interaction of the frame war has even presented itself. The second tactic of preframing is a way to set the context so it falls true in your favor. ‘every cloud has a silver lining’ is a new way of looking at a problematic situation. This will create the opposite effect that they will inevitably take on more of the frame you wish them to use in their thought processes. this is a classic embedded reframe. these two agree well and can be very useful together. So for instance.

Frames are apparent in everyone’s everyday lives. The preframe sets the conditions by which you evaluate a thing in advance. the first we have discussed previously which is to maintain your frame. Preframing is a tactic that takes a bit of planning in that you will want to set up the conditions for the way you want a person to view the frame before you get to the actual frame. It is used to tell others in advance what to think or pay attention to about a frame before you actually get to the disagreement of a particular frame. This is used along with maintaining your frame quite often and you will want to be sure to learn how to combine the two as you move forward in these actions when attempting to change the frames of those around you. This is natural it is a way in which people state their opinions and contradict or view others opinions. The other two tactics you will learn more in depth later are deframing and reframing. Part of your goals as a conversational hypnotist will be to use frames. change them and take control of them in order to direct interactions with other people. They will not question whether or not you are right but whether or not they understand you view on the subject. First preframing is a way to avoid the confrontation on the war front. They will assume you are correct because you have already bypassed the ability to criticize your view with the information you have provided. not the actual concept of whether you are correct or not. you can state that the car they want . Here we will discuss the second tactic which is how to preframe in order to change frames. As you do this if the preframe is set up correctly the only questions that will be left in the mind of your listener are those having to do with another aspect of the frame. This is done through four simple tactics. In this manner you will be giving enough information that the conscious mind will be preoccupied with those thoughts enough to not raise an objection to the frame once it is presented. You are essentially chasing away any extra room in the mind for a framing war. In preframing you will use the fact that the conscious mind can only handle five to nine pieces of information at a time to your advantage. The interesting thing about frames is that they can change depending on the amount of information a person has or new information that is introduced to You will do this by elegantly giving information to set up the context in which you want the frame to be viewed. This is accomplished easily once you know how to do it. You can do this with almost any frame. believe what you believe and think the thoughts you think. Part of your time as a human is spent defending and convincing others to see things the same ways in which you see them.

This takes attention away from another aspect that may cause concern for the buyer. Because of this simple fact learning to control frames as well as structure them will be even more powerful as you will then have the upper hand in the matter of frames. This causes them to go in to the frame with a preconceived judgment to make. they will give you control of the direction in which the interaction is going. such as location. They control the meanings behind the various interactions you have with people everyday. By using preframes in different situations you are drawing the attention of the person away from what the natural conflict would be. You show the house to someone who is looking for a large house. you want to . The information at the front of their minds to analyze is the size of the car not the price or color. Changing the ways in which the objection will fall. even though you know it is. they will focus their attention on that judgment because it seems so concerning to you. In this light it is genuinely correct to say that frames are a very powerful aspect of your life. If someone’s frame of mind is that murder is unacceptable they will tend to live their lives in a reality where they do not choose to murder other people. is really quite simple. The simple power behind frames is the amount of control over interaction it gives you. if you know it is not then you are setting the judgment up to fall in your favor. a good frame. The preframe is set up when you warn them that you are not sure it is large enough. In a way they shape the lives and realities that we choose to live buy is too small. Preframes can do a lot of dirty work for you and are a powerful skill to master. You will be able to be the dominating frame holder in your interactions with others. Frames are what set us apart from one another they are the individual beliefs and ideas that you hold true in your world for yourself. is a way to preframe. possibly even other animals. If you want to sell a house and it very large you set the preframe up to make that a thing the buyer is okay with. Frames are apparent in everything you and others do everyday. Learning how to establish a frame. How to Establish a Hypnotic Framework Frames are very important in what you will be doing as a Conversational Hypnotist. this is why you must not only learn how to deconstruct and reformat frames of other but also how to build a frame to start with. You are setting up another conflict to absorb their attention and using said conflict to ultimately fall in your favor. The first step is to determine how you would like the situation to end. If you are a realtor.

The sub-communications that you send out are the true force behind setting up the frame in whatever situation you are in. If the information is interesting it will catch their attention and rule out boredom and lack for luster of learning. is something that you will want to do indirectly so as not to call suspicion to what you are doing. in this case information. If the information is desirable and interesting your students will more than likely be enthusiastic about learning it. The new reality you have created will not allow for such a strange objection.” chances are you will look presumptuous and egotistical. “Look this is really interesting information so you better pay attention and learn. In this example the frame that you have ruled out with that one simple truth is that they will be bored in learning the information. how much effort and concentration will they put into it in order to walk away educated? The power of making a thing desirable. or if you are a car salesman you want to sell a car. This is something you will display in your attitude. The next question is no longer whether or not the students want to learn the information but how will they learn it. You have to be aware to make your preframes set up in a way that opposing them will seem like the most unlikely thing the person you are dealing with could do. If you walk into your class room and say. After you have established what it is you want people to do you can move on to the next step which is to ask what would have to be true in order for people to do that. . In this action alone it will create an environment where the opposite frame. will not even be entertained because it is so strange. What is the first thing that would have to be absolutely 100% true in order for your students to want to learn a concept? It would have to catch their interest in some way. expressions and stories that the very objections you are trying to avoid will cease to exist to the person you are speaking to. If you display the air that the information is really interesting and desirable then those sub-communications will be unconsciously picked up by those around you. These are simple examples that everyone should be able to relate to on some level. Let’s say you are a teacher and you want your students to learn.sell a house. be desirable information to work hard enough to retain. The people in the class will analyze that and criticize it just from your statement. This is a very important part of setting up frames if you do not show in your actions that your assumptions are true you will be looked on as a fraud or an untrustworthy person. In doing this your sub-communications will be so strong in the ways you use your body language. the one you are trying to avoid. in your assumptions.

both physically and verbally. It is also important to keep in mind that frames are different for everyone and that there are different ways in which to present and look at each different frame. An example of this is if you were selling a suit to a business man. Reframing in hypnosis is going to be another powerful aspect of the idea of frames. Reframing in Hypnosis It is important to know that frames are very powerful and will be a valuable tool as you practice your Conversational Hypnosis. This will be another important way for you to change and overpower the frames of others to impact a positive outcome with in your hypnosis practice. The idea of flashy was the problem but now it is brought to mind that as an executive it could be a plus to stand out in the crowd. you have taken the problem of the suit being too flashy and turned it around to imply that as an executive you assumed he would want to stand out in the crowd. preset and extinguish frames based on the language you use. A frame is the standard of reference that people use to measure the meanings of all the things around them. There are context reframes and meaning reframes. in both your goal is to change the outlook of the person you are dealing with. it is a way to in essence predict the future of the goal you have set through a process of steps. You are attempting to sell him a very nice sharp. Reframing is simply just a way to get a person to look at the same idea or situation in a different light or way. executive of a big company. A context reframe is the ability to put the subject of the frame into a new context. In the area of reframing there are two different types of reframe you can use. Now since you are dealing with a business man this seems like a silly thing to say because part of his role as an executive is to look sharp and stand out as a leading figure in his company. In this example.In the end if this is all done correctly it is very likely that you will end up with the desired conclusion you set at the beginning of this whole process. no need to stand out in a crowd maybe he doesn’t like to be noticed as much when he walks into a room. You may reply in a manner that implies that he is more comfortable wearing a suit that will blend in with what everyone else is wearing. not to mention expensive suit. The power of frames in hypnosis is great because you are learning to change. He decides he would like to see something else because the suit you are showing him is a little too flashy. . Setting up a frame is very powerful as you can see. Reframing is the next tool you will use in your quest to conquer the frames of others.

Nothing you say will mean anything unless it is put into some sort of context and this is what frames do for you. Frames are simply a set of standards that all people use to reference things by. This puts a whole new light on the subject and you would then be very open to his support in razing you to be on time. This is context reframing you have changed the context to alter the frame. meaning reframing. don’t look at it this way but look at it that way. In doing this in both examples you are taking the conflict the part they disagree with and putting it in a new light where it becomes a reason to buy the item. the first way and probably the most popular way to interpret that is that he is a jerk and doesn’t like you. Each different frame will mean something different depending on the type of context in which it is displayed. If you have a boss who is very strict and every time you come in a minute late he really jumps on you. Reframing on the whole is a way to create positive outlooks for problems that others are only seeing in a negative light. You will want someone to look at something from another point of view. Another situation could be that he has a promotion in mind for you and the only way to get it passed by the guys up stairs is if your timeliness improves. a desirable aspect of the subject. Here again you take the problem and make it a plus. Reframing is powerful in its ability to enrich and add to the enjoyment of life instead of walking around always thinking the worst. . In the second type of reframing. influential and altogether happier as their outlook changes to a more positive one. They use their frames as a measure to accept or deny a statement. Although there are many other reasons why this situation may be happening. This is very similar to context reframing. The Secret Art of Deframing in Hypnosis The art of framing is very useful in Conversational Hypnosis.Another good example of a context reframe would be if a woman was looking at a sports car and decided that the speed would just be too much for her to handle. Meaning reframing is a powerful way to deal with objections or problems where there could be multiple ways of interpreting the meanings. It can make people more successful. You can context reframe this by offering the example of the quick maneuvering of such a car would be useful in the situation of speeding up to get around a careless driver. Maybe he is under pressure from his superiors to make sure timeliness is at 100% or there will be consequences for him. you will change the meaning behind the frames you wish to change. The difference is you change the actual meaning of the frame. idea or belief. In hypnosis this will come in very valuable as you will have the ability to give your listener enough positive choices to choose from that they can drastically improve their view of certain aspects of their lives.

this causes the original objection or challenge to simply disappear.” You both chuckle and the moment is over. a friend makes a statement about the jeans you are wearing and maybe you accidentally bought the wrong size due to wishful thinking. If you attain more information and find out that there is a dying woman in the back seat and they are rushing to the hospital your frame will most likely change. This means you have the power to change opinions.A speeding car that cuts you off alone may infuriate you. you came in from the side and startled your friend with a quick witted come back that took the emphasis off your bottom and put it on theirs. “What makes you think I should hire you for this position?” . In deframing you will not take a challenge or objection to an idea or statement head on but you will offer a counter challenge that is more important or substantial than the objection itself. Deframing is one of the ways in which you can manipulate the ways in which people view their world or their reality of the world. Now this can be done in a more serious manner as well. In doing this you are still offering a challenge that is more important than the original one. Deframing also allows you to ignore the frame in which the person is challenging you and you challenge them in a completely different frame that they were not expecting. These can happen in various situations including business meetings or simply casual conversations. Frames and controlling them is important in hypnosis because if you have the power of frames in your control you have the power to change the meanings behind any interaction. You see how you did not take the challenge head on. but they certainly did not come from your closet. But what did just happened is you took the original idea. brought up by your friend. “Maybe I did. This is a playful type of exchange that takes place everyday and the criticisms are not usually taken too seriously but the sub-communications were still strong enough to tell your friend to back off and stop discussing the size of your bottom. beliefs and ideas simply by taking control of the frame it is presented in. A classic deframe for this would be to respond by saying. Now this is made in a humorous and joking fashion but clearly your friend is criticizing the size of your pants. or what you have put in them. of your pants being the wrong size and turned it around to suggest that maybe your friend should take a look at his or her own pant size before critiquing yours. If you were looking to hire a person for your company and you ask them. One example of a type of deframe you have probably either encountered yourself or seen is something along the lines of this.

reset and diminish frames you will be building a very powerful tool that will aid you in your hypnosis until you retire. This means that you can ultimately control the meanings behind the interaction with that person. You can derive two completely different conclusions from one frame as long as you alter the context in which it sits.A way of deframing this would be instead of vigilantly answering the question to say something to the effect of. How to Maintain Your Hypnotic Frame Framing is a powerful thing to master. If you give them the right type of information you will be able to direct the change of frame to fall in your favor. The more information you give a person about an interaction the more likely it is that you will be able to change the frame in one way or another. or it can be done more indirectly. Frames as you have discovered by now are the ways in which people understand things. Instances where you imply that someone is not man enough to do one thing or woman enough to do another are implications that will change the context of the original challenge presented. Without frames and the contexts they are put into there would be only meaningless chatter among us as nothing would really have a meaning. The first is to give them the assumption that you are extremely talented at what you do and the second is to take the upper hand away and make them want you even more. When you learn the pros and cons of using frames with in the practices of your Conversational Hypnosis you will be learning skills that will enrich your practices nearly ten fold. Because frames revolve around context and meaning to have control of a person’s frame is a very powerful thing. The deframing you did here turns the situation around from you wanting the job to the employer wanting you. Deframing a situation can also be done in a very direct way. thoughts and statements by in order to decide whether we are in agreement or disagreement with them. This does two things to the person you are interacting with if they buy into the frame. they are references we use to measure ideas. You have just changed the challenge from one frame to a completely different one. maybe my services will be better served with another company. you have made a successful deframe if they buy into and come chasing after you. such as the sample you just read. As you learn different ways to maintain. Another valuable insight into frames is that with changing details you have the power to change frames.” and then getting up to make your exit. “I know my business well and it is not in the area of proving my potential upon first meeting. . set. An indirect way of deframing is to imply a new challenge.

In order to do this you must have the dominate frame in most instances. . This is why frames are changeable there is not true right or wrong answer to most frames it is simply opinion set in assumption. The first tactic is the most important one and that is simply to maintain your frame. Now in hypnosis you have learned that there are four tactics for frame war success. the meaning behind the same action is changed. It is a war about who is right in their view of the world. This would irritate most people. In frame tests. It is important that you are successful in your frame wars so you can direct your interactions with others. A frame war is the conflict created between two different sets of frames that meet and disagree. After the initial testing one frame will become dominant and this will be the norm until some new information is presented by or about one of the people in the interaction. This happens both consciously and unconsciously as it is a very natural thing to do. the truth is usually located somewhere in the middle. You will be unwavering in the ways in which you view the world. Prime examples of this that everyone encounters are through politicians and on subjects like religion and abortion. The example of a car speeding down the road and cutting you off is a good example. This will decided the ways in which these two people look at reality and who is really genuine. Now in learning about frames there are frame wars and frame tests.You can do this by keeping the same event but adding information to it which will ultimately change the meaning behind what has taken place. they are used to measure the world in which we live within that frame’s context. Most frames however have two polar opposites and neither is right or wrong. The war is won when one frame is proven to dominate the other. Frame tests are a little more subdued than full on frame wars. usually when two people meet. If you were to provide the information that there is a dying child in that car and they are on their way to the hospital. and so the frame has changed. However these can happen over smaller things as long as two frames are in disagreement and battling for the territory of which is right. The power of frames is based in that they are really a set of assumptions that tend to go unquestioned. A frame war happens nearly constantly somewhere or another. This sends the signal that you are confident in your views and makes them assume you must know the right reality to view things from. No matter what argument or information is presented you will stand true to your frame and not move an inch in either direction. they will test one another out to see where each stand and if they are solid in their frames.

The third tactic is to reframe a frame. They believe that all negativity will pass as things will even out in the end. In reframing you will simply put a new spin on it. This is reminiscent of ‘every cloud has a silver lining’. As you speak to a passionate person you are bombarded with the thought that what they say is real and over time that will become a part of your reality too. There are two important categories of people who maintain their frames and those are people who are slightly psychotic and people who are passionate.The second tactic in fighting frame wars is that of preframing. But it is important to understand the most beneficial and best way to work in frames is to simply maintain your frame without doing anything at all. You need to know how to do this as it is the most powerful way to maintain a frame. There is really nothing anyone can do or say to change the frames they function in. Passionate people sub-communicate that all is good and right in their reality and that joining them will give you this reality as well. They are so firmly planted in their convictions that nothing seems to shake them. This communication is very appealing to people and will lapse into their reality to cause them to start to think along the same lines. The healthy way to do it is to be a very passionate person. This is the unhealthy way to maintain your frame. Doubts and challenges are looked on as untrue and disprovable. Over time this . You will take the objection of the other person and tell them to look at it in a new way. The final tactic in framing wars is that of deframing. Now all of these are useful and will be powerful and valuable skills throughout your career in hypnosis. This will take the focus off of the original frame they would have presented and they will just assume the frames you have set before them are the right ones. You will in essence be getting the other person in the interaction on the defensive justifying their frame while you spoon feed them more of your frame. You will be pointing out the silver linings in the clouds when you reframe. This is when you actually tell a person in advance where their attention should be focused. This often goes right along with the maintaining of your frame. A psychotic person lives there lives by the rules that exist in only their reality. Passionate people are carried through life on the enthusiasm they feel for the beliefs they have. and that is how to do nothing at all to maintain your frame. Maintaining your frame simply sub-communicates very thoroughly that you are a secure person in where you view the world from. In this tactic you use the frame presented and turn the challenge around to offer a new challenge. possibly a more positive way. The bottom line in maintaining your frame is that it is the strongest because if sends the sub-communications that you are right and genuine in what you believe.

This is the ability to set in advance what others should be looking at or paying attention to. These tactics are not as well known but just as powerful as the others. It is true that all the above information is valuable and certainly powerful in your work as a hypnotist. as a hypnotist and as an individual. This is the strongest way to maintain your frame in that you are doing nothing at all. You will also encounter frame testing on a regular basis. If you have the ability to stand strong on the beliefs and contexts you have created in your frames you will convince others that this is the way of reality. Frame testing is what happens when two people first start to interact with one another. as a person and as a hypnotist. however there is another set of tactics you can use. As you come across each of these obstacles you will use different tactics to maintain your frame. in which you will need to become the dominate reality in. And finally you will be working with deframing which is to simply turn the tables of the frame and direct the attention elsewhere. This will shed new light on what was thought of as a bad or negative situation. just believing what it is you believe. All of these tactics are very useful in your hypnosis and will help you in situations where you are resisted or opposed when it comes to the frames you hold and the frames you would like to instill in your subjects. Reframing is when you take a situation and ask a person to look at it in another way. . From there you have the next tactic which is to reframe. Frames and they different ways you can use them and manipulate them will help you in this area of your hypnotism. preset and dislodge the frames of those you interact with. they test each other out to see who is being truly genuine and sincere in the frames they hold true.will rub onto those around you and become apart of their reality as well. This is what passionate people do and they are very successful in it. There are frame wars that you will encounter. Preframing is another tactic you will use in frame wars. reset. You will use your strategies and tactics to go to combat in these frame wars. How to Use Reality Strategies When You Are Challenged As a Hypnotist As a Conversational hypnotist you will use different skills in different areas of your expertise. Maintaining your frame is the best way to become the dominant reality in any situation. There will be those who resist you and those who challenge you as you attempt to do your work. These are things that you need to be prepared for. They are simply known as the frame tactics and will be of use when you are being challenged as a hypnotist. Frames are the ways in which you reference information and bring meaning from all your interactions.

The second tactic that is little known is to ‘give them ‘the look”. This is just as it sounds you must remain without reaction to the challenge. You need to teach yourself to completely ignore the challenge as if it does not exist in any way. you do this to other people to see that your assumptions are accurate and correct. shift your gaze. The big secret here is to send out the right signals. Do not blink. Sub-communicate that your frame is the only on that is truly right and real in the world. This is done simply by convincing yourself that the challenge and the person challenging you just doesn’t exist. calm and impassive.Before you really get into these tactics there is some information you will need to prepare for how you will come upon them and deal with issues before the tactics are necessary. “what . And this brings us to the tactics you must know in order to stand strong in the face of challenge. This is something you need to learn to recognize and not to give into. do not react. Send no communication what so ever that a challenge was perceived. If there is no change in the persistence of the person challenging you and they continue to do so you will give them the look. And don’t be fooled because your grasp of reality can be altered so much by pressure and influence that you will do things that sound foolish just to conform to what is supposed to be. Because this happens most when pressure is applied to you that is when you are most vulnerable to change your frame to fit that of those around you. Once you give into this pressure you will lose the battle before it is truly begun. The first thing you will encounter when you are being challenged is a great amount of pressure coming from those around you to conform to the frame they hold as true. alter your breathing or change your body language in any way. This is a simple communication of a look that communicates to the other person that they are behaving in an odd or unacceptable manner. These are signals people send out to check to see if all is still as they believe it is in the world. It speaks for itself in saying. These signals are important because this is a reality test. It is something that everyone does unconsciously and it accomplishes the task of sanity in a large world. The first tactic is. This is the next tactic you use in your line of defense against pressure and influence to change your frames. Even more powerful than that you must learn to send the right signals to communicate that you are not affected by the pressure that is being placed on you. In order to keep sanity and not conform to ideas that are foolish and untrue simply from influence and pressure you must maintain your frame. In order to counter this type of pressure you must firs recognize it then learn how to deal with it.

no context to pull that meaning from. you deal with the genuine challenge. Saying it aloud really wields very little power but sub-communicating it in a look speaks volumes. If there is nothing to reference an interaction by then there is not meaning to it. Take an example. Some Useful Frames for Hypnotists to Live By Frames are a very powerful and valuable tool in Conversational hypnosis. This is the most powerful and will have the longest lasting impact of any of the tactics and tools you have read about. So that is what you do. if you simply sitting next to a stranger on a park bench and he blurted out. You can do this by reframing it. The final little known tactic you will use is to handle the genuine objection. This is again next in line in your tools of combat. Frames will assist you in many different areas of your study and practice simply because they are what they are. Maybe you feel very strongly either way. If you can maintain your frame in a light that is so strong that there is no other way to see it but as reality you will save time and energy and be viewed as a more genuine person overall. This is the realization that there is a real and true objection within their challenge that should be dealt with. But you should always. If you have no view or opinion on a statement then it would really not matter to you how another person viewed it. Frames are the points of reference in that we all use to understand all the things and interactions that happen around us. always remember that the best way to handle a challenge to your frame is to first maintain your frame. If the person you are interacting with is still persisting with their challenge you will know it is a genuine challenge. However most people have some sort of view on this matter and so that is your frame of mind about abortion. This alone will often collapse their reality and they will conform under the idea that they are doing something that is not normal and unacceptable. “Abortion is murder. you have a context to put it in to. or you can deframe it the option is yours depending on the challenge and which you think is better suited for that challenge. the point is this statement will probably arouse some emotion in you and that is your frame and the context you have put this statement .” If you had no opinion on this matter it would mean absolutely nothing to you. a social pressure that says your demeanor is not acceptable at this time. This look puts the person you are interacting with under a different type of pressure to conform. If there were no frames in life then everything you did would be meaningless in a very literal sense. These are all great valuable tools to use when dealing with frames.are you doing??” Now let’s be clear here you do not say this you just send a look that communicates it.

usually if you give a smile you get a smile. If you are a person who practices a frame of scarcity you are constantly in need. This is why going first is always such a helpful tool as well. The second frame you should be interested in practicing is that of the cause versus effect frame. Plain and simple. it makes you more charismatic and that is the world you should desire to be in. They know that there is enough to go around and will be comfortable in what they get because abundance will be returned to them by way of others. They will not lie. they tend to show this in the dignity they display. In essence they will improve others lives as well simply because you will know how to use them and yourself be a happier person making those around you happier to be in your presence. The effect frame is a way of thinking that if only everyone else would fix . This sub-communication will project your frame on to others and they will respond to you in the ways that you are treating them. which usually lies somewhere between the very positive and negative ends of each frame. There is never enough stuff around to satisfy you. There are frames for every interaction you have and those frames can be useful for you in your hypnosis. cheat or steal from you as that is not their standard of living. So a frame is simply a reference that varies with each person that is used to give meaning to the thoughts. If you are a person who takes on a frame of abundance you will likely see it returned to you in the world as well. This happens because once you take on a new frame you will start to sub-communicate that frame on to others. want to listen to you. cheat and steal to get what they want. This is a negative behavior of course and if you act in this way it is what you will get returned to you by the rest of the world. The first frame you should start to practice and make your own is the frame of abundance versus scarcity. A person of abundance has what they need. So what are these frames you should live by? Well there are a few you should really consider making your own. These are frames that will improve your life and the ways in which people respond to you so you should really begin to believe in them and give them a good positive effort. statements and opinions each person has. making them a part of the everyday life you live. Likewise there is no real right or wrong frame only the truth.and probably person into. A frame of scarcity is not one that will elevate you in the standards of others nor is it healthy as it is a very negative way to be. People stuck in this frame will lie. You see the frame you project as your own comes back on you from others as they perceive the frames you are in. A frame of abundance allows others to want to be around you. ideas.

Effect frames are unhealthy because if you really want something in your life to change it is you who must to take charge and make the changes yourself not wish someone else would. in fact if any of these frames are difficult at first you should start by pretending to take on these frames. they simply try to fix them. accept that it is what it is and then ask themselves how can I fix this? The moral of the story here is that most problems that come along in your life are going to be purely coincidental and there are very few instances where another random coincidence will come along to fix said problem. If you subcommunicate this sort of frame people will want to be around you and hear what you have to say. It can really be anything passion. In this frame you are giving your control away. enthusiasm or just nice to be around. a type of respect for the enthusiasm you have for life. If this is difficult at first. A good example of this is if you look at any really successful person you will often notice that they demand a sort of respect that people seem to want to give to them. If you are a person of the cause frame of mind do not blame the world for their problems. Every problem you encounter is never your fault it is always someone else at fault for your misfortunes. The third frame you need to keep in check is a very personal one and that is to be the type of person that others look up to. There is one thing that you must always keep in mind and live by . The more you pretend or practice these frames the more you will start to believe them and become them.themselves you would be much happier. That is because others enjoy being around them. But once you can do this the question remains where to go from here. The fact of the matter is you not only need to know how to put a person into trance but you must also have tools that will assist you in making the changes with in a person to influence their lives. you are relying on others to fix your life when there is no guarantee that they will. The way they do this is they take the problem. they are happier in this persons presence. Take responsibility for the things you want to change in your life and change them. The LIFE Checklist for Better Conversational Hypnosis As a great Conversational Hypnotist you need be able to use your conversations in order to easily put those around you into a trance in order to help them with their problems. You need to take charge and control and fix what you can so you are not dwelling on the problems and waiting on the rest of the world to get its act together to please you. You will soon forget that you are pretending at all and be the embodiment of the things you have set before you here. They think that everything is out of their control and they sub-communicate this very much.

This is simply a short and simple list of items you will keep in your mind to check that you are doing all the necessary steps in your hypnosis sessions. Whatever environment you are in your unconscious should be helping you to grow in the best ways possible with in that environment. if you want to influence a person purposefully you must have one of two goals. To go along with the help you will get from these two formulas the unconscious will be helping you along the way as well. The LIFE Checklist is a way of checking yourself to ensure that you are using your full education to help the person you are working with. . part of its job is to help you to survive and thrive in the world. Now it is a definite plus to have the unconscious mind of your listener on your side but you will also need some tools to go along with that. Aside from the PCAT and COMILA Formulas you can also keep in mind the LIFE Checklist. induction. frames and emotion. The LIFE Checklist is the best way to maximize the hypnotic conversations you are having with your clients. Part of the reason for the a Conversational Hypnotist. the COMILA. post-hypnotic suggestions and everything else you have learned to incorporate into your conversations. The other formula which is the COMILA Formula is to help with the betterment of a person’s future. The second is to assist them into creating a better future for themselves. The first is the PCAT Formula. Your influence as a hypnotist will team up with the unconscious mind to produce the best possible way for the person to thrive in their world. The LIFE Checklist stands for language. future memories. this was developed to help you help people in the area of overcoming problems in their lives. If you incorporate all these items into your hypnotic conversations you will have a positive outcome time and time again. The LIFE Checklist is a tool that you will use along with all your other tools including the PCAT. The first is to help them to overcome or correct some type of problem in their lives. There are ways you can learn to help you to accomplish these two goals. This is a tool that will keep your hypnosis training in check with four simple steps to remember. Now these are formulas that you will learn about more in depth later but for now you need to know that they are there to assist you in these two vital areas of Conversational Hypnosis. Given this job of the unconscious. if you as a Conversational Hypnotist are genuinely attempting to help someone to better their life or a positive result in some way you will have the unconscious mind of that person already on your side.

In this simple model this letter L is simply there to remind you to use all the different language tools you have learned in your training. In this step you will want to check to see that you are using the 4 Stage Protocol. flow and suggestions all in the best possible ways to do with language. The best thing to do here is have a clear picture of the frames you need to set by knowing a specific and pointed outcome you are reaching for. if you have no emotional content in your hypnotic conversation then you will likely be led astray in your communications. Finally the ‘E’ in the LIFE Checklist is for emotion. In this mental process you will want to question things like are you using your tonality. emotion is the sole driver of interaction. This checklist will help you to critique what is happening within the interaction you are having with your listener and correct the things you may be forgetting. Are you using your stories and conversation to evoke some sort of emotional state from the person you are working with? Emotion is very important and powerful. whether it is formal or informal it does not matter as long as you are using one. First you will want to be sure you are using some sort of induction method. In this step you will want to be sure you are setting up the right frames. if you are not you may need to check to see if you really do have an outcome in mind. rhythm. Are you absorbing the attention of your listener? Have you bypassed their critical factor? If so. Going through this list in your head will literally only take you a few moments. . If you aren’t setting up frames you are likely lacking purpose in your conversation. The ‘L’ is for language. seconds really. The ‘I’ in LIFE stands for Induction. it will become a very quick and efficient way to check to see that you are utilizing all your tools in Conversational Hypnosis. Now here this list looks long but once you have the basic knowledge of it. have you received an unconscious response from the person and are you attempting to direct that response to an action? Do you have an outcome or goal set and are you working your way toward it? Next is the ‘F’ and it is for frames. If you have a clear purpose and know exactly what it is you are trying to achieve then your frames will almost come naturally.Now you just need to take a closer look at what each of these means and you will be set to use the LIFE Checklist as soon as you wish. If you session or communication seems to be a little off you can quickly run through the four letters and see what it is you are lacking in your conversation. It is what makes humans do things. If there is no purpose in your conversation then you will also likely babble on and use very poor communication skills. They will be very easy to set up in that you will be communicating very pointedly.

Your job is to get that problem activated. You have probably figured out by now that PCAT stands for four different steps in this formula. the more the problem is avoided the less likely they are to really confront it and find a solution. . Those include problem. In activating the problem you not only provide a place to attach the solution you also set some triggers naturally. When the problem your subject is having starts to begin being a problem. When you activate the problem inside the head then the neurology starts to light up this makes it possible for the solution and problem to find one another and get together inside the mind. well problems are closely related to both of those items. This is here simply to remind you that in order to use this formula.The PCAT Formula for Helping People Make Changes with Hypnosis Conversational Hypnosis is an art for helping others to live happier. or get past a hurdle in their lives. One of the most convenient aspects of the PCAT Formula is that it can be used in almost any conversation. This is helpful in that many times in normal everyday conversations you will be talking to a friend. active solution and transform. The PCAT Formula is a simple formula that you can use in any conversation to assist in making a change in the person you are talking to. It is used for many different reasons but the base of those reasons is to overcome a hard time. These are all things you will need to involve to help the person you are talking to resolve whatever it is that is holding them back. You can give out all the solutions you want but it the person you are talking to has not recognized or brought up the problem itself there will be nothing to put that solution with. conflict. client or family member and they will automatically tell you about what it is that is limiting them in their lives and then you can go to work undetected. if the solution is already sitting around waiting for it there will be an attachment of the problem and solution before the problem becomes so big that it is overwhelming. The ‘P’ in PCAT signifies problem. in order to you to solve a persons problem they must have a problem. It is very simple to transition from a normal everyday conversation into the PCAT Formula. If your listener has brought their problem to light then there is something to trigger that the solution you are offering is connected to the problem at hand. You have heard about neurology and how it fires up when we experience an emotion or have an experience. healthier and overall better lives. One of the tools that you can use to help people to do this is called the PCAT Formula. making it a meaningless interaction as far a solving the problem goes.

The next step in the PCAT Formula is the ‘C’ and it initializes Confusion. There are three reasons for confusion. When you are working on activating the problem with someone it is important to remember that this is not a way of re-traumatizing them.A simple word of caution before we move on to the letter ‘C’. they will move their mind in a different direction to avoid further confusion. you can bring that solution to light with these different strategies. The second reason for confusion is that it will often induce a trance all by itself. either an emotion or feeling. Usually bringing a problem to light is not a problem as most problems will naturally come up in conversation. but it can really be anything. You see when you have a problem there is a pattern created and you simply move in that pattern over and over again not knowing how to break it because you don’t know how to solve the problem. offers them an escape route of clarity that they will be anxious to hold on to and bypasses the critical factor so you have a stronger impact with the suggestions you leave them with. This means the person you are talking to will do all the work for this step you just need to be able to recognize that the problem is there and take that cue to move into the PCAT Formula. . make it into little pieces this will break down the pattern and leave you with something to rebuild with later. and we will go into that in a moment. This is always good as you will experience less resistance from the person you are working with and you solutions will be able to make it in and stick to the problem. so their unconscious door is cracked open a bit to let the solution in to attach to the problem. You will most often find that the solution is a type of state. The next step in the PCAT Formula is the ‘A’ and it signifies to activate a solution. Confusion is an alarming state for people and they will unknowingly look to escape it. All these parts of confusion are very important because in essence when you put it all together confusion breaks the cycle of the pattern. break up the problem to cause confusion in the pattern. In confusion you are going to get in and start to break up the problem. builds the potential for response. you only need to bring the problem to mind so they know what you are talking about. Confusion in this instance is to help the person you are dealing with to get out of the problem pattern. This is good because it offers you the chance to pave the escape route with the solution you are offering. The third reason for confusion is that it bypasses your foe the critical factor. Now there are different strategies for activating the solution that your conscious mind will be already searching for. the first one is what you just read.

You can use all your different story telling skills to activate the solution. Imagination and visualization are powerful tools that will help to show your subject the way to resolution.The first activation strategy is that of reframe. Tell a story about what someone else did. This is the tool that will assist you in actually attaching the problem to the solution. This is done in a dreamlike unconscious state that you are guiding them through. . You can use a reframe to activate a solution. This is simple. this will bring that experience and state up in the person you are talking to. The next activation strategy is to find past experience. Finally the ‘T’ in the PCAT Formula stands for transform. This is a basic combination step. or what you may have done. in a way they tell you how to solve their dilemma and you help them to put that into action by installing the future memory as if it were a true event. The third activation strategy is emotional triggers. How to Use Future Memories in Hypnosis In Conversational Hypnosis the term future memories is a useful and important principal. This is yet another powerful and very useful tool that will assist you in creating resolutions to the problems that the people around you are experiencing. This will not only bring to mind different solutions used in the past but also behaviors that may be helpful that they haven’t actually attached to their problem. When you use all these steps together correctly they will help your subject to find and apply the solutions that are needed to create a positive change in their lives. you will take the problem that you have identified and match it up with the solutions you have been implying through out the entire process. this will mean they are searching for the answer to their problem themselves. Future memories can help a person set out how they would realistically handle the problem that they are experiencing. Put the solutions in with their problem and get them combined this will offer the answer to their problem and they will attach together. This is a simple way of making the person imagine what it is they need to do. The final activation strategy is that of visualization. The second activation strategy is to use your stories. you have learned all about how to reframe a person so here is your chance to put that into action. The emotional triggers can be used to take your listener back in time to a place where they felt powerful or they were experiencing an emotion that will be helpful in activating the solution now. This is where you can guide the unconscious mind on a mission to go through the mind and look for similar past experiences.

Milton Erickson was a big fan of future memories. In the idea of direct suggestions you can use it in a very direct . The process of future memories lay the path to the solution which will come in your suggestions to the unconscious can take action on the false memory and make it a real memory. but can be very useful when you are unsure of how to proceed with a particular person and their problem. There are some specific skills that you can use in order to apply the concept of future memories. You have read about this several times and you know how to tell great stories already so this should be an easy concept to apply. Erickson was basically getting an overview of how to solve the problem straight from the person with the problem themselves. Use a story or set of stories to bring a future memory into the unconscious of the person you are working with. The first future memory tactic is to use your story telling skills in order to get what you want. Future memories are a way that the hypnotist can create an imagined future and then lead the person to it by way of formatting the unconscious mind with the right steps to take. In doing this Dr. In this hypnosis he would propel them into the future where their problem was already solved and then simply ask them what they did to solve the problem. direct suggestions and leading questions. Part of this is simply because the problems have not been attached to the solutions that you have from other experiences that you will recall more clearly in a well led hypnosis. The second tactic for future memories is to use direct suggestions. Future memories are a sneaky sort of way in finding out how to resolve an issue or set of issues that a person is having. This is again something you have been doing and learning all along through your training in Conversational Hypnosis. The three skills that you will involve in these processes are stories.Another way to look at future memories is that it is a point in the middle between the PCAT Formula and the suggestions you will drop in for the actual resolution of the problem. It is a very powerful tool that you should learn to use well as it will help you in your practices. After have attained the information of how they imagined they had overcome their problems he would simply use that as the plan of action to conquer the problem and work it into the suggestion phases of their sessions. Dr. He would often take the clients that he was unsure of how to help and move them into an altered state of mind. You may be wondering how the unconscious mind knows how to solve the problem yet has not put that into action yet. The fact that they are essentially coming up with the answers to their problems themselves is a little like cheating.

Your descriptions and language needs to create a clear future memory so that it is clear when it is accessed. These are very powerful suggestions that will give you the . Now the more you work with future memories the more you will begin to realize that it is better to offer many different solutions rather than just one. the more curious you seem about the future and how the problem will be solved the more interested and curious the listener will be. Make your memories believable and attainable. but there is really only one choice to choose from. Future memories should seem like real memories to the person you are working with. As you get good at this you can include double binds in the process so the person feels they are getting different options. The only catch with any of these is you must first be sure to get your subject into a future state of mind or the memory won’t really be a future memory. The final tactic that you will want to apply in using future memories is to ask leading questions. Remember you are outlining how to solve the problem. How to Use Post Hypnotic Suggestions in Hypnosis Post hypnotic suggestions are the next tool in line for you to add to your set of skills in Conversational Hypnosis. Some good examples are ‘what would it be like if…’ or ‘imagine what has happened after this is solved’ and finally ‘what happens when…’ These are all questions that will take your listener into the future and get them to start visualizing how things will look when the problem is solved and how they may go about getting to that point. these are ‘as if’ questions. The only catch is they haven’t quite taken place yet. You will want to use questions that are phrased in a certain way. These are simply questions that will lead the person into the future and get them to thinking about how they would or how they could handle the problem. If you can estimate that in a year this will all be resolved then ask them how things will be or seem a year from now. most problems will have more than one way to resolve and giving options will better the chances for choice and success. The language patterns here are all going to get your subject oriented toward the future. You can also use a still direct but less direct approach of techniques such as the ‘my friend John/Jane’ to call to mind a future memory. a regular memory is not going to be something they could never do as it is by definition something they have already done or accomplished.manner such as first getting them into the future then simply stating the memory or suggesting it. You can use techniques that will also look back on the problem from a time when you know it will have already been solved. You should also use curiosity to your advantage. As you use future memories it is important to keep in mind to use your sensory rich language as much as possible.

a trigger. they may show great willpower and resolve for a few weeks. A great example of this is when a person stops using an addictive substance. What post hypnotic suggestions can do for you and your subject is to access a behavior when it is demanded. The ex-smoker may be able to fight off the urge at first but over time the unconscious takes over and the urge becomes more powerful than the will to continue on the path of not smoking. . This is a prime example of a self induced post hypnotic suggestion. This is to select a trigger. The first condition that must be set is to make a suggestion of behavior. If you remember the ethical code within each person is unbreakable and post hypnotic suggestions are not a secret tool that will cause a person to do anything and everything you say if your intentions are not true and good. you will not be able to program a person to do deeds that are against their ethical code. what is the reason that the person is so willed to do whatever the post hypnotic suggestion is? Well there are a few things happening that will clear this all up for you. and then the action that goes along with it is performed. such as alcohol or cigarettes. When they are put in a situation where they would normally have a cigarette. The fact of ethical constraint still remains. a thought occurs. Now these are very powerful but they are not a hypnotic device to think of as magical or all powering. After you have selected and suggested the behavior you want to take place in the future you will need to set condition number two. their willpower dissolves and they return to the habit. By knowing how this works you will be able to attain the same accomplishment in setting a successful post hypnotic suggestion. You will need to create a triggering point something that will set off that future behavior when the time is right. A smoker for example will quit smoking. let’s say a night out with drinks and other smokers. This happens as you use a trance to suggest a behavior that will take place when a specific trigger goes off in the person’s mind. you do not want your listener to start clucking about immediately after you suggest the action. The natural way the mind remembers to do a thing. This is not stage hypnotism. This tool is successful and powerful in the nature that it works in the same ways in which your unconscious mind works. When you suggest a behavior or action it will be one that you want to take place in the future. Post hypnotic suggestions are used to get things done when they need to be done without the hypnotist’s presence.ability to place a suggestion of a behavior or action that will take place whether you are present or not. Now you will want to take a look at why this happens. Often they will find that their willpower is in check until they are reunited with situations in which the addictive substance was involved in.

This bypassing of the consciousness will ultimately compel the person to do the action regardless of the resistance they may display initially. As you make the suggestion in trance when the time is right for the action to take place the person will partially slip back into the trance that it was suggested in. Finally. Always be attentive to the state of mind you are creating and the action of the suggestion you are placing. Once you have mastered all these conditions you will use the COMILA Formula to complete the entire process from beginning to end. The ethical code can not be broken. If you do not do bypass the consciousness then the probability that the conscious mind will interfere with the action taking place is much greater. If you exercise the ethics of a win/win situation you will have a vast amount of success with post hypnotic suggestions. This is important because you must really pay attention to the trigger you are setting for this whole process to work correctly. So you become very aware of how powerful they are as well as how important they are in your practices as a Conversational Hypnotist. The actual post hypnotic suggestion is of something that will take place in the future regardless of whether or not the hypnotist is present. This brings us to the attention that must be involved when you are designing your post hypnotic suggestions. How to Install a Post Hypnotic Suggestion It is important to point out the vast importance of post hypnotic suggestions. many before you have tried and to attempt it yourself will simply be a waste of your time. Condition number three is to bypass the consciousness.Now that you have selected a behavior and a trigger to set off that behavior in the future you are ready to continue on with condition number three. This is the nature of the unconscious mind. So your trigger essentially must be one that will set off the state of trance that was involved when the trigger was set. don’t smoke that cigarette’. post hypnotic suggestion are only tools to use in a situation that will be positive for you and your listener. otherwise the trigger will not successfully trigger the correct suggestion. is activated. A post hypnotic suggestion is a suggestion that calls for an action when a certain behavior. much like the compulsion to smoke the cigarette even though logic says ‘you’ve made it this far. . You will only cause harm if you try to use it for unethical purposes. it really relates back to the access state principal as well. again this must be emphasized. It will make the suggestion of the action a compulsive one. or trigger. Bypassing consciousness is going to create the urge to do the behavior.

After you induce a trance you are going to suggest a behavior. While you are seeding these ideas you will more than likely do it through stories either about yourself or others. You will also want to include things that will motivate the listener to respond to the new behavior. As you use an open ended question or statement it leaves room for the person it is directed at to imply certain things as well as fill in the blanks. This is the action or signal to the person that they will use in the future to put the post hypnotic suggestion into action. there are different aspects to this first step that we will review more in depth when we get to the COMILA Formula. a dog barking. often more fully than they would if it were not an open ended question or statement. really whatever you want that will signify the right time to put your suggestion into action. You want the listener to simply assume from your language that it is inevitable that the behavior will happen and therefore the only question left is when. You will seed ideas about the behaviors you are suggesting to your listener. Suggesting behaviors is often done well when you use open ended questions or statements. Now in this step you also need to remember to set a trigger for the listener. at this point it can be a series of options of triggers. The first step in placing a post hypnotic suggestion is to induce a trance.The protocol for how to use a post hypnotic suggestion is a page right out of Dr. In the meantime just know you must first induce a trance. Milton Erickson’s book. As you get more into the depth of the ideas and behaviors you will slowly present them as things your listener should consider doing. in this you can use motivators like their beliefs and values. Other helpful skills and tools in the behavior suggestion phase are to use frames and presuppositions to imply or assume certain things. This is the second step in the post hypnotic suggestion process. His instruction for using post hypnotic protocol was very similar to all that you are about to read. . As you induce this trance you will want to concentrate on giving the unconscious many different options about how to do things. Suggesting a behavior can be a very direct thing or you can do it more covertly. not if it will happen. so to speak. In this step you will use the seeding of ideas skills you learned quite some time ago. especially as you are starting out. You want them to tell you when something will happen. Anything can really be a trigger. Covert and indirect will give you the best results. a light turning on or off. When you do this you are also going to be bypassing some resistance because you are implying a thing. a door shutting. Another aspect of your training you will want to incorporate in the trance stage is to use your framing to get the right state for what you are attempting to accomplish.

smarter or what have you. Fractionating. Some ways to create amnesia are to tell stories and use nested loops. it is a type of side effect of hypnosis. The third step in the post hypnotic suggestion is to create some amnesia. You are creating a trance on both sides of the suggestion and sealing the top with amnesia so there is no escape for the suggestions you are planting. Remember that there is a certain amount of amnesia that will naturally take place simply because you are using a trance process. You do things to improve yourself. is when you continuously take a person in and out of trance. or you can say. The other reason to do this is just because it is a nice thing to do for the person you are helping. ‘it may or may not happen when’. stronger. The more options for trigger points you allow the more likely it is that they will be unable to resist putting the suggestion into action. use a language pattern and change the topic as you are talking. This is much like using the two different trance processes in nested loops. ‘you will do this when’. it will feel more natural to your listener when the triggers compel them into action. The fourth step is to return to the original trance you started with. You can say. This is something you have read about already and you will know how to do. This will be expounded upon if you are using fractionation as well. This is a little bonus for both you and the subject. People are more apt to do a thing if the believe it will make them better. By building up and working on their self esteem they will correlate the suggestion and behaviors with words that make them feel good about themselves. Finally the fifth and last step in the post hypnotic suggestion process is to build up the listeners self esteem. This will happen because one of the many triggers will retain the majority of the resistance while the others still allow the action to take place.Even though you will be giving you listener a list or set of options for triggers you will still want to make one of them a clear trigger point. if you remember. Amnesia is an important part of the post hypnotic suggestion process because it will in a way hide your suggestion so the listener is not too in tune to it. You can be as direct or indirect as you want about the different triggers you are suggesting. Once the suggestions are deeply embedded it is fine for the person to realize where they came from but in the beginning there can be resistance and then your suggestion is less likely to be put into action so storing it away with amnesia is a perfect camouflage in the meantime. Another reason to give many different trigger options is that it will make the action you suggest seem more like a part of their everyday life. This icing keeps the unconscious coming back for more cake. like a little icing on the cake. it makes listening to you a more rewarding experience. The COMILA Formula for Motivation and Influence with Hypnosis .

An example of this would be if you want a person to be excited about a thing and they are actually depressed when you tell them. money. This is because the state of the person is simply wrong. The actions you are suggesting to a person have all sorts of obstacles that can get in the way of the action actually being carried out. It all depends on the person it is pertaining to. If you recall the access state principal in which you must be in a certain mood or state to access certain behaviors. material objects or self satisfaction. maybe the punishment isn’t severe enough. physical pain. There are instances when you will need to do more as you are experiencing more resistance than usual. There are some ways to medicate the problem of motivation in a person. Some people are motivated because the reward is big enough to accomplish the task at hand. If you work to change the mood of the person you will change their state in doing this you will likely get a better response in the actions you are soliciting from your listener.The post hypnotic suggestion protocol is a great way to influence a person hypnotically to give you an action at any given point and time that is initiated by a specific trigger or set of triggers. pleasure and pain. there are times when other factors get in the way of the suggestions you are making. It is also important to understand that there are two different types of motivation. Maybe the payoff isn’t big enough. However. Most people in the world will fall in the middle of this spectrum some pleasure will be enough and some pain will be enough to motivate them. emotional trauma or a blow to the self esteem. This means that a person is not doing something you are suggestion for a lack of motivation. To be depressed because you just suffered a loss and to go to instant excitement that a friend passed the bar exam is a big leap for anyone. This is a great accomplishment as well as a vast amount of power and it would be nice to say that it works every time without fail. you may not achieve the excitement you were looking for. The state of a person will have a vast amount of determination on whether or not you can motivate a person into action. Now pleasure and pain can be anything from the rewards of health. On the other hand there are people who could care less about the rewards and would be more motivated by avoiding a type of pain. The COMILA Formula is a set of concepts that will lead you to using motivation to get . This is where the COMILA Formula that you have heard from time to time comes in. Once you have the right mood in a person it will be much easier to get the response you want from them. The same goes for pain it can be debt. One of these interferences is the problem of motivation.

stories. You are looking to set triggers to motivate your subject . assumptions and so on to bypass the critical factor in a person. The fifth step in COMILA is the ‘L’ and it is short for linking the action from a person. Another skill you have learned in the area of mood changing is to use emotional triggers. many different ways to do this with confusion. You must be able to bypass the critical factor in order to reduce and eliminate the resistance if you want to see your suggestions in action. ‘M’ in COMILA is for mood changes. The more intense the state the better your chances of cooperation and non resistance. one you just read and that is the concept of pleasure and pain. After you have found the state you need. loop through a few times and really create the intense state that will best suit your purpose. Again this is a very popular topic that you have been learning about from the beginning of your hypnosis studies. The first is whether they are motivated by pleasure or pain and the second is what state they need to be in to initiate the behavior you are asking for. Next step is the ‘I’ and it is to intensify the mood. You must have the ability to captivate the listener’s attention to get the behaviors and responses you are seeking. Once you know what motivates the person you are working with to change things you can alter their mood using either the pleasure or pain and create the mood you are in need of to set a suggestion. The next letter is the ‘O’ and it is to outflank resistance. You have learned many. All the excuses that a person will give as to why they may not be motivated to do a thing all stem from their resistance. This should be something you are both familiar with and good at by now. If you do not link the mood do a trigger you will only have the desired response while you are motivating the person yourself. You have learned several ways to change the mood of a person. As we just talked about previously in this article you must have the right mood to have the right attitude in a person. You must use them. It is a corner stone of Conversational Hypnosis and is the easiest way to influence another person. the idea of intensifying that state as much as possible is best. There is the chance that you will have to work at this a bit in order to get the right intensity. Let’s define each part of COMILA so you may get a grasp on what it entails. There are essentially two things you need to know in changing a person’s mood. Once you have discovered the answers to these two questions you will be able to create the best environment to extract the behavior you are seeking. If you reward or give consequence to a person they will usually be motivated to change their mood. The ‘C’ in COMILA is for captivating attention.

This is where most hypnotists go wrong. you must have your trigger set so the action will fire and take place while you are in Italy. All these are important parts of the hypnotic process and will be valuable in accomplishing your goals. The question now is how do they look when they are in use. All people. or the bathroom. they go for the big firecracker right off the bat. state and post hypnotic suggestion the rest of the events will likely follow smoothly and naturally. offer you a place to leave your suggestions and create amnesia. But starting with the smallest request saved you a lot of time and frustration. You don’t just tell them to feed the dog. getting it right is important. This is what will begin the sequence of behaviors you are setting within the unconscious. bypass their critical factor. This is it the climax you have been waiting for. Choosing the right action is vital. After they see the bowl they will generally put together the rest of the sequence of what you are asking. Finally the ‘A’ in COMILA is for action. Once this is done because you have previously set up the embedded suggestions. The action is the releasing of the behavior. The best way to choose the right trigger is to take a look at the little things. middle and end of a sequence rather than having to sort the whole thing out alone.the five stories Nested loops are very important to your Conversational Hypnosis. The general structures of all four types of nested loops from basic to master level are important to your hypnosis. When you link the mood to a trigger then the action can take place when you are in the bathroom or in Italy. two year olds and up will have an easier time taking in the beginning. you may even have to point it out to them. They will be a part of you hypnosis that if used correctly will help you to draw in your subject. it doesn’t matter because the trigger is not motivating the person. or a bathroom in Italy. . Think of instructing a two year old. who knows what will happen if you say that! You start by telling them to get the dogs bowl. Throughout this process you have used your states and suggestions to set up the chain of action that will fire once the right trigger is set. A very important step as if you don’t do this you will have worked real hard for nothing.when you are not around therefore you must link the mood to a trigger which is linked to a behavior. How to Design Nested Loops and Hypnotic Stories Part One. The secret here is to aim at asking for the smallest step in the chain of events that will lead a person in the direction you want. The action step in COMILA is the most important and often the one that most hypnotists mess up.

The reason for keeping your very first story one that can be conversational goes for any type of story you choose to tell first and that is you want an easy start. The fourth story in the five story loop you are working with here will be a fairy tale. this can change as you go through your nested loop as you can build loops inside of loops but after you reach the suggestion and trance process phase you will not be adding any more stories. The five types of stories will be first a very short example. An anecdote is a story that is a true life event that happened to you but with more story telling aspects to it than the previous story. the listener knows they are hearing a story but it is interesting and something they would normally hear in an every day conversation. This is a story that has all the specific characteristics of a real story. It can be an example of how to tell a story or something that happened to you at the grocery store. You also want to use a short story that is true because it will make an impact on the do you go from knowing what the structure looks like to actually constructing it yourself? That is what you will be taking a look at here. You will learn how to create a five story nested loop because it is important to know the different types of stories and what they can accomplish for you in a set of nested loops. you don’t want them to feel overloaded. how to combine all the tools you have learned in the area of nested loops to build a nested loop and know the process of doing so. In this article you will be looking at the construction of a nested loop with five stories in it. When you hear an anecdote you will immediately recognize it as a story because there are some story characteristics built in to it. It will display that there is no question about the fact that it is an invented story that has been made up and told as a story. Fairy tales are great stories to use. It will never present itself in a way that can be interpreted any other way than it is a story. how did things happen. almost everyone can relate to them on some level . what were the causes and effects within the story. there is a comfort in that. The third story you will use in this nested loop will be what is called a direct story. you want your story short so the listener is really drawn in to it without getting too much. The second story you will use for this example is an anecdote. The important thing to do with this first story is to keep it short and conversational. where were they. You use more of the sensory rich descriptions to set an entire scene. The reasons for this are two fold. this will be a true life story from your experiences. yet. who was there. Because you are limited there it is a good idea to start out with a rough idea of how many stories you will be including. The first step that you will want to consider is how many stories you will be using. This is a smooth way to flow into all your stories.

you have worked up to the longest story making each one before it shorter and because of this it is easy to follow your lead and keep an uninterrupted flow. the third story around the same length as the second. You can also change stories. Finally the fifth story in this nested loop instruction will be another type of direct story. Because fairy tales are so familiar to most people they will in a way start to form a trance for the person simply because of the type of story it is. the fourth story will be longer than the all the preceding stories and the fifth story will be the longest of the whole bunch. As you decide to tell fairy tales you must always remember to shape them in a way that targets the adult audience if that is who you are working with. In the five stories you have above to use in your nested loop you will notice that naturally as you tell these stories in order the length of them will be important. So now you have your five stories to use in the actual construction of your nested loop. You can tell a hybrid of the genuine story and the made up story. But it can also have fictional counterparts added in.What to do with the five stories Now you have your five stories and you need to know what to do with them. These are simply good examples to get some ideas and thoughts flowing through your head. make it customized for you listener so you can really pull the emotion or state you are looking for from them. you don’t want them to feel weird or out of place listening to a ‘child’s story’. You will want to use a series of types of stories that best serves the purpose of your hypnosis session. Stories like this can be easily turned into completely direct stories or anecdotes too. For this instruction you will make your first story very short. problem or occasion your client is dealing with. This is one natural way of drawing your listener in. You have read and been told that a story can last a few minutes or hours upon hours. They do not have to be told in this order nor do . The fairy tale will bring a childhood comfort to your listener because they have been conditioned through out life to hear fairy tales and know how to listen to them. Part Two. a story teller for example that is obviously a fictional character. the second short but a bit longer than the first. you don’t always have to tell the story the same. Remember the five stories you are using are merely examples when you come to the point of constructing your own nested loops you will choose stories that fit the event. This can be a direct story in the sense that it is a true event with story characteristics that are recognizable to your listener. It is important to remember that the types of stories here are not set in stone.because most people grew up listening to them.

you will want to break up the rigid schedule of the regular nested loop. which you will read about in a little bit. This will keep the flow for when you close these remaining four stories. less mundane and rigid. Now as you get to story four you will do something new that is a refinement on how to use a nested loop. you will tell completely. Story four. there will be a connection for the mind between story three and five. The next step will be for you to start to create your own nested loops and you will need some pointers in how to design and create the stories so you can serve the purpose you are trying to serve. . Designing your loop in this fashion with a mini loop within it will make your nested loops more interesting. the fairy tale. After that you will start to tell the endings to your stories in the reverse order. You can do this because as you are working with the master level of loops. Now you come to the space where you will leave your suggestion and use your trance process. It will add some color and a little gratification for your listener when they get some resolution to the fourth story before the entire nested loop is completed. You will use the same type of structure as you have learned on how to use nested loops. then story three (because story four is already a complete entity). first story five. as you are here. Now you have completed your nested loop and you can see how it all works together. You will begin and end it as if you were just telling a normal story without stopping 80% of the way through. this is common among storytellers in that your audience will finally get a resolution to something. In doing this you are creating a loop inside of your nested loops. and then story three. It may not be a complete resolution as you still have three other stories open but this mini loop will become a closed up loop within the structure of the bigger nested loop picture. then story two and finally story one. After you tell story four completely you will transition with a hard or soft loop as you will do between all your stories and move back into a piece of story three then into the beginning of story five.they have to be the same types of stories as long as you put thought into the reasons why you are choosing the stories you are choosing. This is called a mini loop. So now you will get into the structure and sequence of the stories you have as well as how to choose the stories you will use once you start to construct nested loops without an example. you don’t always have to do this but it is an option you can keep in mind as you construct your loops. It will be more natural if you open and close some loops with in. Because it is story four and it is somewhere in the middle you are not hindering the amnesia that will eventually be created by closing the other four stories in reverse. then move to story two. You will begin with story one tell it partially.

This specific nested loop was created with the third story in mind first and then the two stories were added to the beginning to make the introduction to the third story more flowing. the true experience. all the while still bringing in topics within those first two stories that were both applicable and helpful. Know what it is you want to embed inside you listener before you get to the big bombshell of open space. The second story was created because of the first story as a second lead in. You want stories that you can mold in order to produce different state and extract different emotions from your listeners. It is not the only way of course and you will grow into what works best for you. This should at least give you a starting point until you refine the selection and sequencing processes that work best for you personally. really any of the principals you have learned to get the listener all drawn in and tied up in your stories. rapport hooks. Another thing you will want to do with your stories as you create a stock of them is to make them adaptable. As you start to create new stories and select the stories you will use you want to keep a theme in your mind. was added to create a smooth and flowing conversational beginning to the nested loop. You want to be sure to add other Conversational Hypnosis aspects to these stories as you create them. ones you find personal value in. When you are using some stories you find personal value in that also fit the context in which you are working they will be beneficial for both of you. Remember you always want to go first in the state you wish to project onto and bring out of your subject. The first story. This is one of the best ways to select and construct stories for your nested loops. seeding. They will be able to fit the different environments and circumstances presented to you by the clients you are working with. one more useful pillow to cushion the way into the third story. Adaptable stories will make your job as a hypnotist easier in the fact that you will have certain stories you can use for many different purposes. the piggy back principal. Use ambiguity to make the themes less obvious but still apparent to the unconscious so you listener takes one thing from the meaning they consciously hear and a completely different thing from the interpretations of the unconscious. suggestions and trance processes. How to Use the PCAT Formula in Hypnotic Stories . It is also important as you construct your nested loops and choose the stories you will use to have a stock of stories you really love.When you begin to design your nested loops and the stories with in you will not always start with the first story.

In this step you will use several different methods in order to confuse the person you are working with so you can get into the realm of their unconscious. It will be valuable in improving your Conversational Hypnosis because it will assist you in being a better story teller. These two levels of confusion will begin to break the problem down into pieces that are easier to manipulate and work with. To really improve your skills as a hypnotic story teller you must first know all the steps and how to use the PCAT Formula. By getting involved in a general orientation you are establishing the beginnings of rapport and setting up the framework to correct the problem or make the change they are looking for. . Just like in your stories and nested loops you need to determine the outcome that will grow from the work you are doing with an individual. get to know the person you are working with and find out about the problem they are attempting to change. In this step you will use your second story to begin to activate solutions to the problem. Use one of your first stories to bring this problem up and focus on it a little with either a direct or indirect approach. You will also use embedded suggestions and the questions of what the problem really means. You will do this by first setting the parameters with the person you are working with. this is mainly to ensure that everything flows together nicely. This entails a time of orientation. The fourth step is to activate a resource or resources. As you begin the use of the PCAT Formula you will want to use your stories to get the problem activated within the person you are working with. so it is not noticeable that you were using confusion for a specific reason and then just quit. confuse.The PCAT Formula will become a valuable and useful tool for you to utilize once you have practiced and are aware of how to use it in your hypnosis. It will assist most in improving an area of their lives such as becoming better at a thing or changing something about themselves. You will use ambiguity in your language to confuse the conscious and send alternate messages and meanings to the unconscious mind. You will often still use a bit of the same confusion you were using in step three. As you know the PCAT Formula is most often used to create personal change in a person. The next step will be to cause some confusion. This will also allow you to move fluidly into the last step of the PCAT Formula. After you have gotten a general orientation and are ready to move on the next step will be the actual problem. The best way to use this formula is to begin by knowing the change you are attempting to achieve. access resources and transform. The PCAT Formula stands for problem.

Here you will begin your hypnotic induction. This is part of activating resources in the way as the induction is used to go within the person and really locate the resources you will need for the change to occur. You will focus on using words repetitively that will draw the attention and instruct the unconscious mind. The best way to break down the activation of resources is to think of it in layers that you will begin to slowly lay on top of your subject. The first of those layers is going to be to get them to relax and take it easy. You will begin a trace process in which relaxation and taking it easy are the common themes. As you do this these words will begin to become emotional triggers that will start to activate the very resources you are looking for. The second layer in this step is to begin seeding ideas to your listener. There are two purposes to this layer and they are to first extract a matching experience from your listener which will cause anticipation to build within them. The second purpose is to be giving clues as to where the solution they are looking for is going to come from. This will become your embedded suggestion, you will embed the core concepts of the idea behind the problem you are attempting to solve. The third resource layer you will add to this list of refinements will be to get inspired when you are going to tell your stories. Really be excited to give the stories you have chosen to your listener, and always go first. The fourth and final layer here will be to include an isomorphic metaphor in your series of stories. An allegory or isomorphic metaphor is a story in which the story itself mirrors the experiences your listener has in relation to the structure of the story you are telling. The person you are telling the story to should see some type of resemblance in the story to the ways in which they need to work to create the changes they are searching for. This is a conclusion they will draw from the unconscious interpretations of your stories, part of the wonder behind stories is that your subjects will never be told exactly what they mean the listener is left to decide for themselves about the meanings. Now this may sound like the person may take the incorrect or wrong meaning from a story right? Well the truth of the matter is that as long as you are good at constructing your stories they will get the right meaning one way or another. The conscious mind will create a meaning for the story but the unconscious mind will make more sense of it than the conscious will. Even when the conscious mind has exhausted all meanings and possibilities the unconscious mind will continue to grow and define the meanings found within the stories. Finally you will move on to the last step in the PCAT Formula which is to transform. In this step of PCAT you will continue to layer in resources that will assist in the

transformation. The first of those layers is to embed suggestions. These are going to be very direct suggestions for the point of the actual transformation. When embedding these suggestions you will use a soft language that is almost friendly and coaxing. You will also want to provide some instruction to your unconscious as to where to find the inspiration it is looking for to carry out the transformation. You will be amazed as to how much your unconscious mind will carry you through these stories, even making them up on the spot at times. One last thing you should include in your story telling and the transformation step is to use parallel processes. This is a form of story that will tell the unconscious mind what to do and where to go but to the conscious mind it sounds as if were just another part of the story you are telling. You will use this to achieve deeper meanings in the stories you tell. You can use it to display one deeper meaning to the unconscious or many depending on the story and the outcome you are attempting to achieve. Now you have completed the PCAT Formula and you are ready to bring your subject out of trance. As you do this you will want to set in some future memories about how this will all play out for the person you are hypnotizing. The future memories and compliments you set at the end will be motivators and will show the unconscious a memory that it will strive to bring to life for the person in hypnosis. A Step by Step Guide to Mastering Conversational Hypnosis One of the first things to remember before you dive into this overview is that Conversational Hypnosis is a very complex and highly sophisticated art. There will be many pieces for you to master as you continue through the articles. You must be sure to take the time to truly master each step before moving on to the next step. If you do this through out you will find that putting the puzzle together will come much more naturally. As you learn each step fully you will then be ready to add the refinements and additional concepts found in the next step. Remember that feeling overwhelmed and awkward at first with this amount of information will be natural, but you will soon see that you probably already have most of the steps down and they just need to be fine tuned through a bit more concentration and practice. Through out this article and the following articles you will be making every piece of Conversational Hypnosis a completely natural process, you will know it well enough that it will come spontaneously and easily. As you do this you will be adding other pieces that will all fit together to create a beautiful hypnotic flow of language and become a master of Conversational Hypnosis. When you come upon steps that you are having troubles with you will want to return to those articles and reread and more fully embody the information there. After you understand it and can practice it comfortably you will be ready to move forward.

If you do not take care of the pieces that need your attention as the present themselves you will have problems fitting all the pieces together in the end. So take the time to really understand and accomplish each set of steps before you move on. This is an overview of the nine steps in mastering Conversational Hypnosis; you will have a more in depth look at each step in future articles this is to get you prepared for the journey ahead. Step one in mastering Conversational Hypnosis is really the foundation of your education. This step includes all the concepts that will hold your hypnosis together. In this step you will learn to use your linguistic bridges, the purest of language. You will begin to combine those with precision language including hot words and amplification languages. You will also start to incorporate ambiguous messages and confusion languages. This will be done with other language skills you have learned such as shock and surprise and tension release cycles. All this language will come together to complete step one of the nine step process in mastering Conversational Hypnosis. In the second step of the nine step process you will simply be adding to the concepts in the first step. In this step you will be creating the right environment, a hypnotic atmosphere. The tools you will use in order to seduce people into trance will include going beyond rapport using status, wide rapport, rapport hooks, fractionate rapport as well as instant rapport techniques. As you incorporate all these things you will also be adding in all you have learned about signal recognition. Using signal recognitions will include using a heightened state of awareness. Tonality will be added to this as well using ‘going first’, squeezing the meaning from your words and command tonalities. Finally you will add in the authority strategies by using power tactics, agreement tactics and persistence tactics. All of these powerful skills will come together to create the type of atmosphere you need for whatever hypnotic interaction you are attempting to achieve. In step three you will be refining your process by adding in the element of solidarity. You will do this by again taking from the skills you have learned and adding them to the big picture we are creating as an entire process. This will come in the inductions you have learned. You will begin to add in the hypnotic gaze induction using the 4 Stage Protocol. This will also include all aspects that you learned with the hypnotic gaze; holding the gaze, lowering your tone, focusing through your listener and describing the trance experience. You will also refine the process by making everything more indirect. You will do this using concepts you have learned including the ‘my friend John/Jane’ and extended

quotes techniques. All these concepts will come together to add a solid effect to your hypnotic interactions. In step four of the nine steps you will be introducing the next induction, the piggy back induction. In this induction you will be using multiple topics, yes sets and piggy back suggestions. You will continue with making the induction more indirect by way of hypnotic themes, moving the focus from the external to the internal as well as mind reads. This step is very important as the piggy back induction is a powerful and important part of your hypnosis after you learn it well you will move on to step five in the nine step process. Step five is adding yet another induction, the trance voice induction. This will include creating trance voices that include conscious and unconscious voices and multiple hypnotic voices. From there you will move on to add the embedding of multiple levels of suggestion by way of all three inductions and including different trance themes within each. As all the steps come together and become a natural part of your hypnotic process you will be ready to move on to step six. In this next step, step six you will be refining the process even further using stories and sensory rich descriptions to layer in your suggestions and trance themes. You will do this using sensory rich descriptions, stacked realities and the learned story skills you have taken from your studies. You will also use this step to embed suggestions using ambiguous messages both directly and indirectly. After the mastery of step six you will move on to step seven which will start to incorporate the frames controls. This will include all the framing aspects of maintaining your frame, preframing, reframing and deframing. You will also use assumptions and implications to strengthen the frames you are using. These are all the refinements you will add to step seven and once you have integrated them comfortably you can move on to the next step. Step eight is going to be adding in your trance processes yet again. You will use the trance formulas you have learned including the PCAT and COMILA formulas. In these you will add future memories, post hypnotic suggestions and starting with the smallest steps. You are almost there; you have a nearly complete sophisticated hypnotic process at this point. Finally you will move on to step nine which will involve all the steps one through eight and then adding to that nested loops in step nine. You will use all the basic, intermediate, advanced and master level loops. You will also be utilizing the hard and soft loop to transition between your loops and stories. And you are complete. It is important to remember that although this process seems very complicated and in depth you will be perfecting one step at a time until it comes naturally. Once each completed step come as a natural process you will begin to master the next step. This

comfort and possibly even hypnosis. This is the most basic way to master the art of hypnotic language. these are tools you can use to start the process of practicing the flow of the language you will use in your hypnosis. as well as using that tonality to really squeeze the meanings from the words and language you are using. In this article we will be covering those topics. these are the foundations on which your processes will be built. This means you will be adding in a hypnotic tonality. It is very important that you understand not only how to use the information and skills in this article but that they are practiced to a point of natural function. As a hypnotist. These are powerful and important in that they will help you to create a smooth flow of ideas through your language. The Basics of Conversational Hypnosis There are certain cornerstones or foundations that are vital to the art of Conversational Hypnosis. You should have the ability to do them with little concentration and effort to master your hypnosis. The second step in this process is to start to pull skills from your precision language. Once you can easily flow through the language skills above you will have the very beginning foundation of Conversational Hypnosis accomplished. Then you will be ready to move on to the next level in this first step of mastery. One of the resources you have been offered in perfecting this skill has been to use a set of linguistic bridge cards. This is the very powerful glue that makes it all stick. Infant is less emotionally packed than baby. As you use your linguistic bridges and hypnotic themes you will also be adding a basic structure of trance to your themes using a rich language that is still very smooth and powerful. . The first master technique that you will want to master in this step will be the use of your linguistic bridges. Part of the reason for understanding and second nature in this first step is that without these skills there will be nothing to hold your hypnosis structures together. You will do this by not only using the linguistic bridges but using them with hypnotic themes. It must be a smooth and comfortable ride that will make people around you want to listen. If you recall hot words are words that are emotionally laden with meaning. They are more significant to a person than other words that mean the same thing. You will talk a majority of the time about things such as relaxation and trance. One of the first skills will be to start to use hot words. especially a Conversational Hypnotist.way of refining and perfecting the process will make it easy to digest and a flowing way of integrating all these powerful and important steps into one masterpiece called Conversational Hypnosis.

deep and fascinate. Good examples of these hypnotic words would be focus. bank or no/know. These are words in which the meaning of the word actually implies a trance. As you do this you will be able to begin the priming of the unconscious responses through metaphorical instructions. Like the word right or lie. it is how you use those double meanings that will affect the person you are talking to. These are words that will inevitably frustrate the trance response. they will likely just show up without you having to concentrate much attention on them. This will all work together to prime the unconscious mind to respond to hypnosis in a hypnotic way. You will also begin to transform these words into complete themes. These words are action accelerators and will amplify the meanings behind your words and themes. These are words that will make your language more comfortable. Ambiguous messages again are words that posses more than one meaning. now and instantly. Anticipation builders are another amplification tool that will be very powerful.” In doing this you have the ability to soften the language a bit but still hold your yes sets strong. perhaps and possibly will soften the effect of your statements allowing the listener to hear a soft frame and not feel forced into doing a thing. All throughout this you will also be using your basic yes sets and piggy back suggestions. You will be able to amplify the experience the listener is having by using words like suddenly. The double meanings will speak on one level to the conscious and on another to the unconscious so you can be sending a message unconsciously that has a completely different meaning than what the person hears. . This is as simple as starting to integrate them into your language. Next you will use language softeners as an amplification tool. all these words are pronounced the same and have more than one definition. This is useful in that by the time you are ready for them to go into trance there will be an almost immediate reaction as they have been kept from it and now they want it more than ever. if you remember these are authority strategies. These will not be difficult to incorporate as they come naturally with the language you are already learning to use. One of the tools you will be able to use in the sharpening of your precision language is to amplify the language. amazement. Maybe. In using these words you will be creating a dramatic tension that will greatly impact the unconscious once it is released and an action from the unconscious is demanded. “Maybe you will begin to relax now. The third master technique that you will be putting into action here is going to be the use of ambiguous messages.Another type of precision language you will include in this step is to start to use hypnotic words. The power in ambiguous messages is that they do indeed have two meanings.

Now in order to alleviate these signals you will use status. Now when you can combine and master all the principals and skills here you will be a great hypnotist by most Joe’s standards. Some Subtleties on Your Way to Mastering Conversational Hypnosis Conversational Hypnosis is a very complex art in which you are going to be painting a masterpiece with your words and language. The main concept here is to avoid trying too hard to be liked and trying too hard to be nice. what you will build everything else upon so make sure it is a good strong foundation as you will be adding a huge amount of skills and refinements to this to create a master hypnotic structure. If you can create a very hypnotic atmosphere you will create an environment where your listeners will seem to simply fall right into trance for you. The atmosphere you must create in which you conduct your hypnosis is one of these subtleties. rapport hooks. a high status and a low status. When you are assuming status in a hypnotic relationship you will need to be cognizant of choosing the right status to be in. You can also do this by changing the meanings of words and splicing two statements together at a word in the middle or beginning of the statement. This is getting someone to remember to forget a thing. wide rapport. There are subtleties that you must pay attention to. But remember this is just the beginning of what we are going to cover here. Double negatives are a way of confusing the conscious mind into shutting down and accepting whatever is next in line. a seduction and a rhythm that helps in initiating spontaneous hypnosis. The same is true for Conversational Hypnosis. You need to learn to create an atmosphere. In this valuable skill you will use amnesia techniques and double negatives in order to confuse the listener. fractionate rapport and instant rapport techniques.The fourth and final master technique in this step is that of confusion language. Double negatives will overwhelm the conscious mind with many minute details that are really of little importance. As you know there are two statuses. Now when you consider mediocre art from exceptionally great art you will notice that there are certain details in the great art that are not present in the okay or good art. add and perfect in order to become a true master of the masterpiece. In going beyond rapport you will want to train yourself to avoid certain aspects of rapport that most people will try failingly to use in generating relationships. in case you were confused. Atmosphere is a very important part of hypnosis. a feel. This is the language of confusion. This is your foundation. One of the ways to do this is to go beyond rapport. Finally in this confusion language you can use shock and surprise to release the tension of the hypnotic cycle. Amnesia techniques will help them to forget certain things on the outside but remember them when the time is right. With some individuals you will need to make your atmosphere one of .

Always remember this is a role you are playing. These handy little tools will keep things interesting. . neither status is right or wrong it is simply choosing the best status for the given situation that will benefit you both the most. The best skill within this area that you will want to pay close attention to is the heightened state of awareness.high status. Wide rapport is the next way you will alter your atmosphere to make it more apt for an altered state of mind. This will keep people coming back for more and holding their interest because they feel they need to complete the relationship. You will want to always remember to use a wide rapport with your subjects instead of a deep rapport. there is always more to find out. Fractionate rapport will add to rapport hooks and atmosphere by making the listener work for your relationship. The next main topic of overlooked skill that will help you in the creation of your Conversational Hypnosis masterpiece is using signal recognitions. You can do this by using many different topics and telling stories that place you in different settings with different themes. In a wide rapport you are making people comfortable with you in many different situations and environments not just very comfortable in one situation or environment. ears and feelings to measure and identify the trance signals that you are getting from the person you are working with. seeming as if you are a servant or an admirer. This is one of the most helpful skills you will develop. This is a state you must learn to take on so you can use your senses and feelings to see all that is happening around you. Rapport hooks will be very helpful to you in the creation of atmosphere in that they are designed to instigate conversation. You will want to use your eyes. Finally instant rapport techniques will assist in the atmosphere you need to create by using the unconscious connections you will be making with the person you are interacting with. In this concept you will give your rapport and then take it away with a distraction of some kind. commanding respect and in a sense arrogant. This is useful to you in that once you see they are entering a trance you can begin with the real meat and potatoes of your problem resolution. With others you will want to use a low status. you will be able to recognize when people are going in and out of trance. make your listener more willing to get involved in the conversation and really find out why you are so easy to talk to.

You will be awake to the signals they send and give them positive reinforcements for those signals. You can also use agreement tactics to reinforce authority. If everything you are saying sounds very important then your listener will be more apt to hearing what it is you have to say. These will assist you in creating the personal power that is so important to leading a hypnosis session. In this you will always want to remember to go first. The third subtlety that you will want to direct your attention to is that of tonality. The more deep their state the less plausible your suggestions and ideas can be. One of the main parts of performance is that you are sub-communicating the right signals to your listener. When you combine this with the tone you are using you will begin to develop a great vocal atmosphere for hypnosis. . you need to let them know it is a good thing and something they are supposed to be feeling or doing.You will use your heightened sense of awareness to match the experiences they are having. When you combine all these factors along with the command tonalities you will be creating a very good atmosphere for your hypnosis to take place. if this goes unchecked or overlooked your language will often wander down the wrong path and throw your whole session off. Another area of tonality is going to be making sure you are squeezing the meanings from all your words. or enter your own type of trance to communicate these things you will not be producing the best hypnotic environment. As you become an authority in the world of hypnosis to your listeners you will also be using the consistency strategy to make them stand by what it is they say. The final brush stroke in this part of your masterpiece is to use authority strategy to reinforce your atmosphere. This is where you will pay attention to your performance. This is beneficial for you both. This includes not only the tones you are using in your language but also the rhythms. This is most important when a person is experiencing something they are not accustomed to. the ways you use and say your words as well as the order or sequences you use. In this you will be using power tactics. you must always be willing to go first. Simply by speaking to a person in a meaningful way and using the right tone you will begin to create a hypnotic rhythm to the way you are speaking. This is very important and very powerful. If you do not go first. if they are in a lesser state of trance you will be making your suggestions and ideas very plausible. In this area you will also be using positive reinforcement. If you remember this has a lot to do with plausibility. you will judge the amount of trance your listener is in and you will determine plausibility from that.

Without these the road to success can be much longer and bumpier. All of these subtleties will help you in creating the best picture possible for hypnosis to occur and you to reach your final goals. This allows the information to sink much deeper than if you were to only state it once. Asking for a small response in the beginning and slowly building on to that response through adding a bit more each time you return. You will also want to perfect how and what type of atmosphere you will want to create for your listener. This will ensure that every response tends to make the trance or effect grow bigger. Last but not least you will also want to include the law of compounding effect in this masterpiece. How to Turn Regular Hypnosis into Conversational Hypnosis Becoming a Conversational Hypnotist is to go beyond average art and excel into masterpiece. You must also master ways to create tension using authority strategies in order to put the unconscious mind into action. In order to do this you must work on the parts of your masterpiece that truly make it a part of the world of art in Conversational Hypnosis. Seeding will help you grow the atmosphere so it is getting ever larger and more present with every re-visitation. This is much like a yes set in that every time you get a person to respond with a yes they are even more likely to keep that habit as your questions or statements become less and less agreeable. A hypnotic triple will create an atmosphere of repetition. Seeding of ideas will be valuable in that it is planting an idea in the atmosphere that will continue to grow over time. . where you will add a little too each suggestion each time and in that making the idea or suggestion stronger every time you add to it. After all this you will also want to use your persistence tactics. Your mission will be to take what you have learned in being a hypnotist and refine the parts that will truly identify you as a Conversational Hypnotist. these tactics include hypnotic triples and the seeding of ideas. This seeding will lead you into the law of successive approximation. You will of course be revisiting it to check that it is growing and adding to it as well. It is important to master the language and use hypnotic themes to get your subject into trance. you will be repeating the same things to them over and over again. These are all powerful and important tools for really creating the best environment possible for you hypnosis to take place in.You can choose to reinforce the person directly or indirectly. As you proceed with this atmosphere you will be creating yes sets and adding in the piggy back suggestions that will only add positively to your atmosphere. In Conversational Hypnosis there are aspects that are very valuable and powerful that differ from that of other forms of hypnosis.

The first step in this area of refinement will be to add in the hypnotic gaze induction. and finally at a spot somewhere three or four feet behind them. The next step is to simply go into using your trance voice. It is critical that you are able to absorb attention. You will be making sure your listener has accomplished all four stages of the protocol in using the hypnotic gaze induction. You must not be or send any signals out that you are uncomfortable with the situation. As long as you can hold a calm focused gaze you will be ready to move to the next step of this induction. once you have perfected all four steps in it you will want to start to make it more indirect. but over time you will find that the indirect ways can be more powerful. then through their eyes to the back of their head. evoke an unconscious response and use that response to direct your listener into some sort of action. You will elegantly describe the trance experience to your listener. The hypnotic gaze induction will also have you utilizing the 4 Stage Protocol. not just at their exterior. Slow your rhythms and manner of speaking and adjust the tone and volume of your voice to become your trance voice. If you will remember you will start by looking into their eyes. At first you will be using direct ways with the hypnotic gaze induction because it is simpler. You have learned that it is very powerful and you should always keep that in mind. at their heart of matters. Finally you will use the hypnotic gaze induction to explain the process of trance. It is quite important that you are able to maintain a clear and calm gaze with the other person. such as the Sixty Second Hypnotist. to combine with your hypnotic gaze induction. This will all add order and organization to the previous skills you have been mastering. In the hypnotic gaze induction you are going to want to focus in on several things. . This is the concept that will add structure to your hypnosis. The first is to remember that the first part of the hypnotic gaze induction is that you need to hold your gaze.Now you must add to and refine these skills as you learn them to make them more powerful and truly parts of Conversational Hypnosis. As you do this you will incorporate the signal recognition skills you have learned to observe any trance signs and possibly include those in your speaking as well. After this you will want to work on focusing through the person you are working with. Give them the feeling you are looking deep within them. Keep this simple by using rapport techniques and as you use your language with the hypnotic gaze induction you will start to see results. Next will be the refinement of the hypnotic gaze induction. This is one of the skills you will use to put a purpose behind the whole of your hypnosis. bypass critical factor. After you have perfected and know how to use the 4 Stage Protocol you will be using different techniques.

There are two specific ways that you can do this. These are as easy as recalling information from articles. This induction will work along great with the hypnotic gaze induction and . You will create some sort of yes set. You must have something to go on for the yes sets but other than that you simply need to use your language. It will make it much less obvious as to what you are doing. As the listener hears a few good yes sets and is in agreement with what you are saying you will make another ‘yes’ statement and attach a suggestion to the end of it. facts or anything that listener will agree to. The piggy back principal is a fairly easy one to use as long as you know a little something about your listener. In this concept you will use stories about different people you know or even fictional characters to convey a point or make indirect suggestions. This is a way of making suggestions that others can agree with and accept when it is performed correctly. This is a great principal for hypnosis and especially Conversational Hypnosis because you can use it as an induction. Master the Piggy Back Principle in Conversational Hypnosis The piggy back principal is very powerful and precise in what it can do for you in your Conversational Hypnosis. The piggy back induction in Conversational Hypnosis will provide you with yet another way to really get the hypnosis underway as well as getting the suggestions you want into the mind. Adding these few refinements should not be too difficult you have learned and practiced them all and now you are just adding them to your final work of art. The piggy back principal is the principal in which you will be attaching to your yes sets. The reason the piggy back principal works well is that if you have a statement of agreement. Remember that these skills are what will help to set you apart from a hypnotist and give you the title in Conversational Hypnotism. people. The first is the ‘my friend John’ or ‘my friend Jane’ techniques. whether it is a series of compliments. The second way to make the hypnotic gaze induction even more indirect is to use extended quotes. books and so on and so forth. the information may still be relevant but you are directing their attention to the fact that you read it here or heard it there. The reason this makes things more indirect is that it directs the attention away from the experience at hand in a way and has them focus on information taken from elsewhere. both you have learned about previously. which you have already mastered. one that the listener is saying ‘yes’ to then whatever is attached to that statement will be accepted as true on some unconscious level. which is to use a very formal hypnotic induction on them.

You can easily do this once you have learned to diversify your topics. You can actually talk about trance or you can talk about hypnotic themes. Another way to switch things to a more indirect approach is to move your focus from the external to the internal. The first concept you will want to make sure to pay special attention to is to use multiple topics. While you will start your yes sets focused on how the outside of them feels or the things around them you will move your focus to how they are feeling inside.then of course with your hypnotic language skills. Now let’s really get in to the subtleties that you need to know in order to get everything you can out of using the piggy back induction along with the hypnotic gaze induction and your language skills. The next part of the piggy back induction that you will want to refine is in building your yes sets and adding in your piggy back suggestions. relaxation and comfort. After you have refined the yes set and piggy back suggestion attachment you will move on to refine the directness or indirectness of your piggy back induction. after that you will add your suggestion of going into trance somehow. This is the basics you will always want to start with your four of five yes set statements. You will also want to remember that you can choose to be very direct or indirect in this process. One of the ways in which you previously learned to use piggy backing was to use very rich sensory descriptions that the listener can say yes to. both of which you have already mastered. Once you have learned the subtleties of how to use the piggy back induction with these other two skills you will have captured the true heart of Conversational Hypnosis. You would use statements that were true and positive but still appealed to the senses so as to really drive home the experience you were giving the listener. As you will remember this way of using sensory language can be done with multiple topics. the first is to move from direct trance themes like hypnosis and trance to more indirect themes such as focus. Since you will usually begin with being direct you will want to refine this into a more indirect way of inducing trance. Multiple topics are a great way to use the piggy back induction. . Talk about a bunch of different things that they can say yes to and then start to attach your suggestions to those. Each cycle you go through will get you talking more and more about trance and eventually that is the only topic you will be discussing because the need for the sensory information will no longer be necessary. There are several ways of doing this.

practiced and mastered these subtleties you will easily advance your Conversational Hypnosis and the piggy back induction to a more sophisticated process. this voice will need to be clearly different from your normal conversational voice and the tones you use in it will need to be clearly defined. expectations. Milton Erickson forged the way through many of the induction and brought them into the center stage of Conversational Hypnosis. truisms and just general things they have told you about themselves. Finally the last refinement you will add to the piggy back induction will be that of mind reads. The Big Secret of Milton Erickson’s Conversational Hypnosis Revealed Conversational Hypnosis is an art of hypnosis with many layers and much skill involved. He was also responsible for the hypnotic gaze induction and piggy back induction. The trance voice you develop will be the tones you will smoothly acquire any time you are moving to put a person into trance. their beliefs. . experiences. In the trance voice induction you will be first creating a trance voice. In the trance voice induction you will concentrate on improving your tonalities yet again. Once you have recognized. these are both good examples of course there are many others the list is very long. Erickson’s reputation as a hypnotist is a revered and has made his name in hypnosis a common and popular one. Mind reads are closely related to and will also assist in your yes sets as they are deep rooted in your emotional and intellectual areas of the unconscious. They are also easy topics to bring up as they are topics that are generally used in conversations all the time. Dr. Dr. the way your muscles feel heavy with relaxation. Dr. These subtleties are very powerful yet easy enough to incorporate that the positives you will see from them greatly out weigh the negative in taking the time to learn and practice them. This induction is among the favorites of Erickson’s and will be a valuable addition to your hypnosis practices. Erickson’s trance voice induction will be a powerful tool for you to learn well and use. However there are also the different inductions you must learn to use well as they will be the key to bringing your subjects into trance. Not only was he a front runner in the world of hypnosis but as such he founded the American Society for Clinical Hypnosis and was noted for his unconventional approach to psychotherapy.The air inside your lungs. The different language you must use as well as the atmosphere you create will both be very important to your success as a hypnotist. This is anything you can use that you know about the person. The main point here is turning their attention to the internal areas of themselves instead of the external.

The conscious mind will become overloaded and shut down in turn bypassing the critical factor in the process. . By combining all the techniques in a particular session you will be creating a very powerful effect. the piggy back induction and the hypnotic gaze induction.You have read about the tones you will want to incorporate in this previously which is to include a deeper. Make sure the definition between the two is a clear and audible one and use them in the appropriate situations. one for excitement and one to bring your subjects in and out of trances. smoother. Refining this hypnotic process even further will be to combine all three inductions of Dr. You will in fact be so skilled at it by the time you have practiced it that it will come quite naturally and smoothly. Messages will be coming in through each induction in different ways. calmer tone with slower speaking and very purposeful pauses and a soft rhythm. As you develop your different voices you will need to condition each one with your subjects. One of the tone refinements is to know when to use your conscious and unconscious voices. You will be embedding suggestions at all kinds of different levels for the unconscious to choose from. This will involve using the trance voice induction. This is important as your listeners will begin to associate different voices with different types of goals. Along with this refinement you will add another which will be to create many different hypnotic voices. You may have a hypnotic voice for learning. the ways you have learned to use each induction will layer in the suggestions you are making with each induction separately within the same hypnosis session. The conscious voice for times of non trance and the unconscious voice will be used when inducing an altered state of mind. Erickson together to create a multi-level way of communicating. These voices will be distinctly different enough for you to recognize the differences but you subjects may only notice the differences in their unconscious as they serve their hypnotic purposes. there will be many different processes going on and too many things to keep track of for the subject to see all that you are doing. one for relaxation. As you are using these three very powerful inductions there will be many messages going in to the listener. In this induction you will want to focus this way of speaking even more so. You see you will have already added all these concepts and the way to send them out to your listener that your unconscious mind will be doing a majority of the work for you. As you have learned all these processes separately you will not be overloaded with this process.

topics and other information. As you do this you will not make it clear as to who is saying what or when events may have happened. In your stories you must be continuing to use sensory rich descriptions with both of these concepts. Milton Erickson relied on and will add to your successes as well. As the person rattles on endlessly you begin to loose track of who is saying what and to whom. Part of learning to embed suggestions and stack realities successfully is to be a great story teller in the first place. You can integrate all these sensory descriptions into the very direct approach or you can become increasingly indirect by using the ‘my friend John/Jane’ principal or extended quotes. but always making sure that you continue to access the visual. piggy back induction and trance voice induction together will become a powerful and highly sophisticated tool that will elevate the abilities you have in your hypnosis. emotional. They will help to indirectly and directly get responses from the unconscious mind to assist in the resolution of problems with the people around you. How to Use Embedded Suggestions and Stacked Realities in Hypnosis Conversational Hypnosis you have learned thus far how to use your language expertly and how to use inductions to instill a state of trance. This is the skill of telling stories that are complicated in the sense that there are many things going on to the point of confusion.Each of the inductions will be used and refined to be used together. as you are trying to keep track of who is married to who and how . or the ability to create many different realities for your listener. Now you will need to know how to integrate embedded suggestions and stacked realities into the inductions and stories you are using in your hypnosis. are a great way to bypass the critical factor. audible and physical touch senses. It is a technique Dr. Another good example is when a person starts to explain their family to you. Stacked realities. A good example of this is when you are listening to a ‘he said she said’ story from one of your friends. They will give you the ability to embed many different suggestions at many different levels within the unconscious mind for your listener to respond to and put into action when the triggers you embed as well are fired off and the whole of the hypnosis begins to be put into a smooth flowing action toward resolution and reward. You want your stories to take on a sense of running themes together to create a confusion that will start to overload and overwhelm the conscious mind. Embedded suggestions and stacked realities are very powerful tools to master in your use of Conversational Hypnosis. These will be beneficial in the uses of embedded suggestions and stacked realities. Learning to use the hypnotic gaze induction. You can use different tools in your stories to do this. You will tell stories with many different characters.

themes and topics of your language. They are simply messages that are hidden within the words. trigger you are setting or emotional state you are incorporating. If the words sound alike it can cause a trigger of different meanings in the conscious and unconscious minds. hide messages and through a person off enough that they will not follow the story as smoothly as they would if you were being very direct and clearer. or it can be used to state you are writing down a thing. It can mean you are referring to something directionally as in you turn right at the corner. Once you have mastered stacked realities and how to work them into the themes and topics of your stories you will be moving on to the perfecting of embedded suggestions. However. The other meaning that the unconscious mind perceives. Ambiguity in hypnosis.many children they have as well as all their names things tend to start getting a little fuzzy around the middle of the story. When you use these ambiguous words and themes correctly it will send at least two different messages to the person you are talking to. The unconscious mind then knows that its job is to allow the conscious mind to have the idea that makes the most sense and the unconscious mind . if you remember can be a valuable practice when it is done right. When you thing of the word right you know it has several different meanings. will be perceived as a term associated with the problem at hand. here is a place to use it. When you start to incorporate stacked realities into your stories you will also be using a large level of ambiguity. when you use this technique correctly. Embedded suggestions are a tool that you can use in all different various types of stories and inductions. You will use ambiguous messages in your embedded suggestions as a way of saying one thing to the conscious mind but letting the unconscious mind pull a completely different meaning from the words you used. It can mean that you are correct in a thing. One will be on the conscious level and will make sense in the context you are using it in. Now the word is spelled differently in this last example but remember you are conversing and even though your mind will associate different meanings with different spelling. the solution you are after. Which of these it relates the word or theme to be completely dependant on your sub-communications and the construction of the suggestion and where it is directed by the unconscious mind? If you are thinking about and constructing your embedded suggestions well you will be letting the unconscious mind read that there are at least two different meaning for what you have just said. The ambiguity or vagueness of your comments will again cause enough confusion to bypass the critical factor. This fuzziness is the effect you are looking for when you are stacking realities. it should not cause enough concern in following the story that the person you are talking to feels they must stop you to ask a question. yes you are right that is correct.

Ignoring the fact that their frame is even a consideration will only reinforce your stance and cause insecurity in their own frame to rise. In order to maintain your frame you will always arm yourself with non-reaction. How to Use Frame Control in Hypnosis In Conversational Hypnosis you must know that language and circumstance are both very important and powerful ways of influencing the unconscious. reframe and deframe. preframe. This is an example of the power in changing a frame. This process is more effective if you are consistent in embedding the suggestions repeatedly as you go through the hypnotic process. without a context to put a statement. You have been told they are speeding to the hospital in order to save the child’s life. There are different ways in which you can control and manipulate frames. A great example of this is the same one we have used before. they are the contexts that give meaning to all the interactions you have. the thing would be meaningless to you. This is because frames are the ways in which you view things. If you stop to thing about how you consider things you will realize that without a frame. Because you have retained a new set of facts about the reason for the inconsideration you may be more forgiving and sympathetic to the situation. Frame control in hypnosis is one of the most important things you can do with a subject. . Maintaining your frame is the first option you would usually want to exercise.will attach a response to the less likely of the two. To act as if the frame that someone else is suggesting simply doesn’t exist will cause them to raise question in their frame and put more value in yours. If you are driving along and a car speeds by you and cuts you off you would more than likely be irritated or upset about the matter of inconsideration from the other driver. idea or interaction into. your frames will more than likely change. With both of these new concepts fresh in your mind you will want to achieve the most success in your Conversational Hypnosis by adding them elegantly to the inductions and stories you are using. In one way to control the frames of various interactions is to take control of the interactions themselves. Of the four framing options maintaining your frame and preframing are the most important and powerful in Conversational Hypnosis. one of the things that can help to change a frame and you now know the car has a child in it that was just hit by a drunk driver. to maintain your frame. If you are given more information. You and your clients will both benefit from them greatly. Learning to control frames is a process that you should refine simply because it is so powerful. There are essentially four options you have.

This is the ability to look at things in a new way. To know the outcome or purpose you are trying to achieve will affect the way that you preframe a thing. this is maintaining your frame in a different way. Some religious facilities may exercise an excess of control through their power as an establishment others however are truly in belief that there is only one way to be and that is of whatever religious nature they are. This is a way of controlling the frame before you get to the objection of why it is not so. Now neither is right or wrong. they do good things and that is their context. The next technique in framing is the reframe. In the hypnotic gaze induction you learned to hold a steady stare even though it is at times uncomfortable and seems to defy social boundaries. Preframing takes a bit more calculation and thought than maintaining your frame. When it comes to thoughts and interactions you will simply not back down. A good way to maintain and preframe is to become good with implications and assumptions. If preframing you will need to know the outcome of the situation you are looking for before you start working. This is an interesting stance to take and will be one you use in hypnotism to benefit you both. Create a yes set on or tell a story about the things that would have to be true in order for your frame to stand true. This is a way of stating the natural order of things and getting little resistance because the frame slips in on the coattails of the assumption or implication. So on to the second most valuable way to use frames in Conversational Hypnosis and that is to preframe. Take the idea of organized religion. Many people believe in it very deeply and others contradict it as a way of control. You will be so convinced of your frame being the only true frame that there is no other possibility in truth in the other person’s frame. the answer is probably somewhere in the middle.Maintaining your frame is a skill you have practiced both in the frames section of these articles and in the hypnotic gaze. Once you have answered the numerous questions that come from that one thought you will set your preframe up to convince a person to see things your way before actually diving into the frame itself. If you can imply and assume then many times your frame will be taken at your word as the unconscious usually registers assumptions and implications as truth. Once you know the outcome you will next ask yourself that if that were the only possible truth in the world what would have to happen to make it so. Because frames are based on the contexts we put them into that means there is no clear cut right and wrong to them. The funny thing about frames though is that when it comes to right or wrong the truth usually lies somewhere in the middle. Shed a positive light on a frame that was being viewed negatively by a .

Presto you have deframed a situation. As a challenge is raised to your frame instead of explaining it away you will challenge the frame they are set in. These are similar but useful in different ways as you will learn through out the course of your profession as a hypnotist. How to Use Hypnotic Trance Formulas in Hypnosis to Get What You Want Getting what you want out of your Conversational Hypnosis is basically going to be reaching the goals that have been set forth by you and your client. The structure of your hypnotic interactions with people will rely in part on the structures you use in the trance processes you select and combine. Deframing is the last way in which you will control and manipulate frames. When in defense mode they will be unconsciously taking in more of your frame than they will be defending their frame. Deframing is to turn the table on the person who is raising an objection to your frame. You simply switch the role. Causing it to eventually become true for them as well. The saying that every cloud has a silver lining is a simple way of saying to reframe your judgment. Now the only thing to be aware of in deframing is to maintain a positive or light attitude in that you can easily come off as aggressive or negative in other ways. There are two ways to reframe a context reframe is when you change the context that the frame is placed in. And a meaning reframe which is where you change the meaning of the frame itself. As you do this you will begin to layer all the different trance processes you have learned in a way that will achieve your goals as a hypnotist and those of your subjects. reverse the challenge. In Conversational Hypnosis you can start to structure your trance themes in way that will get the most and essential all that you are looking to achieve out of your hypnosis sessions with all your clients. This is unexpected most of the time and will set the person into a defensive mode. As you start to assess which formulas you will be using with different clients you will want to begin to become very strategic in the ways you are thinking and communicating with each person you are helping. So it is safe to say that this is a very important thing to master if you want to be a successful Conversational Hypnotist. You will have the power to include the processes you think will be the most beneficial and exclude those that may not be needed for each person’s particular needs. this will only cause your subject to distrust and feel uncomfortable with you. Since that is not the relationship you wish to have in hypnosis you should take caution to the ways in which you react when deframing. .person. There are various trance formulas that you have been learning and working with to induce and conduct your hypnosis.

After the problem has been identified you will want to use confusion to bypass the critical factor. past experiences and visualizations. You will decide which combination of trance processes is the simplest way to accomplish what you have set out to accomplish. Next would be the step of active solution. If you have a problem that you can get to quicker and easier using only a few or even one you may want to do that. You will attach the ‘A’ to the ‘P’ which will give you the ‘T’ in the end for a positive life change. This will be an induced state either and emotion or feeling that can be achieved through framing. you can select a few or use all as you decide what is appropriate. confusing the critical factor. The PCAT Formula is the process of problem. emotional triggers. The two trance processes you will be using at this time will most likely be the PCAT and the COMILA Formulas. From there you will take that route how ever it may differ from the sessions you have held in the past or will hold in the future. You can use these concepts to search the past for a solution to the problem. Future memories are when you will place a memory within the person you are hypnotizing as if it has already taken place. this doesn’t mean you cannot combine them to get a more through goal accomplished. However this is not something you must do. This is an easy process to use as the way to introduce it is a very natural way of communicating on a regular basis. a way to actively change the things the person wishes to change. This will help the mind to become formatted to create the events that will lead to that memory and making it a real memory to be carried out and . First you will want to review the PCAT Formula. If you have a difficult situation or problem to solve you may want to consider using every trance process available. stories.You can use any combination of trance processes in your hypnosis sessions. There are three purposes for the confusion and those are to create smaller building materials by breaking the problem up. Lastly you will use the transformation step. This is simply the process of attaching the problem to the solution for the outcome to be achieved. Future memories are a great tool to integrate into the PCAT Formula. These are two different types of trance process that generally have two different reasons for using. active solution and transform. In this formula you will first start out by identifying the problem which is usually very simple as people will often bring it up as a topic of conversation without much prompting on your part. this is the formula most often used when you want to help a person to create personal change for them. assists in inducing trance and bypassing the critical factor. You will also be working with future memories and post hypnotic suggestions.

trance induction or story telling to do this. After you have done all this you will want to link that mood that you have captured and intensified to a motivating factor. The first and most important thing that nested loops or nested stories do for you is to cause the unconscious mind to work harder by getting it much more interested than a . You will use this by setting emotional triggers that can be activated either while you are present or when you are not. You will see life improving changes in your subjects and you will become a great hypnotist as long as you study and practice these small steps that will create a vast difference in the results you see in your work. And finally you will move into the action phase. The next step in the COMILA Formula is to set the mood. Then you will move on to intensifying the mood you have captured.remembered truly. You can create all the perfect states you want but if there is no good trigger point to set that state into action then your efforts will fail. As you use and perfect these trance formulas and all the concepts that accompany them you will begin to see that you will have become very skilled in getting people to do what you want. When you start with the biggest and most profound trigger you know of you may be failing because the trigger must be something simple and natural that the person can adequately cope with. An Overview on How to Use Nested Loops in Hypnosis Nested loops are very important and powerful tools that you can integrate into your hypnotic processes within Conversational Hypnosis. In the COMILA Formula you will be captivating the person’s attention through the various techniques you have practiced in story telling and inductions. Find the smallest trigger that would be considered the first step in setting the person into action. The most important part of the COMILA Formula is to be sure to set your trigger correctly. The COMILA is the second type of trance process you will be using in your hypnosis in order to get what you want. Nested loops are going to provide a deep level of assistance to you within your hypnosis by doing several things. The next step in this process is to outflank the resistance through bypassing the critical factor. the more intense and absorbing the mood is the more likely you will get the behaviors you are attempting to get from the person you are speaking with. this is the trigger you set that will be fired and the action you were seeking will take place. You have learned that in order to change a person’s mind you must first change their mood and that is the same within the COMILA Formula. Again you can use any resource you have learned such as confusion. The general rule of thumb here is to start small.

You will use these loops between every story you tell in nested loops. no explanation or excuse as to why. There are four different types of nested loops that you will begin to or may have already begun to navigate your way through. A soft loop is when you lead into the next story with the one you are telling. They offer you a way to change stories with very little effort. . After you have climaxed each story you will have an open space in which to leave a suggestion for your subject and then you will move in reverse closing the last story first. A note on hard and soft loops which are going to be the very important transitions you make from one story to the next. Each story you involve in your nested loop will be told up to the climax and then you will use a soft or hard loop to continue on to the next story. Nested loops are also known to cause a thing called the Zeigarnik Effect. If you recall a nested loop is a series of three or more stories that are told in a manner together to cause the unconscious mind to be impacted greater. The reason the unconscious mind is working harder here is because the stories are momentarily left unfinished the unconscious mind will work extra hard to try to finish them off. This happens because the mind tends to forget the middle stories after the beginning of the first story and its ending have been reunited. You simply go from telling the climax of the story you are on to the beginning of the next story. They range from basic to master level with intermediate and advanced in the middle. using the bunny as a transition into the next story about how you received a bunny for your fourth birthday. Moving in reverse through the end of the stories will help to create amnesia for the listener. The basic nested loop is the simplest and will be where you start when you want to integrate nested loops in to your hypnosis.simple single story. Other things that a series of nested loops will offer you is a more secure hypnotic set of stories as well as being difficult to identify and trace. in which a thing is left incomplete causing it to evolve to a level of much higher importance within the mind. You may go from taking a walk in the wood to seeing a bunny. the second to last story next and so on until you reach the first story and finish it. A hard loop is a transition with no real warning at all. each told to its climax and then transitioned into the next story through a hard or soft loop. The basic nested loop is composed of three or more stories. Because of all this nested loops also bypass the critical factor just because there is so much action going on. Each type of nested loop will entail the same general structure only adding refinements and a few concepts to each one.

In this open space you will leave your suggestion and then continue on closing each story in reverse. This is where you start to get their emotions going up and down and sideways. The advanced nested loops are going to be repeating the process of the intermediate nested loop and adding to it the trance formulas into the actual stories you are telling. in order to advance the sophistication of the structure. nothing taken away. You still leave the suggestion only you do it in the way the formula calls for. It is important to remember that you will use this basic nested loop structure in all your nested loops. In the intermediate nested loop you will add state to your stories. The next type of nested loop is the intermediate nested loop. Of course the more advanced you get in you learning the more benefit you can acquire from using the master level nested loop instead of the basic. These are important things to practice and can be easily done simply by telling stories to your friends and family with nested loops integrated into them. Starting with the last story first and working your way back to the beginning story. The next three types of nested loops will only have things added to them. You will do this so those trance formula’s start to format the unconscious mind similar to the way the story is taking place. Again you will follow all the same steps for the basic nested loop but with two additions. Master Hypnosis! .After you tell all your story beginnings using the hard and soft loops to transition between each you will come to an open space that separates the beginnings of your stories from the endings. All of the nested loops are great and wonderful tools to use in your hypnosis. Each of the three or more stories you tell will evoke a different state or emotion from your listener. In this series of nested loops you will follow the some protocol as in the advanced nested loops but refine it even further by adding in conversational induction protocols. You will integrate these into your stories as well as the trance processes. This will make your stories consciously entertaining and unconsciously they will have deeply embedded suggestions that will start to work in the mind. Engineers & Magicians: Don’t Just Learn Hypnosis. you really want to give them a ride on different emotions that you evoke through your story telling. Finally we come to the master level nested loops. either the COMILA or PCAT and then adding your suggestion is already built into these formulas. Mechanics. As you do this the trance processes will become embedded in the stories you are telling and making the trance that much more powerful. The second thing you will add is at the space in the middle where you were originally only leaving suggestions you will now leave a trance process first.

In order to do this you are on the right track. This is what you would call a reality mechanic. The type of hypnotist that focuses only on the technique of hypnotism is focusing only on the mechanics of it. There was a time when the journey you took through any given profession was marked by certain titles. to the most defined and refined level of achievement. Some of these adjustments may last a lifetime and others may fade with time or only be short term. However when a tool fails they spend all their time blaming the tool for the failure instead of looking to the fact that they have limited themselves through only focusing on the mechanics of the tool. are not going to be broken. Now this is not something that you should only apply to the techniques you are using. You have learned that changing moods changes minds and that your reality is simply the set of frames you choose to live your life in. however in this day hypnosis is no longer marked in these same ways. This may take time or it may happen quickly depending on the frame that you are adjusting. In any case the amount of expertise you have as a hypnotist will ultimately be judged against the level of change you can create for your clients. You should constantly be looking to increase your successes through improved effectiveness. You must learn above all else how to manipulate the area of expertise you have embarked on. The problem with this lies in the tool you are blaming for the failure. When the tool works they are pleased with it and consider themselves to be somewhat magical. in fact it has been more apt to limit those who focus on it solely. you must educate your self through the various levels of advancement in order to climb to the top of the mastery mountain. excellence and elegance in your language and other skills. The problem is that the hypnotist has limited themselves by simply only focusing on the techniques . Conversational Hypnosis. Level of technique will only get you so far. The tool. being the processes and techniques of hypnosis. Therefore you will want the level of expertise you have to be at a mastery level and not just something you learned well. A reality mechanic is one who carries around with them a convenient bag of tricks and tools that usually get the job done. Because of this simple fact it is given that if you change the ways in which you think about things you will also be changing the ways in which you perceive the world you live in.There are concepts and principals that you can learn and have been learning in order to educate yourself on the art of hypnosis. You would be wise to compare yourself to the titles of the old days and use it to mark your progress as you journey through your education in hypnosis. But the question becomes when you have already learned so much on the subject of hypnosis why not master it instead of just learning it? Conversational Hypnosis is an art that is best conveyed and conducted when you have educated yourself to the point of mastery.

you can create new tools and understand how they work as well. no it is a way of knowing how to create what you need even when it is undiscovered. The best way to define reality magician is to use the words of Dr. When you reach this level you are the embodiment of hypnosis. This is a powerful set of shoes to fill. The engineer has the ability to dissect the technique or process and then put it back together in a new way that will work for the current situation much more effectively and efficiently. How do you get the promotion? Reality engineers focus not only on technique but on principal as well. In doing this you allow yourself the freedom of the knowledge in how to create new techniques when the time is right. this is like a well earned promotion. reality magician. . A reality magician goes beyond the techniques and principals and is educated and open minded enough to have the ability to create new principals as well as manipulate the boundaries of existing principals to fit the situation they are in. understanding how the processes work by studying them and seeing the inner workings of each one. A reality mechanic can do a lot of good things but they will never do great things until another person has done them first because they are in need of the tools to be handed to them. “You become the scenery to which the other people naturally respond to in the way that you intend them to. A reality engineer in essence will have the confidence and ability to meet unexpected and new situations with self assuredness. it is a complete way of thinking that will elevate your mastery endlessly. They have the knowledge to look for the information they need in order to pinpoint the best and most appropriate principals to use for each situation. already developed. hands on training is suggested. This person has not educated themselves on anything except the tools to use and if the wrong tool is chosen and fails they look to the tool for answers and it is not the tools fault for failure it was the choice that was originally at fault.involved. you do it naturally and things seem to happen solely because you intend them to happen. To do this.” This is where you want your level of Conversational Hypnosis to be. Reality magicians can create new principals and bend the old ones to fit together to assist in any situation. Now this does not mean that you disregard principals or think that only your principals are best. If you can do this then you are more likely to get the results you want more often because you have expanded the tools in which you are able to work with. Milton Erickson. You must be able to appreciate this power as well as grow it responsibly. Now there is one more level and that is the level you should constantly be striving to be at. reality magician. In order to rise above the level of reality mechanic you need to become a reality engineer.

projecting and sub-communicating that rapport you want to engage the other person in it will trigger your unconscious to send out signals of that rapport. trust and a feeling of being at ease in their presence. Going first is a concept you have learned and will use often in Conversational Hypnosis. You want to expand that rapport. physical or sub-communications you are constantly building some type of rapport. This feeling is different for everyone but it is a feeling that is usually associated with comfort. You really want the feeling of that rapport to seep from you and surround you. that feeling. This is a natural function that you learned in the earliest years of your life. In doing this a type of natural mirroring will occur in your behaviors with the . let’s say a family member or your best friend. The easiest way to build rapport with others is to always remember to go first. When you have a strong rapport with another person.How to Develop Unconscious Rapport in Hypnosis Conversational Hypnosis is as it sounds. Rapport is a very important and valuable part of Conversational Hypnosis. Many times it is helpful in learning to build rapport to associate a certain color with the feeling you link to that rapport. friends. and as you think of that feeling and person you will likely start to experience the state that goes along with the particular rapport you share with that person. As you are expanding. co-workers and even complete strangers. different ways of communicating. is easy to build. on a non hypnotic level. Building the type of rapport you need in your hypnosis is a job that requires hard work. When you do this you will sub-communicate signals to those around you about the state you are in and it will influence them to join you in that state. The more you work on intensifying the rapport within you the more it will expand outward to the person you are interacting with. Now rapport itself. Going first means that you must first enter or engage yourself in the state you want to project onto others around you. you probably feel certain things when you are in their general presence. From there you want it to fill the room and envelope the other person you are trying to build a similar rapport with. Most people will feel different things like a fluttering in the stomach or the sensation of being able to breathe easier. You do it every day with family. The fact is that rapport building is an intuitive process that you can learn how to do consciously. you can learn to repeat the rapport building processes you use everyday. non-verbal. that color with in you and let it fill you completely and intensely. When you are learning to recall a state purposefully in order to build rapport it is very important that you take that state and the feelings you associate with it and intensify it to the point of oozing. it is generally made up of different conversations. You may even be experiencing it now as you think of that person. In communication whether it is verbal.

wide and deep rapports with those around you. The more that you can get your unconscious mind to do in this area the better. but with caution to not be judging or harsh in any way. many different levels unconsciously. But that is not to say it is the best way to do it. happier or improve a certain behavior you are reaching to help people to enrich their lives. it has been tested over and over again with the same positive results. but only to the point that it is comfortable. it is a way that you are with another person. You have the opportunity to explore their world without hindering or damaging your own reality. You can be a tourist and see things the ways they see them. skills and concepts it needs in order to build strong. Without goals you really don’t have much direction. make them more fulfilling in some way. The best way to do this is to let it happen unconsciously. Rapport. rapport building can be started with going first and then can be handed off to the unconscious mind for great results as well. You will want to use all the rapport building skills and concepts you have already learned. Whether you are serving people who want to be healthier. You already know that the idea behind going first in rapport is a tried and true one. This is where things start to become a little hard for the conscious mind to track. deep rapport offers you so many ways to really experience life through another’s view point and expand your rapport while doing so.other person. Once things start to become too much you will then let your unconscious mind take over and compensate for the rest of the rapport building. In Conversational Hypnosis you are working to change people’s lives. It is very familiar and allows you entrance into their world. It is well documented in many studies that those who are successful in their business are those . Setting goals for your hypnotic sessions can be made simple by following a few important steps in order to obtain the results you and your client is looking for. so let it happen if you can. You will begin to communicate that rapport on many. so let one thing be simple and let the unconscious do something that it knows how to do already. Rapport is much like an intimate relationship. Because this is such an important and large thing to do you really must know how to set your goals for each session? If you go into your sessions without any goals it is likely that you will get nowhere as that is where you set out to be. How to Set Goals for a Hypnosis Session Hypnosis is an art that goes beyond just something that you do. The unconscious mind is already well versed in this area as you have been doing it all your life. The unconscious mind already embodies and posses all the tools.

If you don’t know what it is you want to get out of each session with each of your clients then you are doing you both a disservice because you will likely go nowhere or end up somewhere that you are not wanted. In other words if you know what you want and you focus on it you will have the power already instilled in your mind to make it a reality. You must always take that last step. Engagement is necessary for completion. You must know what it is you want. You mind is constructed in a way that is goal oriented making the focus you have become your reality. realistic and timed. If you know your purpose. In this acronym you have a perfect lay out of the information that the brain needs in order to get the goal setting process under way. Another set of rules for setting your goals is the SMART Goals system. If you remember it stands for purpose.who had goals. this is one of the most important parts of goal setting. it doesn’t really matter what system you choose as long as it is a complete one and works for you. But by knowing what you want and writing it down puts the wheels of the unconscious into motion. The biggest pitfall of the PACE formula is that people tend to follow it until they reach the final step which is to engage. affect. adapt. Purpose. measurable. The reticular activating system in your brain responsible for awareness will not zero in on the natural opportunities and will continue to simply delete them from your awareness as they don’t seem to be useful at that time. One way to look at goal setting is to remember the PACE Formula. You can’t focus your mind for a few minutes and then presto all your wishes are granted. where you want to go you will be helping your mind out a great deal. Now this doesn’t mean it just happens right away. In this you have the steps of specific. calibrate and engage. If you don’t write down what you want or actualize it in some way your unconscious will float on unaware of what it is you want and continue to skip by those natural opportunities because it is unaware that they would be helpful in goals that you have. helping you to recognize the natural opportunities that arise that will assist you in some way to reaching your goal. without engaging or taking action you will never reach the full potential of your goals. PACE is a formula used for success and can be used in goal setting. Any other system you choose will be a refinement of the PACE formula. they wrote them down and put them into action within their unconscious mind. PACE is one of the goal setting systems that many other goal setting systems are based off of. . the general concept of these four steps are a good place to start with setting goals.

Well there are many people who may like you. This is what motivates you. This is measurable it gives a limit and a turning off point for your brain to acknowledge whether the goal has been met or not. Not only do you want to finish the race but you want to finish in under thirty minutes time. smell and feel when the goals is accomplished.The first step is to be specific. This can be a hard thing to judge but the goal needs to be realistic in the real world and realistic for you. If you finish your race in less than thirty minutes you will probably see other runners finishing with you. Next is realistic. hear. This is not an excuse to not go for the highest goals you have it is simply asking that you step back and check the realizations of those goals before you embark down a path of predicted failure. remember that you can sabotage yourself simply by trying too hard. the stronger the emotion you feel when you think about your goal the stronger the motivation you will have. Be sure not to try too hard. let your unconscious . taste the water at the end of the race. Another great item to add to measurement is to use sensory rich specific terms about what will take place when your goal is complete. If there is not cutoff point then there is no rush to complete your goals. You need to be sure to set a time frame for your goals so you have a deadline. This means you should simply be realistic in your setting of goals. Having a vague goal is like saying you want to be liked. The next rule is measurable. As with anything else you can cause conscious interference that will inhibit you ability to reach the goals you have set. Once your goal is achieved your brain will look at it as complete and file it away in the ‘I did it!’ file. One last note to leave you with on goal setting. You must be specific for you unconscious to continue until the true goal is met and to pick up on the best natural opportunities for actualizing your goal. This is simply the emotions or feelings you get when you think about your goal. This means you unconscious will also be driven by that same motivation and will put more of the resources it finds available to work for your achievement. but if you get down to it and the only person who likes you is the axe murderer down the street then technically your goal has been accomplished. This rule is closely related to the first rule in the best way to make a goal measurable is to be specific. This means to let your mind know what you will see. feel the sweat of hard work and a job well done. This is the way of knowing when your goal is complete you will want to make goals that are measurable. Now that you know the rules or at least a set of rules to go by. You never said who you wanted to like you only that you wanted to be liked. Finally the last step in SMART is the step of timed. Your timeline should still be realistic but if you don’t have one you could spend your entire life trying to reach one goal and never accomplish it only because you were again not specific enough when you set the goal in the first place. The third rule in SMART is the affect. Let you mind know what success will look like for you.

Now it is said that these cycles are very much needed almost as required by your body as REM sleep.take care of the things it knows how to do and you just focus on the bigger picture of bringing the goal to mind and making wise but relaxed choices. The point in all this is to show you how powerful the art of hypnosis can be in the light that it should truly be shown in. Without these cycles your body would become too stressed and tired. There have been examples of the power of hypnosis in procedures like surgery without anesthetic. It gives the mind time to organize the events that have happened and file them in the proper places. Hypnosis is not only used for health and physical pain suppression. when you become deep in thought or even immerse yourself fully in something you are reading. People spend their days going in and out of different trances and altered states of mind. it can also expand your mental abilities and functions. Hypnosis is a great natural healthy experience to have. These cycles are thought to happen every ninety minutes and really just give your mind a break from what it is required to do all day long. become absorbed in a show or movie. An Introduction to Hypnosis & Trance Hypnosis and Conversational Hypnosis are simply natural experiences that occur all the time. Hypnosis can also increase the capacity of your creativity far beyond what you would ever expect. Not evil but a powerful art form of discipline that has an endless amount of opportunity within. Within hypnosis we have to look at the purpose of the unconscious mind as it is highly involved in this process of hypnosis. What hypnosis is is a powerful and valuable mind and body connection that enables the hypnotist to accomplish the things that seem impossible to those who are struggling with them. a person being completely awake and calmly watching as the operation is performed. The unconscious mind is responsible for many. If you think about it you probably access trances many times each day. This is the power of the body’s natural ways of using the mind to change the world you live in. So hypnosis is complete and natural ways of letting your consciousness go free. It is not a way to dominate the world with hypnotic zombies that you control. This is clear as in a trance state you can often study better and faster as well as remember information more clearly. Humans are made as any animal with instincts for survival and in a world where our minds are constantly on and going it is a natural cycle of the body to produce trances to give your mind time to reset and reorganize. when you day dream. Hypnosis is not an evil magical trick that is played on the mind. although it has been an attraction for myths of evil. It is not a way to program a person to do evil bidding or assignations. . It is important to know what hypnosis is not so you may then know what it really is.

The unconscious mind is responsible for body. Your unconscious mind is responsible for all the different emotions you feel and the firing of those emotions. This is put into action through repetition and will use these instincts to complete and create the whole picture of reality because that is the level the unconscious mind functions on. that your body just does automatically because the unconscious is telling it to do so. Emotion is another function that is handled by the unconscious mind. The unconscious mind analyzes it and maps it for you to understand the interpretations. Lastly we have performance. food digested and so on. It will restore or bring back those memories when you are strong enough to handle them in a healthy way. The unconscious mind must work in a way that serves the conscious mind for all to work properly in the body. communication and performance. In memory your unconscious mind spends time to organize and store all your memories. This is where the information you receive from the outside world comes in and is perceived by the unconscious mind. This is always happening. You experience these and many other emotions throughout your life and they are all put into effect by your unconscious mind. bored. memory. sad. lungs breathing. in this area the unconscious mind is responsible for creating instincts for the body to act on. it keeps your heart beating. All these huge categories are handled by the unconscious and most often all at the same time. blood temperature in check. emotion. It does not directly process negativity and caters the information’s to your conscious mind. It does this when your body and conscious mind are not strong enough to handle the traumatic events that take place in your life. You are happy. If you consider that the conscious mind can only comfortably handle five to nine processes at a time then the amount of processes that must be handled by the unconscious is very vast. if you stop to think about it there is never a time when you are feeling no emotion at all. The unconscious mind will work toward the goals and instances it can integrate into the bigger picture of life causing things and processes to come together for you naturally. It is also responsible for the suppression of memories. blood pressure regulated. The unconscious mind is also responsible for communication. constantly.many processes our bodies and minds need in order to survive. It takes care of all the things you often take for granted. depressed or excited at all times of your life. It is important to know the realms of the unconscious mind as you will be ultimately be dealing with the unconscious on a very regular basis. In the category of body the unconscious in left with the responsibility of preserving your body. The Fundamental Hypnosis Skills Every Hypnotist Should Know . content.

For example. As you start going first in all your hypnotic interactions you will not only be benefiting the person you are in session with you will learn from these trances as well. “Every time I say relax I want you to go deeper and deeper into trance.” Then as you continue with your language use the word relax in your statements. Suggest that every time you do a thing that they go deeper into trance. After that you will instruct them to come out of trance as you count backwards from three or so. Also as you are in trance you will have the ability to learn and experience that time more fully with your subject. Going first is a very fundamental and vital part of your Conversational Hypnosis. To do this you will enter your own trance first usually before or as y start your induction. sub-communications to your listener that show them how to enter a trance and access the same state you are in. . the do the action you suggested. In going first you will be allowing yourself to access the states that you are looking to project onto your subject. When you stick to and follow a structure you should have the ability to quickly and easily bring out trance in those around you. When you send yourself into trance you will be sending signals. There shouldn’t be any reason why you cannot access it quickly once you have the structure to follow. The first of the skills that you will use in your hypnosis training has been to learn and practice going first. It is important to remember with the basic structure we are going to look at that hypnosis is a natural and common occurrence. Going first creates a win/win situation for you and the person you are interacting with. Then you simply make yet another suggestion of something you will do to get them to learn more easily. As they do this you will move on to making a suggestion along with your hypnotic themes and language. As you count down you will add in self esteem builders on how you would like them to feel when they open their eyes. The first step in this basic structure is to create the atmosphere by simply asking the person very directly to close their eyes and enter into a trance. It is the same concept as in the example above only with a new trigger and a new action. This efficient way of working in your inductions will help to reduce the anxiety you may have in the beginning of your inductions as well.There are fundamental principals that will be of great help to you in your practices as a Conversational Hypnotist. being to learn more easily. Putting this trust in your unconscious will amaze you and show you abilities you may not be aware you even have. The next fundamental skill you will want to pay close attention to perfecting is that of basic structure in your hypnotic inductions.

This is what makes the dance of hypnosis artistic in the way that it is shared between the hypnotist and the client. You will in a way count down your paces and count up your leads. These are the linking words that seemingly flow together and create a great hypnotic theme and rhythm to your language. basic structure of inductions. things that are verifiably true. Conversational Hypnosis and Hypnotherapy are all inclusive of trance sessions that should and will take on whatever form is necessary for producing the results you and your clients are trying to reach. Pacing is to say three to four facts. The third fundamental skill in hypnosis that you should know is about and how to use your linguistic bridges. As you work on this you will get better and better at it and eventually it will come naturally. linguistic bridges and pacing and leading. Pacing and leading is a simple pattern that will help you to create a trance that is elegant and strong. . such as relax or breathe. There is not a certain way everything in hypnosis needs to happen. A Basic Structure for Hypnotherapy Hypnosis. 2 paces to 3 leads and 1 pace to 4 leads) All the while you will be integrating your trance tones into your speaking more and more with each repeating of the process.This is a very simple way to show how quickly and easily you should be able to get a person into trance. It is true that there are principals and concepts to follow as you have been learning but once trance is achieved the natural progression of that trance should be allowed and commended. Linguistic bridges will help you to tie in the hypnotic themes that are so important to your hypnosis as well as create a relaxing atmosphere from the language you are using. you will become a much more skilled hypnotist than you are at these beginning stages of your learning. A good leading statement asks through statement the person to do something that is simple and easy to do in the state they are in. If the sun is out say it is a sunny day. The next step in this process is to repeat the entire process each time giving fewer paces and more leads. After your pace you will add a lead. And as usual to end the trance you are so elegantly creating you will simply reverse the entire process. So in summary the fundamental skills you should know and practice well would be going first. You should practice these well and often as they are part of the core of what you will be doing in hypnosis. Conversational Hypnosis relies on these fundamentals and it is vital that you learn to use the to the best of your ability. The first step in pacing and leading is to pace. If you can master these skills and start to use them naturally as they just come to you. Finally the last fundamental you need to read about now is that of pacing and leading. 3 paces to 2 leads. (4 paces to 1 lead. This is a very versatile skill that will be a part of the core of your hypnosis practices.

If you don’t you will be taking that trance and all it entails into others and your own life after the session is over. In this I mean that you should be practicing your skills to keep them in the best shape they can be in as well as breaking your trances each time sessions end.The best guide you can have is that of a basic structure for hypnotherapy. change work patterns. ending trance and setting tasks and dismissal. In this way you are also making an impact on the person with your credentials and experience as well as your general demeanor. . Make sure that you are up for the task that the problems the client wishes to solve are within your realm and reach to solve. interviews. inspiring confidence your ability to help one another. The first thing you need to do in this step is to prepare yourself for the sessions and work to be done. Yet another aspect of this step is to be able to leave your work behind. identify the problem. You will do all this through six different specific steps of interviewing. The second step in this basic structure is to interview your clients. investigate the resources you have to help and challenge the patterns and presuppositions that are causing limits in the resolution of the problem. The bottom line is to live outside your therapy practice. This basic structure for hypnotherapy is all based on eight concepts which you will read about as we continue. This basic meeting will give you a chance to converse out of trance and will initiate a general relationship built on warmth and comfort. test and future pacing. You are trying to rid your clients of problems not create new ones for yourself! In great seriousness if you do not clear your mind and keep your skills honed you can start to lead yourself into an unhealthy way of living. If things vary a bit and are still producing the trance and results you have set out to obtain then you should let things happen naturally as they are. The first part of this is a meet and greet in which you will build rapport. You also need to keep yourself clean and sharp for all your processes. The eight concepts are therapeutic preparation. The first concept of therapeutic preparation is a variety of things you as a hypnotist need to practice. this is not a thing that is set in stone it is simply a guideline. keep fresh and prepare for in. identify work. It is good to keep in mind the mistakes you make and the things you learn from them but dwelling is not healthy. The next phase of this step is to conduct a formal type of interview with the client. In this interview your objectives will be to gather information. induce trance. If you are over analyzing your practice you will soon tire of it. before and after each of your therapeutic sessions. store away the problems of your clients when the session is over and you are not working on that case. comfort with one another and trust.

stories and other interventions. This is where your hypnotherapy or hypnosis will take place. be aware of it and help it to form. you can do this either informally or formally. which will build naturally as the interview takes place. After that you will move on to step four which is to challenge the problem. This will entail getting to the heart of what the client really wants to get from your sessions as well as setting goals. The second step is that of rapport. You can use any goals setting procedure you like a great one to use is the SMART goal to set an outline of what is to be resolved. This can include experiences of the client that will be helpful. In this step you will be identifying the areas in which you will be doing your work. Now you are ready to move on to step three of the basic structure in hypnotherapy. how and all the surrounding circumstances the person can give you. as well as a complete picture of the life of the client including beliefs. which is to open yourself and be aware of the person’s responses you are getting. In step four you will start with trance inductions. this is to investigate the problem. You will use the information that you were given in the interview process to identify the areas in which you can provide assistance with given the amount of time you have to work within. commitments and support systems. In this you will have to be aware to also test both the conscious and unconscious minds. values. Step five is to involve change work patterns. Part of this will be to make a judgment on what you believe your client can accomplish and work though in the given period of time you have. these are methods such as changing frames. why.The first is to calibrate. these may be from other people or invented yourself. This includes when. These are only a few options you have. You should constantly keep your mind open to new developments in this area as well as find the change work patterns that will work for you. all aspect of it. These topics will provide clues in how to solve the problem your client is faced with. . Clues that you can use in hypnosis that they have not been able to connect with the dilemma they are facing. where. The fifth step in this process is to formulate an outcome. In doing this you will challenge the beliefs and realities that the client has that surround the problem as well as seed some doubt about how concrete the problem truly is. This is simply raising questions and doubts about the problem the client is encountering. Finally the last step in this interview process will be to investigate the resources available for solving the problem. The next step in this process is that of investigation.

As you start to end your trance keep in mind that this is the most suggestible part of trance and you should use it to that advantage. Now that you have worked your way through the first six steps in the basic structure of hypnotherapy you are ready to move on to step seven which is to end the trance. And that is your simple basic structure for hypnotherapy. First testing is always going to be an important part of your hypnosis structure.Step six in basic structure is to test and future pace. In this you will want the situation to naturally trigger the solutions you are helping your client to find. in the past. If your therapy is going to fall apart you will be better off discover this while in session than to realize it happened when you were not around to patch things up. Make positive suggestions and self esteem building tools here as you bring your client out of trance. The final step in this structure is to task and dismiss the client. After that your session is ended and the person is dismissed. only do this once you are sure the trance has been broken for reasons of safety and proper function in the world outside of your office. . The language you use here will also help your client to move toward change. After you end the trance you will also want to avoid suggesting any problems occurred as well as distract their attention with a random set of comments. This will likely cause some amnesia to set in to they will only remember the end conversation of your session. Future pacing is a rehearsal of future situations that the client’s problem would have appeared in. It is important to test the progress you are making so you know what is working and what has potential of failure or falling apart. The objective here is to assign tasks to the client that will aid in the processes you have used in the hypnosis. Test thoroughly and often so you are aware of where you stand with your clients.